Asus P5AD2 Deluxe User Manual
Motherboard P5AD2 Deluxe
ii ii ii ii ii E1672 E1672 E1672 E1672 E1672 First Edition First Edition First Edition First Edition First Edition June 2004 June 2004 June 2004 June 2004 June 2004 Copyright © 2004 ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. (âASUSâ). Product warranty or service will not be extended if: (1) the product is repaired, modified or altered, unless such repair , modification of alteration is authorized in writing by ASUS; or (2) the serial number of the product is defaced or missing. ASUS PROVIDES THIS MANUAL âAS ISâ WITHOUT W ARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANT ABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ASUS, ITS DIRECT ORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT , SPECIAL, INCIDENT AL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF USE OR DA T A, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS AND THE LIKE), EVEN IF ASUS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY DEFECT OR ERROR IN THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT . SPECIFICA TIONS AND INFORMA TION CONT AINED IN THIS MANUAL ARE FURNISHED FOR INFORMA TIONAL USE ONL Y , AND ARE SUBJECT T O CHANGE A T ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY ASUS. ASUS ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS OR INACCURACIES THA T MA Y APPEAR IN THIS MANUAL, INCLUDING THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE DESCRIBED IN IT . Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identification or explanation and to the ownersâ benefit, without intent to infringe.
iii iii iii iii iii Contents Notices ................................................................................................ vi Safety information ............................................................................. vii About this guide ............................................................................... viii Typography ......................................................................................... ix P5AD2 Deluxe specifications summary ................................................ x Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.1 Welcome! .............................................................................. 1-1 1.2 Package contents ................................................................. 1-1 1.3 Special features .................................................................... 1-2 1.3.1 Product highlights ................................................... 1-2 1.3.2 ASUS AI Proactive features .................................... 1-5 1.3.3 Innovative ASUS features ....................................... 1-6 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.1 Before you proceed .............................................................. 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview .......................................................... 2-2 2.2.1 Placement direction ................................................ 2-2 2.2.2 Screw holes ............................................................ 2-2 2.2.3 ASUS Stack Cool ..................................................... 2-3 2.2.4 Motherboard layout ................................................ 2-4 2.2.5 Layout contents ..................................................... 2-5 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) .............................................. 2-7 2.3.1 Installling the CPU ................................................... 2-7 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and fan ........................ 2-9 2.4 System memory ................................................................. 2-12 2.4.1 Overview ............................................................... 2-12 2.4.2 Memory configurations ......................................... 2-12 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM ................................................... 2-14 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM ................................................. 2-14 2.5 Expansion slots ................................................................... 2-15 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card .................................. 2-15 2.5.2 Configuring an expansion card .............................. 2-15 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments .......................................... 2-16 2.5.4 PCI slots ................................................................ 2-17 2.5.5 PCI Express x16 slot ............................................. 2-17 2.5.6 PCI Express x1 slot ............................................... 2-17 2.6 Jumpers .............................................................................. 2-18 2.7 Connectors ......................................................................... 2-20 2.7.1 Rear panel connectors .......................................... 2-20 2.7.2 Internal connectors ............................................... 2-22
iv iv iv iv iv Contents Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up 3.1 Starting up for the first time ................................................ 3-1 3.2 Powering off the computer .................................................. 3-2 3.2.1 Using the OS shut down function ........................... 3-2 3.2.2 Using the dual function power switch .................... 3-2 3.3 ASUS POST Reporter⢠.......................................................... 3-3 3.3.1 Vocal POST messages ............................................ 3-3 3.3.2 Winbond Voice Editor ............................................. 3-5 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ........................................ 4-1 4.1.1 Creating a bootable floppy disk .............................. 4-1 4.1.2 AFUDOS utility ........................................................ 4-2 4.1.3 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ................................ 4-5 4.1.4 ASUS EZ Flash utility .............................................. 4-7 4.1.5 ASUS Update utility ................................................ 4-8 4.2 BIOS setup program ........................................................... 4-11 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen ................................................. 4-12 4.2.2 Menu bar ............................................................... 4-12 4.2.3 Navigation keys .................................................... 4-12 4.2.4 Menu items ........................................................... 4-13 4.2.5 Sub-menu items ................................................... 4-13 4.2.6 Configuration fields .............................................. 4-13 4.2.7 Pop-up window ..................................................... 4-13 4.2.8 Scroll bar .............................................................. 4-13 4.2.9 General help .......................................................... 4-13 4.3 Main menu .......................................................................... 4-14 4.3.1 System Time ......................................................... 4-14 4.3.2 System Date ......................................................... 4-14 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A ................................................ 4-14 4.3.4 Language .............................................................. 4-14 4.3.5 Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave ......... 4-15 4.3.6 IDE Configuration .................................................. 4-16 4.3.7 System Information .............................................. 4-18 4.4 Advanced menu .................................................................. 4-19 4.4.1 JumperFree Configuration .................................... 4-19 4.4.2 LAN Cable Status ................................................. 4-22 4.4.3 USB Configuration ................................................. 4-23 4.4.4 CPU Configuration ................................................. 4-24 4.4.5 Chipset ................................................................. 4-25
v v v v v Contents 4.4.6 Onboard Devices Configuration ............................ 4-27 4.4.7 PCI PnP ................................................................. 4-29 4.4.8 Speech Configuration ........................................... 4-30 4.5 Power menu ........................................................................ 4-31 4.5.1 Suspend Mode ...................................................... 4-31 4.5.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume ................................ 4-31 4.5.3 ACPI 2.0 Support .................................................. 4-31 4.5.4 ACPI APIC Support ................................................ 4-31 4.5.5 APM Configuration ................................................ 4-32 4.5.6 Hardware Monitor ................................................. 4-34 4.6 Boot menu .......................................................................... 4-36 4.6.1 Boot Device Priority .............................................. 4-36 4.6.2 Boot Settings Configuration ................................. 4-37 4.6.3 Security ................................................................ 4-38 4.7 Exit menu ........................................................................... 4-41 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.1 Installing an operating system ............................................. 5-1 5.2 Support CD information ........................................................ 5-1 5.2.1 Running the support CD ......................................... 5-1 5.2.2 Drivers menu .......................................................... 5-2 5.2.3 Utilities menu .......................................................... 5-3 5.2.4 Manuals menu ......................................................... 5-5 5.2.5 Contact information ............................................... 5-5 5.2.6 Other information ................................................... 5-6 5.3 Software information ........................................................... 5-8 5.3.1 ASUS MyLogo2⢠.................................................... 5-8 5.3.2 AI NET2 ................................................................ 5-10 5.3.3 C-Media 3D audio configuration ........................... 5-11 5.4 RAID configurations ............................................................ 5-16 5.4.1 Installing hard disks .............................................. 5-17 5.4.2 Silicon Image RAID configurations ........................ 5-18 5.4.3 Intel ® RAID configurations .................................... 5-28 5.4.4 ITE ® 8212F RAID configurations ........................... 5-32 5.5 Creating a RAID driver disk ................................................. 5-38
vi vi vi vi vi Notices Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference, and ⢠This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with manufacturerâs instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. ⢠Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. ICES-003. ICES-003. ICES-003. ICES-003. The use of shielded cables for connection of the monitor to the graphics card is required to assure compliance with FCC regulations. Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the userâs authority to operate this equipment.
vii vii vii vii vii Safety information Electrical safety Electrical safety Electrical safety Electrical safety Electrical safety ⢠To prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet before relocating the system. ⢠When adding or removing devices to or from the system, ensure that the power cables for the devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power cables from the existing system before you add a device. ⢠Before connecting or removing signal cables from the motherboard, ensure that all power cables are unplugged. ⢠Seek professional assistance before using an adpater or extension cord. These devices could interrupt the grounding circuit. ⢠Make sure that your power supply is set to the correct voltage in your area. If you are not sure about the voltage of the electrical outlet you are using, contact your local power company. ⢠If the power supply is broken, do not try to fix it by yourself. Contact a qualified service technician or your retailer. Operation safety Operation safety Operation safety Operation safety Operation safety ⢠Before installing the motherboard and adding devices on it, carefully read all the manuals that came with the package. ⢠Before using the product, make sure all cables are correctly connected and the power cables are not damaged. If you detect any damage, contact your dealer immediately. ⢠To avoid short circuits, keep paper clips, screws, and staples away from connectors, slots, sockets and circuitry. ⢠Avoid dust, humidity, and temperature extremes. Do not place the product in any area where it may become wet. ⢠Place the product on a stable surface. ⢠If you encounter technical problems with the product, contact a qualified service technician or your retailer.
viii viii viii viii viii About this guide This user guide contains the information you need when installing and configuring the motherboard. How this guide is organized How this guide is organized How this guide is organized How this guide is organized How this guide is organized This manual contains the following parts: ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction This chapter describes the features of the motherboard and the new technology it supports. ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the switches, jumpers, and connectors on the motherboard. ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence, the vocal POST messages, and ways of shutting down the system. ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided. ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support This chapter describes the contents of the support CD that comes with the motherboard package. Where to find more information Where to find more information Where to find more information Where to find more information Where to find more information Refer to the following sources for additional information and for product and software updates. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. ASUS websites ASUS websites ASUS websites ASUS websites ASUS websites The ASUS website provides updated information on ASUS hardware and software products. Refer to the ASUS contact information. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. Optional documentation Optional documentation Optional documentation Optional documentation Optional documentation Your product package may include optional documentation, such as warranty flyers, that may have been added by your dealer. These documents are not part of the standard package.
ix ix ix ix ix Conventions used in this guide Conventions used in this guide Conventions used in this guide Conventions used in this guide Conventions used in this guide To make sure that you perform certain tasks properly, take note of the following symbols used throughout this manual. Typography Bold text Bold text Bold text Bold text Bold text Indicates a menu or an item to select. Italics Used to emphasize a word or a phrase. <Key> Keys enclosed in the less-than and greater-than sign means that you must press the enclosed key. Example: <Enter> means that you must press the Enter or Return key. <Key1 Key2 Key3> If you must press two or more keys simultaneously, the key names are linked with a plus sign ( ). Example: <Ctrl Alt D> Command Means that you must type the command exactly as shown, then supply the required item or value enclosed in brackets. Example: At the DOS prompt, type the command line: afudos /i[filename] afudos /iP5GD2.ROM DANGER/WARNING: DANGER/WARNING: DANGER/WARNING: DANGER/WARNING: DANGER/WARNING: Information to prevent injury to yourself when trying to complete a task. CAUTION: CAUTION: CAUTION: CAUTION: CAUTION: Information to prevent damage to the components when trying to complete a task. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: Tips and additional information to help you complete a task. IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: Instructions that you MUST follow to complete a task.
x x x x x P5AD2 Deluxe specifications summary (continued on the next page) CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Memory Memory Memory Memory Memory Expansion slots Expansion slots Expansion slots Expansion slots Expansion slots Storage Storage Storage Storage Storage Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN (optional) (optional) (optional) (optional) (optional) High Definition High Definition High Definition High Definition High Definition Audio Audio Audio Audio Audio LAN LAN LAN LAN LAN USB USB USB USB USB IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 LGA775 socket for Intel ® Pentium ® 4/Celeron processor Compatible with Intel ® PCG 04A and 04B processors Supports Intel ® Hyper-Threading Technology Northbridge: Intel ® 925X Memory Controller Hub (MCH) Southbridge: Intel ® ICH6R 800/533 MHz Dual-channel memory architecture 4 x 240-pin DIMM sockets support unbufferred non-ECC 533/400 MHz DDR2 memory modules Up to 4 GB system memory Native DDR2-600 support 1 x PCI Express x16 slot 2 x PCI Express x1 slots 3 x PCI slots Intel ® ICH6R South Bridge supports: - 1 x Ultra DMA 100/66/33 - 4 x Serial ATA with RAID 0, RAID 1 configuration and Intel ® Matrix Storage Technology Silicon Image 3114R RAID controller supports: - 4 x Serial ATA with RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10, JBOD and RAID 5 (software patch, no WHQL) configuration ITE 8212F IDE RAID controller supports: - 2 x Ultra DMA 133/100/66 IDE - RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1, and JBOD configuration WiFi-g⢠wireless solution provides: - support for IEEE 802.11g/b standards - up to 54Mbps wireless data transmission - Software Access Point (Soft AP) feature on Windows ® XP/2003 Server OS Intel ® High Definition Audio (HD Audio) C-Media CMI9880 7.1-channel audio CODEC Dolby ® Digital Live⢠technology support Coaxial and optical S/PDIF out ports Marvell ® 88E8053 PCI Express⢠Gigabit LAN controlle r Supports Marvell ® Virtual Cable Tester technology Supports POST Network-diagnostic program Supports up to 8 USB 2.0 ports 2 x IEEE 1394a ports
xi xi xi xi xi ASUS AI Overclocking ASUS NOS (Non-delay Overclocking System) ASUS C.P.R. (CPU Parameter Recall) Adjustable CPU, memory, and PCI Express voltages Stepless Frequency Selection (SFS) from 100MHz up to 400 MHz at 1 MHz increment Adjustable FSB/DDR2 frequencies with fixed PCI/PCI-E frequencies ASUS Post Reporter⢠ASUS Q-Fan2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS MyLogo2 ASUS Stack Cool⢠technology 8 MB Flash ROM, AMI BIOS, PnP, DMI2.0, SM BIOS 2.3, WfM2.0 1 x Parallel port 1 x IEEE 1394a port 1 x LAN (RJ-45) port 1 x Wireless LAN antenna port (Wireless edition only) 1 x Wireless LAN LED (Wireless edition only) 4 x USB 2.0 ports 1 x Optical S/PDIF Out port 1 x Coaxial S/PDIF Out port 1 x PS/2 keyboard port (purple) 1 x PS/2 mouse port (green) 8-channel audio ports 1 x Floppy disk drive connector 1 x Primary IDE connector 2 x IDE RAID connectors 8 x Serial ATA RAID connectors 1 x Optical drive audio connector 1 x Front panel audio connector 2 x USB connectors 1 x IEEE 1394a port connectors 1 x GAME/MIDI port connector 1 x Serial port connector Chassis intrusion connector CPU, chassis (x2), and power fan connectors ATX power connectors (24-pin and 4-pin) System panel connector ATX power supply (with 24-pin and 4-pin 12 V plugs) ATX 12V 2.0 compliant P5AD2 Deluxe specifications summary (continued on the next page) Overclocking Overclocking Overclocking Overclocking Overclocking features features features features features Special features Special features Special features Special features Special features BIOS features BIOS features BIOS features BIOS features BIOS features Rear panel Rear panel Rear panel Rear panel Rear panel Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal connectors connectors connectors connectors connectors Power Power Power Power Power Requirement Requirement Requirement Requirement Requirement
xii xii xii xii xii P5AD2 Deluxe specifications summary Form Factor Form Factor Form Factor Form Factor Form Factor Support CD Support CD Support CD Support CD Support CD contents contents contents contents contents ATX form factor: 12 in x 9.6 in (30.5 cm x 24.4 cm) Device drivers ASUS PC Probe ASUS Live Update Utility ASUS WiFi-g⢠One-Touch Wizard Anti-virus software *Specifications are subject to change without notice.
1 Product introduction This chapter describes the motherboard features and the new technologies it supports.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe Chapter summary 1 1.1 Welcome! .............................................................................. 1-1 1.2 Package contents ................................................................. 1-1 1.3 Special features .................................................................... 1-2
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-1 1.1 Welcome! Thank you for buying an ASUS Thank you for buying an ASUS Thank you for buying an ASUS Thank you for buying an ASUS Thank you for buying an ASUS ® ® ® ® ® P5AD2 Deluxe motherboard! P5AD2 Deluxe motherboard! P5AD2 Deluxe motherboard! P5AD2 Deluxe motherboard! P5AD2 Deluxe motherboard! The motherboard delivers a host of new features and latest technologies, making it another standout in the long line of ASUS quality motherboards! Before you start installing the motherboard, and hardware devices on it, check the items in your package with the list below. 1.2 Package contents Check your motherboard package for the following items. Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe motherboard I/O modules I/O modules I/O modules I/O modules I/O modules Serial port module USB 2.0 (2 ports) and GAME (1 port) module Cables Cables Cables Cables Cables 6 x Serial ATA signal cables 3 x Serial ATA power cables (dual plugs) 2 x Ultra DMA/133 cables 80-conductor IDE cable Floppy disk drive cable Accessories Accessories Accessories Accessories Accessories Dipolar wireless LAN antenna (Wireless Edition only) I/O shield Application CDs Application CDs Application CDs Application CDs Application CDs ASUS motherboard support CD InterVideo ® WinDVD Suite ® Platinum (Retail version only) Documentation Documentation Documentation Documentation Documentation User guide If any of the above items is damaged or missing, contact your retailer.
1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.3 Special features 1.3.1 1.3.1 1.3.1 1.3.1 1.3.1 Product highlights Product highlights Product highlights Product highlights Product highlights Latest processor technology Latest processor technology Latest processor technology Latest processor technology Latest processor technology The motherboard comes with a 775-pin surface mount Land Grid Array (LGA) socket designed for the Intel ® Pentium ® 4 processor in the 775-land package. The motherboard supports the Intel ® Pentium ® 4 processor with 800/533 MHz Front Side Bus (FSB). The motherboard also supports the Intel ® Hyper-Threading Technology and is fully compatible with Intel ® 04B and 04A processors. See page 2-7 for details. Intel Intel Intel Intel Intel ® 925X chipset 925X chipset 925X chipset 925X chipset 925X chipset The Intel ® 925X Memory Controller Hub (MCH) and the ICH6R I/O controller hub provide the vital interfaces for the motherboard. The MCH supports the Intel ® Performance Accelerating Technology (PAT) that boosts system performance. The MCH also provides the processor, dual-channel memory, and PCI Express interfaces. The Intel ® ICH6R Southbridge represents the sixth generation I/O controller hub that provides the interface for the PCI Express and 8-channel high definition audio. DDR2 memory support DDR2 memory support DDR2 memory support DDR2 memory support DDR2 memory support The motherboard supports DDR2 memory which features data transfer rates of 533/400 MHz to meet the higher bandwidth requirements of the latest 3D graphics, multimedia, and Internet applications. The dual-channel DDR2 architecture doubles the bandwidth of your system memory to boost system performance, eliminating bottlenecks with peak bandwidths of up to 8.5 GB/s. Serial ATA technology Serial ATA technology Serial ATA technology Serial ATA technology Serial ATA technology The motherboard supports the Serial ATA technology through the Serial ATA interfaces and the Intel ® ICH6R. The SATA specification allows for thinner, more flexible cables with lower pin count, reduced voltage requirement, and up to 150 MB/s data transfer rate. See page 2-24 and 2-25 for details.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 1-3 1-3 1-3 1-3 1-3 Triple RAID solution Triple RAID solution Triple RAID solution Triple RAID solution Triple RAID solution Onboard RAID controllers provide the motherboard with multi-RAID functionality that allows you to select the best RAID solution using IDE or Serial ATA devices. The Intel ® ICH6R allows RAID 0 and RAID 1 configuration for four SATA connectors and supports the Intel ® Matrix Storage Technology. See page 2-24 for details. The Sil3114R controller supports four additional SATA connectors and allows RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10, JBOD, and a software patch to support RAID 5. See page 2-25 for details. If you are using IDE hard disk drives, the ITE8212 controller provides RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1, and JBOD functionality for two IDE channels that supports for up to four IDE hard disk drives. See page 2-23 for details. PCI Express⢠interface PCI Express⢠interface PCI Express⢠interface PCI Express⢠interface PCI Express⢠interface The motherboard fully supports PCI Express, the latest I/O interconnect technology that speeds up the PCI bus. PCI Express features point-to-point serial interconnections between devices and allows higher clockspeeds by carrying data in packets. This high speed interface is software compatible with existing PCI specifications. See page 2-17 for details. 8-channel high definition audio 8-channel high definition audio 8-channel high definition audio 8-channel high definition audio 8-channel high definition audio Onboard is the C-Media CMI9880 7.1-channel audio CODEC. This CODEC is fully-compliant with Intel ® High Definition Audio standard (192 KHz, 24-bit audio). With the CODEC, 8-channel audio ports, and S/PDIF interfaces, you can connect your computer to home theater decoders to produce crystal-clear digital audio. The CMI9880 CODEC comes with a software application that features jack detection to monitor the plugging status of each jack, impedance sensing to determine audio device classes, and pre-defined equalization for various audio devices. See page 2-21, 2-22, and 5-11 for details. Dolby Dolby Dolby Dolby Dolby ® Digital Live Digital Live Digital Live Digital Live Digital Live ⢠The CMI9880 audio CODEC comes with an AC-3 encoder capable of transforming your computerâs digital audio contents into real-time Dolby ® Digital stream. This digital stream passes through the S/PDIF out interfaces to an AC-3 decoder for 7.1-channel playback. See page 5-15 for details.
1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction S/PDIF digital sound ready S/PDIF digital sound ready S/PDIF digital sound ready S/PDIF digital sound ready S/PDIF digital sound ready The motherboard supports the S/PDIF In/Out function through the S/PDIF interfaces on the rear panel and at midboard. The S/PDIF technology turns your computer into a high-end entertainment system with digital connectivity to powerful audio and speaker systems. See page 2-21 for details. IEEE 1394a support IEEE 1394a support IEEE 1394a support IEEE 1394a support IEEE 1394a support The motherboard supports the IEEE 1394 interface that provides high-speed and flexible PC connectivity to a wide range of peripherals and devices compliant to IEEE 1394 standards. The IEEE 1394 interface allows up to 400Mbps transfer rates through simple, low-cost, high-bandwidth asynchronous (real-time) data interfacing between computers, peripherals, and consumer electronic devices such as camcorders, VCRs, printers,TVs, and digital cameras. See page 2-20 and 2-28 for details. USB 2.0 technology USB 2.0 technology USB 2.0 technology USB 2.0 technology USB 2.0 technology The motherboard implements the Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0 specification, dramatically increasing the connection speed from the 12 Mbps bandwidth on USB 1.1 to a fast 480 Mbps on USB 2.0. USB 2.0 is backward compatible with USB 1.1. See page 2-21 and 2-27 for details. Gigabit and wireless LAN solutions Gigabit and wireless LAN solutions Gigabit and wireless LAN solutions Gigabit and wireless LAN solutions Gigabit and wireless LAN solutions The motherboard comes with an onboard Gigabit and wireless LAN controllers to provide a total solution for your networking needs. The Gigabit LAN controller uses the PCI Express segment to provide faster data bandwidth. The onboard wireless LAN controller supports up to 54 Mbps data transmission for your wireless Internet, LAN, and file sharing requirements. See page 2-20 and 2-21 for details. Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring The CPU temperature is monitored by the ASIC (integrated in the Winbond Super I/O) to prevent overheating and damage. The system fan rotations per minute (RPM) is monitored for timely failure detection. The ASIC monitors the voltage levels to ensure stable supply of current for critical components. See page 4-34 for details.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-5 1.3.2 1.3.2 1.3.2 1.3.2 1.3.2 ASUS AI Proactive features ASUS AI Proactive features ASUS AI Proactive features ASUS AI Proactive features ASUS AI Proactive features ASUS Stack Cool⢠ASUS Stack Cool⢠ASUS Stack Cool⢠ASUS Stack Cool⢠ASUS Stack Cool⢠ASUS Stack Cool⢠is an ideal thermal solution that reduces the heat dissipated by large capacitors and motherboard components. By placing a specially designed PCB under the motherboard CPU socket, Stack Cool⢠effectively lowers the system temperature by 10º Celsius. Cooler system temperature means more stable system performance, longer component life, and more silent operation. See page 2-3 for details. ASUS WiFi-g⢠ASUS WiFi-g⢠ASUS WiFi-g⢠ASUS WiFi-g⢠ASUS WiFi-g⢠(Wireless Edition only) ASUS WiFi-g⢠is an IEEE 802.11g-compliant wireless LAN adapter that allows data transmission of up to 54 Mbps using the 2.4 GHz frequency band. ASUS provides full software application support and a user-friendly wizard to help you set up your wireless local area network effortlessly. The ASUS WiFi-g⢠is backward compatible with IEEE 802.11b devices. See page 2-21 and the WiFi-g⢠user guide for details. AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) ASUS Non-delay Overclocking System⢠(NOS) is a technology that auto-detects the CPU loading and dynamically overclocks the CPU speed only when needed. See page 4-22 for details. AI NET2 AI NET2 AI NET2 AI NET2 AI NET2 AI NET2 is a BIOS-based diagnostic tool that detects and reports Ethernet cable faults and shorts. With this utility, you can easily monitor the condition of the Ethernet cable connected to the LAN (RJ-45) port. During the bootup process, AI NET2 immediately diagnoses the LAN cable and reports shorts and faults up to 100 meters at 1 meter accuracy. See page 4-22 and 5-10 for details.
1-6 1-6 1-6 1-6 1-6 Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.3.3 1.3.3 1.3.3 1.3.3 1.3.3 Innovative ASUS features Innovative ASUS features Innovative ASUS features Innovative ASUS features Innovative ASUS features ASUS Hyper Path 2 technology ASUS Hyper Path 2 technology ASUS Hyper Path 2 technology ASUS Hyper Path 2 technology ASUS Hyper Path 2 technology The ASUS Hyper Path 2 technology optimizes the full potential of the Intel ® chipset by shortening the latency time between the CPU and the system memory. Enabling Hyper Path 2 on systems with the Intel ® PAT improves memory performance without affecting system stability. See page 4-25 for details. See page 4-25 for details. Native DDR2-600 support Native DDR2-600 support Native DDR2-600 support Native DDR2-600 support Native DDR2-600 support This motherboard offers native DDR2-600 memory support to ensure superior system performance. With current processors supporting 800 MHz FSB, DDR2-600 provides the fastest solution for eliminating system bottlenecks when running system-intensive applications. See page 2-12, 2-13 and 4-20 for details. CrashFree BIOS 2 CrashFree BIOS 2 CrashFree BIOS 2 CrashFree BIOS 2 CrashFree BIOS 2 This feature allows you to restore the original BIOS data from the support CD in case when the BIOS codes and data are corrupted. This protection eliminates the need to buy a replacement ROM chip. See page 4-5 for details. ASUS Q-Fan 2 technology ASUS Q-Fan 2 technology ASUS Q-Fan 2 technology ASUS Q-Fan 2 technology ASUS Q-Fan 2 technology The ASUS Q-Fan 2 technology smartly adjusts the fan speeds according to the system loading to ensure quiet, cool, and efficient operation. |See page 4-34 for details. ASUS POST Reporter⢠ASUS POST Reporter⢠ASUS POST Reporter⢠ASUS POST Reporter⢠ASUS POST Reporter⢠The motherboard offers a new exciting feature called the ASUS POST Reporter⢠to provide friendly voice messages and alerts during the Power-On Self-Tests (POST) informing you of the system boot status and causes of boot errors, if any. The bundled Winbond Voice Editor software lets you to customize the voice messages in different languages. |See page 3-3 for details. ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS Multi-language BIOS The multi-language BIOS allows you to select the language of your choice from the available options. The localized BIOS menus allow easier and faster configuration. See page 4-14 for details. ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠This new feature present in the motherboard allows you to personalize and add style to your system with customizable boot logos. See page 5-8 for details.
2 Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the jumpers and connectors on the motherboard.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe Chapter summary 2 2.1 Before you proceed .............................................................. 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview .......................................................... 2-2 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) .............................................. 2-7 2.4 System memory ................................................................. 2-12 2.5 Expansion slots ................................................................... 2-15 2.6 Jumpers .............................................................................. 2-18 2.7 Connectors ......................................................................... 2-20
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-1 Onboard LED Onboard LED Onboard LED Onboard LED Onboard LED The motherboard comes with a standby power LED. The green LED lights up to indicate that the system is ON, in sleep mode, or in soft-off mode. This is a reminder that you should shut down the system and unplug the power cable before removing or plugging in any motherboard component. The illustration below shows the location of the onboard LED. 2.1 Before you proceed Take note of the following precautions before you install motherboard components or change any motherboard settings. ⢠Unplug the power cord from the wall socket before touching any component. ⢠Use a grounded wrist strap or touch a safely grounded object or to a metal object, such as the power supply case, before handling components to avoid damaging them due to static electricity. ⢠Hold components by the edges to avoid touching the ICs on them. ⢠Whenever you uninstall any component, place it on a grounded antistatic pad or in the bag that came with the component. ⢠Before you install or remove any component, ensure Before you install or remove any component, ensure Before you install or remove any component, ensure Before you install or remove any component, ensure Before you install or remove any component, ensure that the ATX power supply is switched off or the that the ATX power supply is switched off or the that the ATX power supply is switched off or the that the ATX power supply is switched off or the that the ATX power supply is switched off or the power cord is detached from the power supply. power cord is detached from the power supply. power cord is detached from the power supply. power cord is detached from the power supply. power cord is detached from the power supply. Failure to do so may cause severe damage to the motherboard, peripherals, and/or components. P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe Onboard LED SB_PWR1 ON Standby Power OFF Powered Off
2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information P5AD2 ® 2.2 Motherboard overview Before you install the motherboard, study the configuration of your chassis to ensure that the motherboard fits into it. Make sure to unplug the chassis power cord before installing or removing the motherboard. Failure to do so can cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components. Do not overtighten the screws! Doing so can damage the motherboard. 2.2.1 2.2.1 2.2.1 2.2.1 2.2.1 Placement direction Placement direction Placement direction Placement direction Placement direction When installing the motherboard, make sure that you place it into the chassis in the correct orientation. The edge with external ports goes to the rear part of the chassis as indicated in the image below. 2.2.2 2.2.2 2.2.2 2.2.2 2.2.2 Screw holes Screw holes Screw holes Screw holes Screw holes Place nine (9) screws into the holes indicated by circles to secure the motherboard to the chassis. Place this side towards Place this side towards Place this side towards Place this side towards Place this side towards the rear of the chassis the rear of the chassis the rear of the chassis the rear of the chassis the rear of the chassis
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2.2.3 2.2.3 2.2.3 2.2.3 2.2.3 ASUS Stack Cool ASUS Stack Cool ASUS Stack Cool ASUS Stack Cool ASUS Stack Cool The motherboard comes with the ASUS Stack Cool, an innovative thermal solution that provides supplementary cooling to the motherboard. Stack Cool is a mini-PCB installed underneath the motherboard CPU socket to conduct heat away from motherboard components. Stack Cool effectively lowers the motherboard temperature by as much as 10ºC. Motherboard holes Motherboard holes Motherboard holes Motherboard holes Motherboard holes (for the CPU fan and (for the CPU fan and (for the CPU fan and (for the CPU fan and (for the CPU fan and heatsink assembly pins) heatsink assembly pins) heatsink assembly pins) heatsink assembly pins) heatsink assembly pins)
2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.2.4 2.2.4 2.2.4 2.2.4 2.2.4 Motherboard layout Motherboard layout Motherboard layout Motherboard layout Motherboard layout P5AD2 ® CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power CD Super I/O 8 Mbit FWH A TX12V1 FLOPPY1 AAFP DDR2 DIMM_A1 (64 bit,240-pin module) KBPWR1 SB_PWR1 USBPW34 USBPW12 24.5cm (9.6in) 30.5cm (12.0in) Bottom:Mic In Center:Line Out T op:Line In 1394 T op: USB1 USB2 Bottom: P ANEL1 CHASSIS1 GAME1 USB78 USB56 USBPW56 USBPW78 COM1 SEC_RAID1 PRI_RAID1 CLRTC1 S ATA 1 CHA_F AN1 SA T A_RAID1 SAT A_RAID2 SAT A_RAID3 PCIEX1_1 PCIEX1_2 PCI1 IE1394_2 Intel 925X Intel ICH6R P ARALLEL PORT MS1 KB1 SPDIF_O SPDIF_O2 DDR2 DIMM_A2 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B2 (64 bit,240-pin module) PWR_F AN1 CPU_F AN1 PRI_IDE1 Speech Controller TSB43AB22A ITE 8212F Marvell 88W8310 C-Media CMI9880 Marvell 88W8000G Silicon Image SiL 31 14R WL_LED WL_ANT EA TXPWR S ATA 3 S ATA 2 S ATA 4 PCIEX16 PCI2 PCI3 SA T A_RAID4 Marvell 88E8053 USB2.0 T : USB3 B: USB4 T op: LAN port R R LGA775 CHA_F AN2 Below: Center/Subwoofer Center: Side Speaker Out T op: Rear Speaker Out
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-5 2.2.5 2.2.5 2.2.5 2.2.5 2.2.5 Layout contents Layout contents Layout contents Layout contents Layout contents Slots Slots Slots Slots Slots Page Page Page Page Page 1. DDR2 DIMM slots 2-12 2. PCI slots 2-17 3. PCI Express slot 2-17 Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers Page Page Page Page Page 1. Clear RTC RAM (3-pin CLRTC1) 2-18 2. USB Device wake-up (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34, 2-19 USBPW56, USBPW78) 3. Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) 2-19 Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Page Page Page Page Page 1. Parallel port 2-20 2. IEEE 1394a port 2-20 3. LAN (RJ-45) port 2-20 4. Rear Speaker Out port (gray) 2-20 5. Side Speaker Out port (black) 2-20 6. Line In port (light blue) 2-20 7. Line Out port (lime) 2-20 8. Wireless LAN antenna port (Wireless Edition only) 2-21 9. Wireless LAN LED (Wireless Edition only) 2-21 10. Microphone port (pink) 2-21 11. Center/Subwoofer port (yellow orange) 2-21 12. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4 2-21 13. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2 2-21 14. Optical S/PDIF Out port 2-21 15. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port 2-21 16. PS/2 keyboard port (purple) 2-21 17. PS/2 mouse port (green) 2-21
2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Page Page Page Page Page 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) 2-22 2. Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1) 2-22 3. IDE RAID connectors (40-1 pin PRI_RAID1 [blue], 2-23 SEC_RAID1 [black]) 4. Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) 2-24 5. Serial ATA RAID connectors (7-pin SATA_RAID1, SATA_RAID2, 2-25 SATA_RAID3, SATA_RAID4) 6. Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) 2-26 7. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS1) 2-26 8. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) 2-27 9. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) 2-27 10. IEEE 1394a port connector (10-1 pin IE1394 _2) 2-28 11. GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME1) 2-28 12. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) 2-29 13. CPU, Chassis, and Power Fan connectors (3-pin CPU_FAN1, PWR_FAN1, CHA_FAN1, CHA_FAN2) 2-29 14. ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR1, 4-pin ATX12V1) 2-30 15. System panel connector (20-pin PANEL1) 2-31 System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) System warnsing speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) ATX power button/soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET)
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-7 2-7 2-7 2-7 2-7 2.3.1 2.3.1 2.3.1 2.3.1 2.3.1 Installing the CPU Installing the CPU Installing the CPU Installing the CPU Installing the CPU To install a CPU: 1. Locate the CPU socket on the motherboard. 2. Press the load lever with your thumb (a), then move it to the left (b) until it is released from the retention tab. 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) The motherboard comes with a surface mount LGA775 socket designed for the Intel ® Pentium ® 4 processor in the 775-land package Before installing the CPU, make sure that the cam box is facing towards you and the load lever is on your left. Retention tab Retention tab Retention tab Retention tab Retention tab Load lever Load lever Load lever Load lever Load lever This side of the cam This side of the cam This side of the cam This side of the cam This side of the cam box should face you. box should face you. box should face you. box should face you. box should face you. Cap Cap Cap Cap Cap A B ⢠Upon purchase of the motherboard, make sure that the LGA775 socket has its cap on and the socket contacts are not bent. If the cap is damaged or missing, or if the socket contacts are bent, contact your retailer immediately. ⢠Keep the cap after installing the motherboard. ASUS will process Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) requests only if the motherboard comes with the cap on the LGA775 socket. P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe Socket 775
2-8 2-8 2-8 2-8 2-8 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 3. Lift the load lever in the direction of the arrow to a 135º angle. 4. Lift the load plate with your thumb and forefinger to a 100º angle (A), then push the PnP cap from the load plate window to remove (B). To prevent damage to the socket pins, do not remove the PnP cap unless you are installing a CPU. 5. Position the CPU over the socket, making sure that the gold triangle is on the bottom- left corner of the socket. The socket alignment key should fit into the CPU notch. Alignment key Alignment key Alignment key Alignment key Alignment key Gold triangle mark Gold triangle mark Gold triangle mark Gold triangle mark Gold triangle mark The CPU fits in only one correct orientation. DO NOT force the CPU into the socket to prevent bending the connectors on the socket and damaging the CPU! 6. Close the load plate (A), then push the load lever (B) until it snaps into the retention tab. Load plate Load plate Load plate Load plate Load plate A B A B
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-9 2-9 2-9 2-9 2-9 2.3.2 2.3.2 2.3.2 2.3.2 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and fan Installing the CPU heatsink and fan Installing the CPU heatsink and fan Installing the CPU heatsink and fan Installing the CPU heatsink and fan The Intel ® Pentium ® 4 LGA775 processor requires a specially designed heatsink and fan assembly to ensure optimum thermal condition and performance. ⢠Install the motherboard to the chassis before installing the CPU fan and heatsink assembly ⢠When you purchased a boxed Intel ® Pentium ® 4 processor, the package includes the CPU fan and heatsink assembly. If you purchased a CPU separately, make sure that you use only Intel ® -certified multi-directional heatsink and fan. ⢠Your boxed Intel ® Pentium ® 4 LGA775 processor package should come with installation instructions for the CPU, heatsink, and the retention mechanism. If the instructions in this section do not match the CPU documentation, follow the latter. ⢠Your Intel ® Pentium ® 4 LGA775 heatsink and fan assembly comes in a push-pin design and requires no tool to install. Notes on Intel Notes on Intel Notes on Intel Notes on Intel Notes on Intel ® Hyper-Threading Technology Hyper-Threading Technology Hyper-Threading Technology Hyper-Threading Technology Hyper-Threading Technology ⢠This motherboard supports Intel ® Pentium ® 4 CPUs in the 775-land package with Hyper-Threading Technology. ⢠Hyper-Threading Technology is supported under Windows ® XP/2003 Server and Linux 2.4.x (kernel) and later versions only. Under Linux, use the Hyper-Threading compiler to compile the code. If you are using any other operating systems, disable the Hyper-Threading Techonology item in the BIOS to ensure system stability and performance. ⢠Installing Windows ® XP Service Pack 1 or later version is recommended. ⢠Make sure to enable the Hyper-Threading Technology item in BIOS before installing a supported operating system. ⢠For more information on Hyper-Threading Technology, visit www.intel.com/info/hyperthreading. To use the Hyper-Threading Technology on this motherboard: 1. Install an Intel ® Pentium ® 4 CPU that supports Hyper-Threading Technology. 2. Power up the system and enter the BIOS Setup (see Chapter 4). Under the Advanced Menu, make sure that the item Hyper-Threading Technology is set to Enabled. The item appears only if you installed a CPU that supports Hyper-Threading Techonology. 3. Reboot the computer.
2-10 2-10 2-10 2-10 2-10 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2. Push each of the pins downward to secure the heatsink and fan assembly in place. 3. Rotate the push-pins clockwise to lock. Follow these steps to install the CPU heatsink and fan. 1. Place the heatsink on top of the installed CPU, making sure that the four pins match the holes on the motherboard. Push pin Push pin Push pin Push pin Push pin Motherboard hole Motherboard hole Motherboard hole Motherboard hole Motherboard hole
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-11 2-11 2-11 2-11 2-11 4. When the fan and heatsink assembly is in place, connect the CPU fan cable to the connector on the motherboard labeled CPU_FAN1. Do not forget to connect the CPU fan connector! Hardware monitoring errors can occur if you fail to plug this connector. P5AD2 P5AD2 Deluxe Fan connectors CPU_F AN1 GND CPU F AN PWR CPU F AN IN CPU F AN PWM
2-12 2-12 2-12 2-12 2-12 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.4 System memory 2.4.1 2.4.1 2.4.1 2.4.1 2.4.1 Overview Overview Overview Overview Overview The motherboard comes with four Double Data Rate 2 (DDR2) Dual Inline Memory Modules (DIMM) sockets. A DDR2 module has the same physical dimensions as a DDR DIMM but has a 240-pin footprint compared to the 184-pin DDR DIMM. DDR2 DIMMs are notched differently to prevent installation on a DDR DIMM socket. The figure illustrates the location of the DDR2 DIMM sockets: 2.4.2 2.4.2 2.4.2 2.4.2 2.4.2 Memory configurations Memory configurations Memory configurations Memory configurations Memory configurations You may install 256 MB, 512 MB and 1 GB unbuffered non-ECC DDR2 DIMMs into the DIMM sockets. ⢠For dual-channel configuration, the total size of memory module(s) installed per channel must be the same (DIMM_A1 DIMM_B1 = DIMM_A2 DIMM_B2). ⢠Always install DIMMs with the same CAS latency. For optimum compatibility, it is recommended that you obtain memory modules from the same vendor. Refer to the DDR2 Qualified Vendors List on the next page for details. ⢠Due to chipset resource allocation, the system may detect less than 4 GB system memory when you installed four 1 GB DDR2 memory modules. ⢠This motherboard does not support memory modules made up of 128 Mb chips or double sided x16 memory modules. P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe DDR2 DIMM sockets DIMM_A1 DIMM_A2 DIMM_B1 DIMM_B2 128 pins 1 12 pins Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Sockets Sockets Sockets Sockets Sockets Color Color Color Color Color Channel A Channel A Channel A Channel A Channel A DIMM_A1 and DIMM_B1 DIMM_A1 and DIMM_B1 DIMM_A1 and DIMM_B1 DIMM_A1 and DIMM_B1 DIMM_A1 and DIMM_B1 Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Channel B Channel B Channel B Channel B Channel B DIMM_A2 and DIMM_B2 DIMM_A2 and DIMM_B2 DIMM_A2 and DIMM_B2 DIMM_A2 and DIMM_B2 DIMM_A2 and DIMM_B2 Black Black Black Black Black
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-13 2-13 2-13 2-13 2-13 DDR2 (533 MHz) Qualified Vendors List DDR2 (533 MHz) Qualified Vendors List DDR2 (533 MHz) Qualified Vendors List DDR2 (533 MHz) Qualified Vendors List DDR2 (533 MHz) Qualified Vendors List 512 MB SAMSUNG M378T6553BG0-CD5 SS K4T51083QB-GCD5 â ⢠⢠1024 MB SAMSUNG M378T2953BG0-CD5 DS K4T51083QB-GCD5 4 ⢠⢠⢠256 MB SAMSUNG M378T3253FG0-CD5 SS K4T56083QF-GCD5 4 ⢠⢠512 MB SAMSUNG M378T6453FG0-CD5 DS K4T56083QF-GCD5 4 ⢠⢠⢠512 MB Infineon HYS64T64000GU-3.7-A SS HYB18T512800AC37 4 ⢠⢠⢠256 MB MICRON MT8HTF3264AY-53EB3 SS 4FBIID9CHM 4 ⢠⢠⢠512 MB CORSAIR CM2X512-4200 DS Heat-Sink Package 4 ⢠⢠⢠512 MB MICRON MT16HTF6464AG-53EB2 DS 4FBIID9BQM 4 ⢠⢠⢠1024 MB MICRON MT16HTF12864AY-53EA1 DS 4JAIID9CRZ 4 ⢠⢠⢠1024 MB Kingston KVR533D2N4/1G DS E5108AB-5C-E â ⢠⢠⢠256 MB Kingston KVR533D2N4/256 SS HYB18T512160AC-3.7 â ⢠⢠⢠1024 MB Hynix HYMP512U648-C4 DS HY5PS12821FP-C4 4 ⢠⢠⢠256 MB MICRON MT8HTF3264AY-53EB3 SS 4FBIID9CHM 4 ⢠⢠⢠512 MB MICRON MT16HTF6464AY-53EB2 DS 4FBIID9CHM 4 ⢠⢠⢠DDR2-533 with 600 MHz capability (overclocking) DDR2-533 with 600 MHz capability (overclocking) DDR2-533 with 600 MHz capability (overclocking) DDR2-533 with 600 MHz capability (overclocking) DDR2-533 with 600 MHz capability (overclocking) Size Size Size Size Size Vendor Vendor Vendor Vendor Vendor Model Model Model Model Model Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Component Component Component Component Component CL CL CL CL CL A A A A A B B B B B C C C C C DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support 512 MB SAMSUNG M378T6553BG0-CD5 SS K4T51083QB-GCD5 ⢠⢠⢠256 MB SAMSUNG M378T3253FG0-CD5 SS K4T56083QF-GCD5 ⢠⢠⢠512 MB Infineon HYB18T512800AC37 SS HYS64T64000GU-3.7-A ⢠⢠⢠512 MB CORSAIR CM2X512-4300 DS Heat-Sink Package ⢠⢠⢠512 MB Hynix HYMP564U648-C4 SS HY5PS12821F-C4 ⢠⢠⢠256 MB MICRON MT8HTF3264AG-53EB3 SS 3UBIIZ9BQT ⢠⢠⢠512 MB MICRON MT16HTF6464AG-53EB1 DS 3TBIIZ9BQT ⢠⢠⢠256 MB MICRON MT8HTF3264AG-53EB3 SS 3TBIIZ9BQT ⢠⢠⢠512 MB Kingston KVR533D2N4/512 SS E5108AB-5C-E ⢠⢠⢠512 MB Hynix HYMP564U648-C4 SS HY5PS12821F-C4 ⢠⢠⢠1024 MB Hynix N/A DS HY5PS12821F-C4 ⢠⢠⢠512 MB Hynix HYMP564U648-C4 AA SS HY5PS12821F-C4 ⢠⢠⢠1024 MB Hynix HYMP512U648-C4 DS HY5PS12821F-C4 ⢠⢠⢠1024 MB Hynix HYM512U648-C4 AA DS HY5PS12821FP-C4 ⢠⢠⢠512 MB KINGMAX 4CBIIZ9BQT DS HLBC28K-38M14-MAA ⢠⢠⢠512 MB A-DATA N/A SS K4T51083QB-GCD5 ⢠⢠⢠256 MB BRAIN POWER BS212-1-256M-MIC-533 SS 4CBIIZ9BQT ⢠⢠⢠512 MB BRAIN POWER BS213-1-512M-MIC-533 DS 4CBIIZ9BQT ⢠⢠⢠512 MB ELPIDA EBE51UD8ABFA-5C SS E5108AB-5C-E ⢠⢠⢠512 MB ELPIDA EBE51UD8ABFA-5C-E SS E5108AB-5C-E ⢠⢠⢠1024 MB ELPIDA EBE11UD8ABFA-5C-E DS E5108AB-5C-E ⢠⢠⢠512 MB Pmi MAB4512MIC SS K4T51083QB-GCD5 ⢠⢠⢠Size Size Size Size Size Vendor Vendor Vendor Vendor Vendor Model Model Model Model Model Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Component Component Component Component Component A A A A A B B B B B C C C C C DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) : SS SS SS SS S S - Single-sided DS DS DS DS D S - Double-sided CL CL CL CL C L - CAS Latency DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support : A A A A A - Supports one module inserted into either slot, in Single-channel memory configuration. B B B B B - Supports one pair of modules inserted into either the yellow slots or the black slots as one pair of Dual-channel memory configuration. C C C C C - Supports two pairs of modules inserted into the yellow and black slots as two pairs of Dual-channel memory configuration. Visit the ASUS website for the latest DDR2 Qualified Vendors List.
2-14 2-14 2-14 2-14 2-14 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.4.3 2.4.3 2.4.3 2.4.3 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM Unplug the power supply before adding or removing DIMMs or other system components. Failure to do so can cause severe damage to both the motherboard and the components. To install a DIMM: 1. Unlock a DIMM socket by pressing the retaining clips outward. 2. Align a DIMM on the socket such that the notch on the DIMM matches the break on the socket. 3. Firmly insert the DIMM into the socket until the retaining clips snap back in place and the DIMM is properly seated. 2.4.4 2.4.4 2.4.4 2.4.4 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Follow these steps to remove a DIMM. 1. Simultaneously press the retaining clips outward to unlock the DIMM. 2. Remove the DIMM from the socket. ⢠A DDR2 DIMM is keyed with a notch so that it fits in only one direction. Do not force a DIMM into a socket to avoid damaging the DIMM. ⢠The DDR2 DIMM sockets do not support DDR DIMMs. DO not install DDR DIMMs to the DDR2 DIMM sockets. Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch Support the DIMM lightly with your fingers when pressing the retaining clips. The DIMM might get damaged when it flips out with extra force. DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch 1 2 3 1 2 1
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-15 2-15 2-15 2-15 2-15 2.5 Expansion slots In the future, you may need to install expansion cards. The following sub-sections describe the slots and the expansion cards that they support. 2.5.1 2.5.1 2.5.1 2.5.1 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card To install an expansion card: 1. Before installing the expansion card, read the documentation that came with it and make the necessary hardware settings for the card. 2. Remove the system unit cover (if your motherboard is already installed in a chassis). 3. Remove the bracket opposite the slot that you intend to use. Keep the screw for later use. 4. Align the card connector with the slot and press firmly until the card is completely seated on the slot. 5. Secure the card to the chassis with the screw you removed earlier. 6. Replace the system cover. 2.5.2 2.5.2 2.5.2 2.5.2 2.5.2 Configuring an expansion card Configuring an expansion card Configuring an expansion card Configuring an expansion card Configuring an expansion card After installing the expansion card, configure the it by adjusting the software settings. 1. Turn on the system and change the necessary BIOS settings, if any. See Chapter 4 for information on BIOS setup. 2. Assign an IRQ to the card. Refer to the tables on the next page. 3. Install the software drivers for the expansion card. Make sure to unplug the power cord before adding or removing expansion cards. Failure to do so may cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components. When using PCI cards on shared slots, ensure that the drivers support âShare IRQâ or that the cards do not need IRQ assignments. Otherwise, conflicts will arise between the two PCI groups, making the system unstable and the card inoperable.
2-16 2-16 2-16 2-16 2-16 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.5.3 2.5.3 2.5.3 2.5.3 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments Interrupt assignments Interrupt assignments Interrupt assignments Interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments IRQ IRQ IRQ IRQ IRQ Priority Priority Priority Priority Priority Standard Function Standard Function Standard Function Standard Function Standard Function 0 1 System Timer 1 2 Keyboard Controller 2 â Re-direct to IRQ#9 3 11 Communications Port (COM2)* 4 12 Communications Port (COM1)* 5 13 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 6 14 Floppy Disk Controller 7 15 Printer Port (LPT1)* 8 3 System CMOS/Real Time Clock 9 4 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 10 5 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 11 6 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 12 7 PS/2 Compatible Mouse Port* 13 8 Numeric Data Processor 14 9 Primary IDE Channel 15 10 Secondary IDE Channel * These IRQs are usually available for ISA or PCI devices. IRQ assignments for this motherboard IRQ assignments for this motherboard IRQ assignments for this motherboard IRQ assignments for this motherboard IRQ assignments for this motherboard A A A A A B B B B B C C C C C D D D D D E E E E E F F F F F G G G G G H H H H H PCI slot 1 â â â â â â shared â PCI slot 2 â â â â â shared â â PCI slot 3 â shared â â ââââ PCI E x16 slot shared â â â ââââ PCI E x1 slot 1 shared â â â ââââ PCI E x1 slot 2 â â â shared ââââ Onboard USB controller 1 shared â â â ââââ Onboard USB controller 2 â shared â â ââââ Onboard USB controller 3 â â shared â ââââ Onboard USB controller 4 â â â shared ââââ Onboard USB 2.0 controller shared â â â ââââ Onboard IDE port shared â â â ââââ Onboard SATA port â shared â â ââââ Onboard Azalia audio shared â â â ââââ Onboard LAN â shared â â ââââ Onboard wireless LAN â â â â used â â â Onboard PCI SATA RAID (SI) â â â â â â shared â Onboard PCI IDE RAID (ITE) â â â â â â â used Onboard 1394 controller â â â â â shared â â
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-17 2-17 2-17 2-17 2-17 2.5.4 2.5.4 2.5.4 2.5.4 2.5.4 PCI slots PCI slots PCI slots PCI slots PCI slots The PCI slots support cards such as a LAN card, SCSI card, USB card, and other cards that comply with PCI specifications. The figure shows a LAN card installed on a PCI slot. 2.5.5 2.5.5 2.5.5 2.5.5 2.5.5 PCI Express x16 slot PCI Express x16 slot PCI Express x16 slot PCI Express x16 slot PCI Express x16 slot This motherboard supports PCI Express x16 graphic cards that comply with the PCI Express specifications. The following figure shows a graphics card installed on the PCI Express x16 slot. 2.5.6 2.5.6 2.5.6 2.5.6 2.5.6 PCI Express x1 slot PCI Express x1 slot PCI Express x1 slot PCI Express x1 slot PCI Express x1 slot This motherboard supports PCI Express x1 network cards, SCSI cards and other cards that comply with the PCI Express specifications. The following figure shows a network card installed on the PCI Express x1 slot.
2-18 2-18 2-18 2-18 2-18 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.6 Jumpers 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) This jumper allows you to clear the Real Time Clock (RTC) RAM in CMOS. You can clear the CMOS memory of date, time, and system setup parameters by erasing the CMOS RTC RAM data. The onboard button cell battery powers the RAM data in CMOS, which include system setup information such as system passwords. To erase the RTC RAM: 1. Turn OFF the computer and unplug the power cord. 2. Remove the onboard battery. 3. Move the jumper cap from pins 1-2 (default) to pins 2-3. Keep the cap on pins 2-3 for about 5~10 seconds, then move the cap back to pins 1-2. 4. Re-install the battery. 5. Plug the power cord and turn ON the computer. 6. Hold down the <Del> key during the boot process and enter BIOS setup to re-enter data. You do not need to clear the RTC when the system hangs due to overclocking. For system failure due to overclocking, use the C.P.R. (CPU Parameter Recall) feature. Shut down and reboot the system so the BIOS can automatically reset parameter settings to default values. Except when clearing the RTC RAM, never remove the cap on CLRTC jumper default position. Removing the cap will cause system boot failure! 12 23 P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe Clear RTC RAM CLRTC1 Normal Clear CMOS (Default)
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-19 2-19 2-19 2-19 2-19 3. 3. 3. 3. 3. Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) This jumper allows you to enable or disable the keyboard wake-up feature. Set this jumper to pins 2-3 ( 5VSB) to wake up the computer when you press a key on the keyboard (the default is the Space Bar). This feature requires an ATX power supply that can supply at least 1A on the 5VSB lead, and a corresponding setting in the BIOS. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. USB device wake-up jumpers (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34, USB device wake-up jumpers (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34, USB device wake-up jumpers (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34, USB device wake-up jumpers (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34, USB device wake-up jumpers (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34, USBPW56, USBPW78) USBPW56, USBPW78) USBPW56, USBPW78) USBPW56, USBPW78) USBPW56, USBPW78) Set these jumpers to 5V to wake up the computer from S1 sleep mode (CPU stopped, DRAM refreshed, system running in low power mode) using the connected USB devices. Set to 5VSB to wake up from S3 and S4 sleep modes (no power to CPU, DRAM in slow refresh, power supply in reduced power mode). The USBPWR12 and USBPWR34 jumpers are for the rear USB ports. The USBPWR56 and USBPWR78 jumpers are for the internal USB connectors that you can connect to additional USB ports. ⢠The USB device wake-up feature requires a power supply that can provide 500mA on the 5VSB lead for each USB port; otherwise, the system would not power up. ⢠The total current consumed must NOT exceed the power supply capability ( 5VSB) whether under normal condition or in sleep mode. P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe Keyboard power setting (Default) 5V 5VSB KBPWR1 23 12 P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe USB device wake-up 3 2 2 1 5V (Default) 5VSB USBPW56 USBPW78 3 2 2 1 5V (Default) 5VSB USBPW12 USBPW34
2-20 2-20 2-20 2-20 2-20 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.7 Connectors 2.7.1 2.7.1 2.7.1 2.7.1 2.7.1 Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. Parallel port. Parallel port. Parallel port. Parallel port. Parallel port. This 25-pin port connects a parallel printer, a scanner, or other devices. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. IEEE 1394a port. IEEE 1394a port. IEEE 1394a port. IEEE 1394a port. IEEE 1394a port. This 6-pin IEEE 1394a port provides high-speed connectivity for audio/video devices, storage peripherals, PCs, or portable devices. 3. 3. 3. 3. 3. LAN (RJ-45) port. LAN (RJ-45) port. LAN (RJ-45) port. LAN (RJ-45) port. LAN (RJ-45) port. This port allows Gigabit connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) through a network hub. Refer to the table below for the LAN port LED indications. 12 1 3 15 2 13 4 14 16 17 11 5 6 10 7 8 9 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. Rear Speaker Out port (gray). Rear Speaker Out port (gray). Rear Speaker Out port (gray). Rear Speaker Out port (gray). Rear Speaker Out port (gray). This port connects the rear speakers on a 4-channel, 6-channel, or 8-channel audio configuration. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. Side Speaker Out port (black). Side Speaker Out port (black). Side Speaker Out port (black). Side Speaker Out port (black). Side Speaker Out port (black). This port connects the side speakers in an 8-channel audio configuration. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. Line In port (light blue). Line In port (light blue). Line In port (light blue). Line In port (light blue). Line In port (light blue). This port connects a tape, CD, DVD player, or other audio sources. 7. 7. 7. 7. 7. Line Out port (lime). Line Out port (lime). Line Out port (lime). Line Out port (lime). Line Out port (lime). This port connects a headphone or a speaker. In 4-channel, 6-channel, and 8-channel configuration, the function of this port becomes Front Speaker Out. Refer to the audio configuration table on the next page for the function of the audio ports in 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration. ACT/LINK LED ACT/LINK LED ACT/LINK LED ACT/LINK LED ACT/LINK LED SPEED LED SPEED LED SPEED LED SPEED LED SPEED LED Status Status Status Status Status Description Description Description Description Description Status Status Status Status Status Description Description Description Description Description OFF No link OFF 10 Mbps connection GREEN Linked ORANGE 100 Mbps connection BLINKING Data activity GREEN 1 Gbps connection LAN port LED indications LAN port LED indications LAN port LED indications LAN port LED indications LAN port LED indications LAN port LAN port LAN port LAN port LAN port SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED LED LED LED LED LED ACT/LINK ACT/LINK ACT/LINK ACT/LINK ACT/LINK LED LED LED LED LED
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-21 2-21 2-21 2-21 2-21 12. 12. 12. 12. 12. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. These two 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. 13. 13. 13. 13. 13. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. These two 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. 14. 14. 14. 14. 14. Optical S/PDIF Out port Optical S/PDIF Out port Optical S/PDIF Out port Optical S/PDIF Out port Optical S/PDIF Out port . This port connects an external audio output device via an optical S/PDIF cable. 15. 15. 15. 15. 15. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port. This port connects an external audio output device via a coaxial S/PDIF cable. 16. 16. 16. 16. 16. PS/2 keyboard port (purple). PS/2 keyboard port (purple). PS/2 keyboard port (purple). PS/2 keyboard port (purple). PS/2 keyboard port (purple). This port is for a PS/2 keyboard. 17. 17. 17. 17. 17. PS/2 mouse port (green). PS/2 mouse port (green). PS/2 mouse port (green). PS/2 mouse port (green). PS/2 mouse port (green). This port is for a PS/2 mouse. 8. 8. 8. 8. 8. Wireless LAN antenna port Wireless LAN antenna port Wireless LAN antenna port Wireless LAN antenna port Wireless LAN antenna port (Wireless Edition only) . . . . . This port connects to the optional dipolar antenna for the onboard WiFi-g⢠solution. 9. 9. 9. 9. 9. Wireless LAN LED Wireless LAN LED Wireless LAN LED Wireless LAN LED Wireless LAN LED (Wireless Edition only) . . . . . This green AIR AIR AIR AIR AIR L E D indicates the data transmission status of the onboard wireless LAN adapter. Refer to the table below for the LED indications. 10. 10. 10. 10. 10. Microphone port (pink). Microphone port (pink). Microphone port (pink). Microphone port (pink). Microphone port (pink). This port connects a microphone. 11. 11. 11. 11. 11. Center/Subwoofer port (yellow orange). Center/Subwoofer port (yellow orange). Center/Subwoofer port (yellow orange). Center/Subwoofer port (yellow orange). Center/Subwoofer port (yellow orange). This port connects the center/subwoofer speakers. Status Status Status Status Status Indication Indication Indication Indication Indication On On On On O n The onboard WiFi-g⢠is on but has no data activity. Off Off Off Off O f f The onboard WiFi-g⢠card is off. Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing The onboard WiFi-g⢠card is transmitting and/or receiving data. Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Light Blue Light Blue Light Blue Light Blue Light Blue Line In Line In Line In Line In Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Line Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Pink Pink Pink Pink Pink Mic In Mic In Mic In Mic In Gray Gray Gray Gray Gray â Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Black Black Black Black Black â â â Side Speaker Out Yellow Orange Yellow Orange Yellow Orange Yellow Orange Yellow Orange â â Center/Subwoofer Center/Subwoofer Port Port Port Port Port 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel (Headset) (Headset) (Headset) (Headset) (Headset) Wireless LAN LED indications Wireless LAN LED indications Wireless LAN LED indications Wireless LAN LED indications Wireless LAN LED indications
2-22 2-22 2-22 2-22 2-22 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1) Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1) Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1) Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1) Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1) This connector is for an Ultra DMA 100/66 signal cable. The Ultra DMA 100/66 signal cable has three connectors: a blue connector for the primary IDE connector on the motherboard, a black connector for an Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE slave device (optical drive/hard disk drive), and a gray connector for an Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE master device (hard disk drive). If you install two hard disk drives, you must configure the second drive as a slave device by setting its jumper accordingly. Refer to the hard disk documentation for the jumper settings. 2.7.2 2.7.2 2.7.2 2.7.2 2.7.2 Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) This connector is for the provided floppy disk drive (FDD) signal cable. Insert one end of the cable to this connector, then connect the other end to the signal connector at the back of the floppy disk drive. Pin 5 on the connector is removed to prevent incorrect cable connection when using a FDD cable with a covered Pin 5. ⢠Pin 20 on the IDE connector is removed to match the covered hole on the Ultra DMA cable connector. This prevents incorrect insertion when you connect the IDE cable. ⢠Use the 80-conductor IDE cable for Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE devices. P5AD2 ® NOTE: Orient the red markings on the floppy ribbon cable to PIN 1. P5AD2 Deluxe Floppy disk drive connector PIN 1 FLOPPY P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe IDE connector NOTE: Orient the red markings (usually zigzag) on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. PRI_IDE1 PIN 1
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-23 2-23 2-23 2-23 2-23 ⢠Before creating a RAID set using Ultra ATA hard disks, make sure that you have connected the Ultra ATA signal cable and installed Ultra ATA 133/100/66 hard disk drives. ⢠The system automatically assigns the boot sequence of ATAPI devices connected to the IDE RAID connectors. ⢠The ITE ® 8212F controller supports a maximum of two Ultra ATA hard disk drives in RAID 1 configuration. ⢠Before creating a RAID 1 set, make sure that you set the hard disk drives as either Master or Slave device. Refer to the hard disk drive documentation for details. 3. 3. 3. 3. 3. IDE RAID connectors (40-1 pin PRI_RAID1 [red], IDE RAID connectors (40-1 pin PRI_RAID1 [red], IDE RAID connectors (40-1 pin PRI_RAID1 [red], IDE RAID connectors (40-1 pin PRI_RAID1 [red], IDE RAID connectors (40-1 pin PRI_RAID1 [red], SEC_RAID1 [red]) SEC_RAID1 [red]) SEC_RAID1 [red]) SEC_RAID1 [red]) SEC_RAID1 [red]) These connectors are for Ultra ATA 133/100/66 signal cables. The IDE RAID connectors support up to four IDE hard disk drives that you can configure as a disk array through the onboard IDE RAID controller. Refer to Chapter 5 for details on how to set up RAID configurations. These connectors are set to IDE IDE IDE IDE IDE M M M M M ode ode ode ode ode b y default. In IDE IDE IDE IDE IDE M M M M M ode ode ode ode o d e, you can connect IDE devices to these connectors such as boot/data hard disk drives or optical drives. If you intend to create an IDE RAID set using these connectors, set the ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller item in the BIOS to [RAID Mode]. See section â4.4.6 Onboard Devices Configurationâ for details. P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe IDE RAID connectors NOTE: Orient the red markings (usually zigzag) on the IDE cable to PIN 1. PRI_RAID1 PIN 1 SEC_RAID1
2-24 2-24 2-24 2-24 2-24 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1 [red], SATA2 [red], Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1 [red], SATA2 [red], Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1 [red], SATA2 [red], Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1 [red], SATA2 [red], Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1 [red], SATA2 [red], SATA3 [black], SATA4 [black]) SATA3 [black], SATA4 [black]) SATA3 [black], SATA4 [black]) SATA3 [black], SATA4 [black]) SATA3 [black], SATA4 [black]) These connectors are for the Serial ATA signal cables for Serial ATA hard disk drives. If you installed Serial ATA hard disk drives, you can create a RAID 0 or RAID 1 configuration with the Intel ® Matrix Storage Technology through the onboard Intel ® ICH6R RAID controller. Refer to Chapter 5 for details on how to set up Serial RAID configurations. These connectors are set to Standard IDE Standard IDE Standard IDE Standard IDE Standard IDE mode by default. In S S S S S tandard IDE tandard IDE tandard IDE tandard IDE tandard IDE mode, you can connect Serial ATA boot/data hard disk drives to these connectors. If you intend to create a Serial ATA RAID set using these connectors, set the Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As item in the BIOS to [RAID]. See section â4.3.6 IDE Configurationâ on page 4-15 for details. Important notes on Serial ATA Important notes on Serial ATA Important notes on Serial ATA Important notes on Serial ATA Important notes on Serial ATA ⢠You must install Windows ® 2000 Service Pack 4 or the Windows ® XP Service Pack 1 before using Serial ATA hard disk drives. The Serial ATA RAID feature (RAID 0/RAID 1) is available only if you are using Windows ® 2000/XP. ⢠Use only two Serial ATA RAID connectors for each RAID 0 or RAID 1 set. ⢠When using the connectors in S S S S S tandard IDE tandard IDE tandard IDE tandard IDE tandard IDE mode, connect the primary (boot) hard disk drive to the SATA1 or SATA2 connector. Refer to the table below for the recommended SATA hard disk drive connections. Serial ATA hard disk drive connection Serial ATA hard disk drive connection Serial ATA hard disk drive connection Serial ATA hard disk drive connection Serial ATA hard disk drive connection P5AD2 P5AD2 Deluxe SA T A connectors S ATA 1 GND RSA T A_TXP1 RSA T A_TXN1 GND RSA T A_RXP1 RSA T A_RXN1 GND S ATA 4 GND RSA T A_TXP4 RSA T A_TXN4 GND RSA T A_RXP4 RSA T A_RXN4 GND S ATA 3 GND RSA T A_TXP3 RSA T A_TXN3 GND RSA T A_RXP3 RSA T A_RXN3 GND S ATA 2 GND RSA T A_TXP2 RSA T A_TXN2 GND RSA T A_RXP2 RSA T A_RXN2 GND Connector Connector Connector Connector Connector Color Color Color Color Color Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Use Use Use Use Use SATA1/SATA2 SATA1/SATA2 SATA1/SATA2 SATA1/SATA2 SATA1/SATA2 Red Red Red Red Red Master Master Master Master Master Boot disk Boot disk Boot disk Boot disk Boot disk SATA3/SATA4 SATA3/SATA4 SATA3/SATA4 SATA3/SATA4 SATA3/SATA4 Black Black Black Black Black Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave Data disk Data disk Data disk Data disk Data disk
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-25 2-25 2-25 2-25 2-25 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. Serial ATA RAID connectors (7-pin SATA_RAID1, Serial ATA RAID connectors (7-pin SATA_RAID1, Serial ATA RAID connectors (7-pin SATA_RAID1, Serial ATA RAID connectors (7-pin SATA_RAID1, Serial ATA RAID connectors (7-pin SATA_RAID1, SATA_RAID2, SATA_RAID3, SATA_RAID4) SATA_RAID2, SATA_RAID3, SATA_RAID4) SATA_RAID2, SATA_RAID3, SATA_RAID4) SATA_RAID2, SATA_RAID3, SATA_RAID4) SATA_RAID2, SATA_RAID3, SATA_RAID4) These connectors are for Serial ATA signal cables. These connectors support up to four Serial ATA hard disk drives that you can configure as a disk array through the onboard SATA RAID controller. Refer to Chapter 5 for details on how to set up Serial ATA RAID configurations. These connectors are set to RAID Mode RAID Mode RAID Mode RAID Mode RAID Mode b y default. If you want to connect Serial ATA boot/data hard disk drives to these connectors, set the Silicon Image Controller Silicon Image Controller Silicon Image Controller Silicon Image Controller Silicon Image Controller item in the BIOS to [SATA Mode] . See section â4.4.6 Onboard Devices Configurationâ for details. ⢠Before creating a RAID set using Serial ATA hard disks, make sure that you have connected the Serial ATA signal cable and installed Serial ATA hard disk drives; ; otherwise, you cannot enter the Silicon Image RAID utility and SATA BIOS setup during POST. ⢠You can only create RAID 5 and JBOD configuration using the SATALink⢠SATA RAID Management software. See Chapter 5 for details. The RAID 5 feature is not Windows ® Hardware Quality Labs (WHQL)-certified. P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe SA T A RAID connectors GND RSA T A_TXP2 RSA T A_TXN2 GND RSA T A_RXP2 RSA T A_RXN2 GND SA T A_RAID1 GND RSA T A_TXP1 RSA T A_TXN1 GND RSA T A_RXP1 RSA T A_RXN1 GND SA T A_RAID2 GND RSA T A_TXP4 RSA T A_TXN4 GND RSA T A_RXP4 RSA T A_RXN4 GND SA T A_RAID3 GND RSA T A_TXP3 RSA T A_TXN3 GND RSA T A_RXP3 RSA T A_RXN3 GND SA T A_RAID4
2-26 2-26 2-26 2-26 2-26 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) This connector is for the 4-pin audio cable that connects to the audio connector at the back of the optical drive. Enable the CD-IN function in the audio utility when using this connector. P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe CD audio connector CD Right Audio Channel Left Audio Channel Ground Ground 7. 7. 7. 7. 7. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS1) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS1) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS1) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS1) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS1) This connector is for a chassis-mounted intrusion detection sensor or switch. Connect one end of the chassis intrusion sensor or switch cable to this connector. The chassis intrusion sensor or switch sends a high-level signal to this connector when a chassis component is removed or replaced. The signal is then generated as a chassis intrusion event. By default, the pins labeled âChassis Signalâ and âGroundâ are shorted with a jumper cap. Remove the jumper caps only when you intend to use the chassis intrusion detection feature. P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe Chassis intrusion connector CHASSIS1 5VSB_MB Chassis Signal GND (Default)
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-27 2-27 2-27 2-27 2-27 9. 9. 9. 9. 9. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) These connectors are for USB 2.0 ports. Connect the USB/GAME module cable to any of these connectors, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. These USB connectors comply with USB 2.0 specification that supports up to 480 Mbps connection speed. 8. 8. 8. 8. 8. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) This connector is for a chassis-mounted front panel audio I/O module that supports either HD Audio or legacy ACâ97 audio standard. Never connect a 1394 cable 1394 cable 1394 cable 1394 cable 1394 cable t o the USB connectors. Doing so will damage the motherboard! ⢠It is recommended that you connect a high-definition front panel audio module to this connector to avail the motherboard high-definition audio capability. ⢠By default, this connector is set to legacy ACâ97 audio. If you want to connect a high-definition front panel audio module to this connector, set the Front Panel Support Type Front Panel Support Type Front Panel Support Type Front Panel Support Type F r o n t P a n e l S u p p o r t T y p e item in the BIOS Setup to [Azalia]. See page 4-27 for details. P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe USB 2.0 connectors USB56 USB 5V USB_P6- USB_P6 GND NC USB 5V USB_P5- USB_P5 GND 1 USB78 USB 5V USB_P8- USB_P8 GND NC USB 5V USB_P7- USB_P7 GND 1 P5AD2 P5AD2 Deluxe Front panel audio connector AAFP NC MIC2 Line out_R Line out_L NC NC MICPWR NC AGND SENSE2_RETUR PORT1 L PORT2 R PORT2 L SENSE1_RETUR SENSE_SEND PORT1 R PRESENCE# GND ACâ97-compliant pin definition Azalia-compliant pin definition
2-28 2-28 2-28 2-28 2-28 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 10. 10. 10. 10. 10. IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 a port a port a port a port a port connector (10-1 pin IE1394_ connector (10-1 pin IE1394_ connector (10-1 pin IE1394_ connector (10-1 pin IE1394_ connector (10-1 pin IE1394_ 2 [red]) 2 [red]) 2 [red]) 2 [red]) 2 [red]) This connector is for an IEEE 1394a port. Connect the IEEE 1394a module cable to this connector, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. Never connect a USB cable USB cable USB cable USB cable USB cable t o the IEEE 1394a connectors. Doing so will damage the motherboard! 11. 11. 11. 11. 11. GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME1) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME1) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME1) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME1) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME1) This connector is for a GAME/MIDI port. Connect the USB/GAME module cable to this connector, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. The GAME/MIDI port connects a joystick or game pad for playing games, and MIDI devices for playing or editing audio files. P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe GAME connector GAME1 5V 5V J2B1 J2CX MIDI_OUT J2CY J2B2 MIDI_IN J1B1 J1CX GND GND J1CY J1B2 5V P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe IEEE 1394 connectors IE1394_2 1 GND 12V TPB2- GND TP A2- 12V TPB2 GND TP A2
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-29 2-29 2-29 2-29 2-29 12. 12. 12. 12. 12. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) This connector is for a serial (COM) port. Connect the serial port module cable to this connector, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. 13. 13. 13. 13. 13. CPU, Chassis, and Power Fan connectors CPU, Chassis, and Power Fan connectors CPU, Chassis, and Power Fan connectors CPU, Chassis, and Power Fan connectors CPU, Chassis, and Power Fan connectors (3-pin CPU_FAN1, PWR_FAN1, CHA_FAN1, CHA_FAN2) (3-pin CPU_FAN1, PWR_FAN1, CHA_FAN1, CHA_FAN2) (3-pin CPU_FAN1, PWR_FAN1, CHA_FAN1, CHA_FAN2) (3-pin CPU_FAN1, PWR_FAN1, CHA_FAN1, CHA_FAN2) (3-pin CPU_FAN1, PWR_FAN1, CHA_FAN1, CHA_FAN2) The fan connectors support cooling fans of 350 mA ~ 2000 mA (24 W max.) or a total of 1 A ~ 3 .48 A (41.7 6 W max.) at 12V. Connect the fan cables to the fan connectors on the motherboard, making sure that the black wire of each cable matches the ground pin of the connector. Only the CPU_FAN1 and CHA_FAN1 connectors support the ASUS Q-Fan 2 feature. Do not forget to connect the fan cables to the fan connectors. Insufficient air flow inside the system may damage the motherboard components. These are not jumpers! Do not place jumper caps on the fan connectors! P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe Serial port connector PIN 1 COM1 P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe Fan connectors CPU_F AN1 CHA_F AN1 PWR_F AN1 GND Rotation 12V GND Rotation 12V GND CPU F AN PWR CPU F AN IN CPU F AN PWM GND Rotation 12V CHA_F AN2
2-30 2-30 2-30 2-30 2-30 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 14. 14. 14. 14. 14. ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR1, 4-pin ATX12V1) ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR1, 4-pin ATX12V1) ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR1, 4-pin ATX12V1) ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR1, 4-pin ATX12V1) ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR1, 4-pin ATX12V1) These connectors are for ATX power supply plugs. The power supply plugs are designed to fit these connectors in only one orientation. Find the proper orientation and push down firmly until the connectors completely fit. P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe A TX power connectors EA TXPWR1 A TX12V1 3 V olts 3 V olts Ground 5 V olts 5 V olts Ground Ground Power OK 5V Standby 12 V olts -5 V olts 5 V olts 3 V olts -12 V olts Ground Ground Ground PSON# Ground 5 V olts 12 V olts 3 V olts 5 V olts Ground 12V DC GND 12V DC GND ⢠Use of an ATX 12 V Specification 2.0 -compliant power supply unit (PSU) that provides a minimum power of 350 W is recommended for a fully-configured system. ⢠Do not forget to connect the 4-pin ATX 12 V power plug; otherwise, the system will not boot up. ⢠Use of a PSU with a higher power output is recommended when configuring a system with more power consuming devices. The system may become unstableor may not boot up if the power is inadequate. ⢠When using an ATX 12 V PSU with a 20-pin power plug, make sure that it can provide at least 15 A on the 12 V lead, and a minimum power of 350 W. Use of an ATX 12 V PSU with a 20-pin power plug is not recommended. ⢠The ATX 12 V Specification 2.0-compliant (350 W) PSU passed the motherboard power requirement test with the following configuration: CPU : Intel ® Pentium ® 4 3.6 GHz Memory : 512 MB DDR2 (x 4) Graphics card : PCI Express x16 Nvidia EN5900 Parallel ATA devices : IDE hard disk drive (x 2) Serial ATA device : SATA hard disk drive Optical drives : CD-ROM (x 2) SCSI devices : SCSI card and SCSI hard disk drive ⢠You must install a PSU with a higher power rating if you intend to install additional devices.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-31 2-31 2-31 2-31 2-31 ⢠System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) This 3-pin connector is for the system power LED. Connect the chassis power LED cable to this connector. The system power LED lights up when you turn on the system power, and blinks when the system is in sleep mode. ⢠Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) This 2-pin connector is for the HDD Activity LED. Connect the HDD Activity LED cable to this connector. The IDE LED lights up or flashes when data is read from or written to the HDD. ⢠System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) This 4-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted system warning speaker. The speaker allows you to hear system beeps and warnings. ⢠ATX power button/soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) ATX power button/soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) ATX power button/soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) ATX power button/soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) ATX power button/soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) This connector is for the system power button. Pressing the power button turns the system on or puts the system in sleep or soft-off mode depending on the BIOS settings. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds while the system is ON turns the system OFF. ⢠Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) This 2-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted reset button for system reboot without turning off the system power. 15. 15. 15. 15. 15. System panel connector (20-pin PANEL1) System panel connector (20-pin PANEL1) System panel connector (20-pin PANEL1) System panel connector (20-pin PANEL1) System panel connector (20-pin PANEL1) This connector supports several chassis-mounted functions. The sytem panel connector is color-coded for easy connection. Refer to the connector description below for details. P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe System panel connector P ANEL1 PLED- PWR 5V Speaker SPEAKER PLED Ground Reset Ground Reset Ground Ground PWRSW PLED IDE_LED- IDE_LED IDE_LED
2-32 2-32 2-32 2-32 2-32 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information
3 Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence, the vocal POST messages, and ways of shutting down the system.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe Chapter summary 3 3.1 Starting up for the first time ................................................ 3-1 3.2 Powering off the computer .................................................. 3-2 3.3 ASUS POST Reporter⢠.......................................................... 3-3
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-1 3.1 Starting up for the first time 1. After making all the connections, replace the system case cover. 2. Be sure that all switches are off. 3. Connect the power cord to the power connector at the back of the system chassis. 4. Connect the power cord to a power outlet that is equipped with a surge protector. 5. Turn on the devices in the following order: a. Monitor b. External SCSI devices (starting with the last device on the chain) c. System power 6. After applying power, the system power LED on the system front panel case lights up. For systems withATX power supplies, the system LED lights up when you press the ATX power button. If your monitor complies with âgreenâ standards or if it has a âpower standbyâ feature, the monitor LED may light up or switch between orange and green after the system LED turns on. The system then runs the power-on self tests or POST. While the tests are running, the BIOS beeps (see BIOS beep codes table below) or additional messages appear on the screen. If you do not see anything within 30 seconds from the time you turned on the power, the system may have failed a power-on test. Check the jumper settings and connections or call your retailer for assistance. AMI BIOS beep codes AMI BIOS beep codes AMI BIOS beep codes AMI BIOS beep codes AMI BIOS beep codes Beep Description Beep Description Beep Description Beep Description Beep Description Error Error Error Error Error One beep Keyboard controller error Refresh Time error No master drive detected Two continuous beeps followed by Floppy controller failure two short beeps Two continuous beeps followed by Hardware component failure four short beeps 7. At power on, hold down the <Delete> key to enter the BIOS Setup. Follow the instructions in Chapter 4.
3-2 3-2 3-2 3-2 3-2 Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up 3.2 Powering off the computer 3.2.1 3.2.1 3.2.1 3.2.1 3.2.1 Using the OS shut down function Using the OS shut down function Using the OS shut down function Using the OS shut down function Using the OS shut down function If you are using Windows ® 2000: 1. Click the Start Start Start Start Start button then click Shut Down... Shut Down... Shut Down... Shut Down... Shut Down... 2. Make sure that the Shut Down Shut Down Shut Down Shut Down Shut Down option button is selected, then click the OK OK OK OK O K button to shut down the computer. 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows ® shuts down. If you are using Windows ® XP: 1. Click the Start Start Start Start Start button then select Turn Off Computer. Turn Off Computer. Turn Off Computer. Turn Off Computer. Turn Off Computer. 2. Click the Turn Off Turn Off Turn Off Turn Off Turn Off button to shut down the computer. 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows ® shuts down. 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 Using the dual function power switch Using the dual function power switch Using the dual function power switch Using the dual function power switch Using the dual function power switch While the system is ON, pressing the power switch for less than four seconds puts the system to sleep mode or to soft-off mode, depending on the BIOS setting. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds lets the system enter the soft-off mode regardless of the BIOS setting. Refer to section â4.5 Power Menuâ in Chapter 4 for details.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 3-3 3-3 3-3 3-3 3-3 3.3 ASUS POST Reporter⢠This motherboard includes the Winbond speech controller to support a special feature called the ASUS POST Reporterâ¢. This feature lets you hear vocal messages during POST that alerts you of system events and boot status. In case of a boot failure, you will hear the specific cause of the problem. These POST messages are customizable using the Winbond Voice Editor software that came with your package. You can record your own messages to replace the default messages. 3.3.1 3.3.1 3.3.1 3.3.1 3.3.1 Vocal POST messages Vocal POST messages Vocal POST messages Vocal POST messages Vocal POST messages Following is a list of the default POST messages and the corresponding actions you can take: POST Message POST Message POST Message POST Message POST Message Action Action Action Action Action No CPU installed ⢠Install a supported processor to the CPU socket. See section â2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU)â for details. System failed CPU test ⢠Check the CPU if properly installed. ⢠Call ASUS technical support for assistance. See the ASUS contact information on the inside front cover of this user guide. System failed memory test ⢠Install supported DDR2 DIMMs into the memory sockets. ⢠Check if the DIMMs on the DIMM sockets are properly installed. ⢠Make sure that your DIMMs are not defective. ⢠Refer to section â2.4 System memoryâ for instructions on installing a DIMM. System failed VGA test ⢠Install a PCI graphics card into one of the PCI slots, or a PCI Express AGP card into the PCI Express x16 slot. ⢠Make sure that your graphics card is not defective. System failed due to CPU ⢠Check your CPU overclocking settings in the BIOS setup and restore the default CPU parameters. No keyboard detected ⢠Check if your keyboard is properly connected to the purple PS/2 connector on the rear panel. ⢠See section â2.7.1 Rear panel connectorsâ for the location of the connector. No IDE hard disk detected ⢠Make sure you have connected an IDE hard disk drive to one of the IDE connectors on the motherboard.
3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up POST Message POST Message POST Message POST Message POST Message Action Action Action Action Action CPU temperature too high ⢠Check if the CPU fan is working properly. CPU fan failed ⢠Check the CPU fan and make sure it turns on after you apply power to the system. ⢠Make sure that your CPU fan supports the fan speed detection function. CPU voltage out of range ⢠Check your power supply and make sure it is not defective. ⢠Call ASUS technical support for assistance. See the âASUS contact informationâ on the inside front cover of this user guide. Computer now booting from operating ⢠No action required system You can enable or disable the ASUS POST Reporter⢠in the Speech Speech Speech Speech Speech Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration option in the BIOS setup. See section 4.4.8 for details.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-5 3.3.2 3.3.2 3.3.2 3.3.2 3.3.2 Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor The Winbond Voice Editor software allows you to customize the vocal POST messages. You can install this application from the support CD. Launching the Voice Editor Launching the Voice Editor Launching the Voice Editor Launching the Voice Editor Launching the Voice Editor You can launch the program from the Windows ® desktop by clicking Start Start Start Start Start > All Programs > Winbond Voice Editor > Voice Editor > All Programs > Winbond Voice Editor > Voice Editor > All Programs > Winbond Voice Editor > Voice Editor > All Programs > Winbond Voice Editor > Voice Editor > All Programs > Winbond Voice Editor > Voice Editor . The Winbond Voice Editor screen appears. Playing the default wave files Playing the default wave files Playing the default wave files Playing the default wave files Playing the default wave files To play the default wave files, simply click on a POST event on the left side of the screen, then click the Play button. Default Messages Default Messages Default Messages Default Messages Default Messages POST Events POST Events POST Events POST Events POST Events To avoid conflicts, do not run the Winbond Voice Editor while running the ASUS PC Probe application. The default language setting is English.
3-6 3-6 3-6 3-6 3-6 Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up 3. Click the Write Write Write Write Write button from the Voice Editor main window to update the EEPROM. 4. Click Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes t o confirm. Changing the default language Changing the default language Changing the default language Changing the default language Changing the default language To change the default language: 1. Click the Load Load Load Load Load button from the Voice Editor main window. A window with the available languages appears. 2. Select your desired language, then click Open Open Open Open Open . The event messages for the language you selected appear on the Voice Editor main window. Not all events on some languages have a corresponding message due to file size constraints. The next time you boot your computer, the ASUS Post Reporter announces the messages in the selected language.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 3-7 3-7 3-7 3-7 3-7 Customizing your POST messages Customizing your POST messages Customizing your POST messages Customizing your POST messages Customizing your POST messages The Voice Editor application allows you to record your own POST messages if your language is not supported or if you wish to to replace the pre-installed wave files. To customize your POST messages. 1. Launch the Voice Editor application and note the list of POST events on the leftmost column of the screen. 2. Prepare your message for each event. 3. Use a recording software (e.g. Windows ® Recorder) to record your messages, then save the messages as wave files (.WAV). 4. From the Voice Editor screen, click the Add Add Add Add Add button to display the Add Wave File Add Wave File Add Wave File Add Wave File Add Wave File window. 5. Copy the wave files that you recorded to the database, then close the window when done. ⢠The total compressed size for all the wave files must not exceed 1Mbit, so keep your messages as short as possible. ⢠To keep file sizes small, save your files at a low quality. For example, use 8-bit, mono quality at 22Khz sampling rate. ⢠Create a separate folder for your wave files so you can locate them easily.
3-8 3-8 3-8 3-8 3-8 Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up If you receive an error message telling you that the files exceed the total allowable size, do any or all of the following: ⢠Shorten your messages. ⢠Save the wave files at a lower quality ⢠Do not include seldom-used events like FDD Detection, IDE HDD Detection, etc. 6. Select a POST event on the Voice Editor main window, then click the Edit Edit Edit Edit Edit button. The Event Sound Editor Event Sound Editor Event Sound Editor Event Sound Editor Event Sound Editor window appears. 7. Locate and select your wave file for the event, then click on the arrow opposite Voice1. The file you select appears on the space next to it. 8. Click OK OK OK OK O K to return to the Voice Editor main window. 9. Do steps 6 to 8 for the other events. 10. When done, click Save Save Save Save S a v e. A window appears prompting you to save your configuration. 11. Type a file name with an .flh .flh .flh .flh .flh extension, then click Save. 12. Click the Write Write Write Write Write button to compress the file and copy into the EEPROM. 13. Click Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes o n the confirmation window that appears.
4 BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change the system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe Chapter summary 4 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ........................................ 4-1 4.2 BIOS setup program ........................................................... 4-11 4.3 Main menu .......................................................................... 4-14 4.4 Advanced menu .................................................................. 4-19 4.5 Power menu ........................................................................ 4-31 4.6 Boot menu .......................................................................... 4-36 4.7 Exit menu ........................................................................... 4-41
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS The following utilities allow you to manage and update the motherboard Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) setup. 1. ASUS AFUDOS ASUS AFUDOS ASUS AFUDOS ASUS AFUDOS ASUS AFUDOS (Updates the BIOS in DOS mode using a bootable floppy disk.) 2. ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 (Updates the BIOS using a bootable floppy disk or the motherboard support CD when the BIOS file fails or gets corrupted.) 3. ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash (Updates the BIOS in DOS mode using a floppy disk or the motherboard support CD.) 4. ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update (Updates the BIOS in Windows ® environment.) Refer to the corresponding sections for details on these utilities. 4.1.1 4.1.1 4.1.1 4.1.1 4.1.1 Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk 1. Do either one of the following to create a bootable floppy disk. DOS environment a. Insert a 1.44MB floppy disk into the drive. b. At the DOS prompt, type format A:/S then press <Enter>. Windows ® XP environment a. Insert a 1.44 MB floppy disk to the floppy disk drive. b. Click Start Start Start Start Start from the Windows ® desktop, then select My My My My My Computer Computer Computer Computer Computer . c. Select the 3 1/2 Floppy Drive icon. d. Click File File File File File from the menu, then select Format Format Format Format Format . A Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Floppy Disk Floppy Disk Floppy Disk Floppy Disk Floppy Disk window appears. e. Windows Windows Windows Windows Windows ® ® ® ® ® XP users: XP users: XP users: XP users: XP users: Select Create an MS-DOS startup Create an MS-DOS startup Create an MS-DOS startup Create an MS-DOS startup Create an MS-DOS startup disk disk disk disk disk from the format options field, then click Start Start Start Start Start . Save a copy of the original motherboard BIOS file to a bootable floppy disk in case you need to restore the BIOS in the future. Copy the original motherboard BIOS using the ASUS Update or AFUDOS utilities.
4-2 4-2 4-2 4-2 4-2 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.1.2 4.1.2 4.1.2 4.1.2 4.1.2 AFUDOS utility AFUDOS utility AFUDOS utility AFUDOS utility AFUDOS utility The AFUDOS utility allows you to update the BIOS file in DOS environment using a bootable floppy disk with the updated BIOS file. This utility also allows you to copy the current BIOS file that you can use as backup when the BIOS fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. Copying the current BIOS Copying the current BIOS Copying the current BIOS Copying the current BIOS Copying the current BIOS To copy the current BIOS file using the AFUDOS utility: Windows ® 2000 environment To create a set of boot disks for Windows ® 2000: a. Insert a formatted, high density 1.44 MB floppy disk into the drive. b. Insert the Windows ® 2000 CD to the optical drive. c. Click Start Start Start Start Start , then select Run Run Run Run Run . d. In the Open Open Open Open Open field, type D:\bootdisk\makeboot a: assuming that D is your optical drive letter. e. Press <Enter>, then follow screen instructions to continue. 2. Copy the original or the latest motherboard BIOS file to the bootable floppy disk. Main filename Main filename Main filename Main filename Main filename Extension name Extension name Extension name Extension name Extension name 1. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable floppy disk you created earlier. 2. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /o[filename] where the [filename] is any user-assigned filename not more than eight alphanumeric characters for the main filename and three alphanumeric characters for the extension name. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom ⢠Make sure that the floppy disk is not write-protected and has at least 600 KB free space to save the file. ⢠The succeeding BIOS screens are for reference only. The actual BIOS screen displays may not be same as shown.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 The utility returns to the DOS prompt after copying the current BIOS file. 3. Press <Enter>. The utility copies the current BIOS file to the floppy disk. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom AMI Firmware Update Utility - Version 1.19(ASUS V2.07(03.11.24BB)) Copyright (C) 2002 American Megatrends, Inc. All rights reserved. Reading flash ..... done Write to file...... ok A:\> 2. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable floppy disk you created earlier. 3. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /i[filename] where [filename] is the latest or the original BIOS file on the bootable floppy disk. Updating the BIOS file Updating the BIOS file Updating the BIOS file Updating the BIOS file Updating the BIOS file To update the BIOS file using the AFUDOS utility: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) and download the latest BIOS file for the motherboard. Save the BIOS file to a bootable floppy disk. A:\>afudos /iP5AD2.rom Write the BIOS filename on a piece of paper. You need to type the exact BIOS filename at the DOS prompt.
4-4 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-4 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 5. The utility returns to the DOS prompt after the BIOS update process is completed. Reboot the system from the hard disk drive. A:\>afudos /iP5AD2.rom AMI Firmware Update Utility - Version 1.19(ASUS V2.07(03.11.24BB)) Copyright (C) 2002 American Megatrends, Inc. All rights reserved. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during flash BIOS Reading file ..... done Reading flash .... done Search bootblock version: 0% 100% Advance check .... Erasing flash .... done Writing flash .... 0x0008CC00 (9%) 4. The utility verifies the file and starts updating the BIOS. Do not shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure! A:\>afudos /iP5AD2.rom AMI Firmware Update Utility - Version 1.19(ASUS V2.07(03.11.24BB)) Copyright (C) 2002 American Megatrends, Inc. All rights reserved. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during flash BIOS Reading file ..... done Reading flash .... done Search bootblock version: 0% 100% Advance check .... Erasing flash .... done Writing flash .... done Verifying flash .. DONE Please restart your computer A:\>
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-5 4-5 4-5 4-5 4-5 4.1.3 4.1.3 4.1.3 4.1.3 4.1.3 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility The ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 is an auto recovery tool that allows you to restore the BIOS file when it fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. You can update a corrupted BIOS file using the motherboard support CD or the floppy disk that contains the updated BIOS file. Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk To recover the BIOS from a floppy disk: 1. Turn on the system. 2. Insert the floppy disk with the original or updated BIOS file to the floppy disk drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the floppy disk for the original or updated BIOS file. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... Floppy found! Reading file âP5AD2.ROMâ. Completed. Start flashing... When found, the utility reads the BIOS file and starts flashing the corrupted BIOS file. DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! ⢠Prepare the motherboard support CD or the floppy disk containing the updated motherboard BIOS before using this utility. ⢠Make sure that you rename the original or updated BIOS file in the floppy disk to P5AD2.ROM P5AD2.ROM P5AD2.ROM P5AD2.ROM P5AD2.ROM .
4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup The recovered BIOS may not be the latest BIOS version for this motherboard. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file. Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD To recover the BIOS from the support CD: 1. Remove any floppy disk from the floppy disk drive, then turn on the system. 2. Insert the support CD to the optical drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the floppy disk for the original or updated BIOS file. 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... Floppy not found! Checking for CD-ROM... CD-ROM found! Reading file âP5AD2.ROMâ. Completed. Start flashing... When no floppy disk is found, the utility automatically checks the optical drive for the original or updated BIOS file. The utility then updates the corrupted BIOS file. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy...
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-7 4-7 4-7 4-7 4-7 4.1.4 4.1.4 4.1.4 4.1.4 4.1.4 ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility The ASUS EZ Flash feature allows you to update the BIOS without having to go through the long process of booting from a floppy disk and using a DOS-based utility. The EZ Flash utility is built-in the BIOS chip so it is accessible by pressing <Alt> <F2> during the Power-On Self Tests (POST). To update the BIOS using EZ Flash: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file for the motherboard and rename the same to P5AD2.ROM P5AD2.ROM P5AD2.ROM P5AD2.ROM P5AD2.ROM . 2. Save the BIOS file to a floppy disk, then restart the system. 3. Press <Alt> <F2> during POST to display the following. EZFlash starting BIOS update Checking for floppy... 4. Insert the floppy disk that contains the BIOS file to the floppy disk drive. When the correct BIOS file is found, EZ Flash performs the BIOS update process and automatically reboots the system when done. EZFlash starting BIOS update Checking for floppy... Floppy found! Reading file âP5AD2.româ. Completed. Start erasing.......| Start programming...| Flashed successfully. Rebooting. ⢠Do not shutdown or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure! ⢠A âFloppy not found!â error message appears if there is no floppy disk in the drive. A âP5AD2.ROM not found!â error message appears if the correct BIOS file is not found in the floppy disk. Make sure that you rename the BIOS file to P5AD2.ROM.
4-8 4-8 4-8 4-8 4-8 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update To install ASUS Update: 1. Place the support CD in the optical drive. The Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers menu appears. 2. Click the Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities tab, then click Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX . See page 5-4 for the Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities screen menu. 3. The ASUS Update utility is copied to your system. 4.1.5 4.1.5 4.1.5 4.1.5 4.1.5 ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility The ASUS Update is a utility that allows you to manage, save, and update the motherboard BIOS in Windows ® environment. The ASUS Update utility allows you to: ⢠Save the current BIOS file ⢠Download the latest BIOS file from the Internet ⢠Update the BIOS from an updated BIOS file ⢠Update the BIOS directly from the Internet, and ⢠View the BIOS version information. This utility is available in the support CD that comes with the motherboard package. ASUS Update requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP). Quit all Windows ® applications before you update the BIOS using this utility.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-9 4-9 4-9 4-9 4-9 3. Select the ASUS FTP site nearest you to avoid network traffic, or click Auto Select Auto Select Auto Select Auto Select Auto Select . Click Next Next Next Next Next . Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet To update the BIOS through the Internet: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows ® desktop by clicking Start Start Start Start Start > Programs Programs Programs Programs Programs > ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate . T h e ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from Update BIOS from Update BIOS from Update BIOS from Update BIOS from the Internet the Internet the Internet the Internet the Internet option from the drop-down menu, then click Next Next Next Next Next .
4-10 4-10 4-10 4-10 4-10 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file To update the BIOS through a BIOS file: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows ® desktop by clicking Start Start Start Start Start > Programs Programs Programs Programs Programs > ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate . The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a file file file file file option from the drop-down menu, then click Next Next Next Next Next . 4. From the FTP site, select the BIOS version that you wish to download. Click Next. 5. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process. The ASUS Update utility is capable of updating itself through the Internet. Always update the utility to avail all its features. 3. Locate the BIOS file from the Open Open Open Open Open window, then click Save Save Save Save Save . 4. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-11 4-11 4-11 4-11 4-11 4.2 BIOS setup program This motherboard supports a programmable firmware chip that you can update using the provided utility described in section â 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS.â Use the BIOS Setup program when you are installing a motherboard, reconfiguring your system, or prompted to âRun Setupâ. This section explains how to configure your system using this utility. Even if you are not prompted to use the Setup program, you can change the configuration of your computer in the future. For example, you can enable the security password feature or change the power management settings. This requires you to reconfigure your system using the BIOS Setup program so that the computer can recognize these changes and record them in the CMOS RAM of the firmware hub. The firmware hub on the motherboard stores the Setup utility. When you start up the computer, the system provides you with the opportunity to run this program. Press <Del> during the Power-On-Self-Test (POST) to enter the Setup utility; otherwise, POST continues with its test routines. If you wish to enter Setup after POST, restart the system by pressing <Ctrl Alt Delete>, or by pressing the reset button on the system chassis. You can also restart by turning the system off and then back on. Do this last option only if the first two failed. The Setup program is designed to make it as easy to use as possible. Being a menu-driven program, it lets you scroll through the various sub-menus and make your selections from the available options using the navigation keys. ⢠The default BIOS settings for this motherboard apply for most conditions to ensure optimum performance. If the system becomes unstable after changing any BIOS settings, load the default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability. Select the Load Load Load Load Load Default Settings Default Settings Default Settings Default Settings Default Settings item under the Exit Menu. See section â4.7 Exit Menu.â ⢠The BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference purposes only, and may not exactly match what you see on your screen. ⢠Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file for this motherboard.
4-12 4-12 4-12 4-12 4-12 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.2.2 4.2.2 4.2.2 4.2.2 4.2.2 Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar The menu bar on top of the screen has the following main items: Main Main Main Main Main For changing the basic system configuration Advanced Advanced Advanced Advanced Advanced For changing the advanced system settings Power Power Power Power Power For changing the advanced power management (APM) configuration Boot Boot Boot Boot Boot For changing the system boot configuration Exit Exit Exit Exit Exit For selecting the exit options and loading default settings To select an item on the menu bar, press the right or left arrow key on the keyboard until the desired item is highlighted. 4.2.3 4.2.3 4.2.3 4.2.3 4.2.3 Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys At the bottom right corner of a menu screen are the navigation keys for that particular menu. Use the navigation keys to select items in the menu and change the settings. 4.2.1 4.2.1 4.2.1 4.2.1 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen Some of the navigation keys differ from one screen to another. System Time [11:10:19] System Date [Thu 03/27/2003] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] Primary IDE Master :[ST320413A] Primary IDE Slave :[ASUS CD-S340] Secondary IDE Master :[Not Detected] Secondary IDE Slave :[Not Detected] Third IDE Master :[Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master :[Not Detected] IDE Configuration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a field. Use [ ] or [-] to configure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys General help General help General help General help General help Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-13 4-13 4-13 4-13 4-13 4.2.4 4.2.4 4.2.4 4.2.4 4.2.4 Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items The highlighted item on the menu bar displays the specific items for that menu. For example, selecting Main Main Main Main Main shows the Main menu items. The other items (Advanced, Power, Boot, and Exit) on the menu bar have their respective menu items. 4.2.5 4.2.5 4.2.5 4.2.5 4.2.5 Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items A solid triangle before each item on any menu screen means that the iteam has a sub-menu. To display the sub-menu, select the item and press <Enter>. 4.2.6 4.2.6 4.2.6 4.2.6 4.2.6 Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields These fields show the values for the menu items. If an item is user- configurable, you can change the value of the field opposite the item. You cannot select an item that is not user-configurable. A configurable field is enclosed in brackets, and is highlighted when selected. To change the value of a field, select it then press <Enter> to display a list of options. Refer to â4.2.7 Pop-up window.â 4.2.7 4.2.7 4.2.7 4.2.7 4.2.7 Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Select a menu item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up window with the configuration options for that item. 4.2.8 4.2.8 4.2.8 4.2.8 4.2.8 Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar A scroll bar appears on the right side of a menu screen when there are items that do not fit on the screen. Press the Up/Down arrow keys or <Page Up> / <Page Down> keys to display the other items on the screen. 4.2.9 4.2.9 4.2.9 4.2.9 4.2.9 General help General help General help General help General help At the top right corner of the menu screen is a brief description of the selected item. System Time [11:10:19] System Date [Thu 03/27/2003] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] Primary IDE Master :[ST320413A] Primary IDE Slave :[ASUS CD-S340] Secondary IDE Master :[Not Detected] Secondary IDE Slave :[Not Detected] Third IDE Master :[Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master :[Not Detected] IDE Configuration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a field. Use [ ] or [-] to configure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Main menu items Main menu items Main menu items Main menu items Main menu items Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Advanced Chipset settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in the sections below may cause system to malfunction. Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Memory Acceleration Mode [Auto] DRAM Idle Timer [Auto] DRAm Refresh Rate [Auto] Graphic Adapter Priority [AGP/PCI] Graphics Aperture Size [ 64 MB] Spread Spectrum [Enabled] ICH Delayed Transaction [Enabled] MPS Revision [1.4] Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window
4-14 4-14 4-14 4-14 4-14 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.3 Main menu When you enter the BIOS Setup program, the Main Main Main Main Main menu screen appears, giving you an overview of the basic system information. 4.3.1 4.3.1 4.3.1 4.3.1 4.3.1 System Time [xx:xx:xxxx] System Time [xx:xx:xxxx] System Time [xx:xx:xxxx] System Time [xx:xx:xxxx] System Time [xx:xx:xxxx] Allows you to set the system time. 4.3.2 4.3.2 4.3.2 4.3.2 4.3.2 System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] Allows you to set the system date. 4.3.3 4.3.3 4.3.3 4.3.3 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Sets the type of floppy drive installed. Configuration options: [Disabled] [360K, 5.25 in.] [1.2M , 5.25 in.] [720K , 3.5 in.] [1.44M, 3.5 in.] [2.88M, 3.5 in.] 4.3.4 4.3.4 4.3.4 4.3.4 4.3.4 Language [English] Language [English] Language [English] Language [English] Language [English] Allows you to choose the BIOS language version from the options. Configuration options: [English] [Français] [Deutsch] [Japanese] [Chinese (GB)] [Chinese BIG5] Refer to section â4.2.1 BIOS menu screenâ for information on the menu screen items and how to navigate through them. Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a field. Use [ ] or [-] to configure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit System Time [11:51:19] System Date [Thu 05/07/2004] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] Primary IDE Master : [ST320413A] Primary IDE Slave : [ASUS CD-S520/A] Third IDE Master : [Not Detected] Third IDE Slave : [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master : [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Slave : [Not Detected] IDE Configuration System Information
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-15 4-15 4-15 4-15 4-15 4.3.5 4.3.5 4.3.5 4.3.5 4.3.5 Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave The BIOS automatically detects the connected IDE devices. There is a separate sub-menu for each IDE device. Select a device item, then press <Enter> to display the IDE device information. The BIOS automatically detects the values opposite the dimmed items (Device, Vendor, Size, LBA Mode, Block Mode, PIO Mode, Async DMA, Ultra DMA, and SMART monitoring). These values are not user-configurable. These items show N/A if no IDE device is installed in the system. Type [Auto] Type [Auto] Type [Auto] Type [Auto] Type [Auto] Selects the type of IDE drive. Setting to [Auto] allows automatic selection of the appropriate IDE device type. Select [CDROM] if you are specifically configuring a CD-ROM drive. Select [ARMD] (ATAPI Removable Media Device) if your device is either a ZIP, LS-120, or MO drive. Configuration options: [Not Installed] [Auto] [CDROM] [ARMD] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Enables or disables the LBA mode. Setting to [Auto] enables the LBA mode if the device supports this mode, and if the device was not previously formatted with LBA mode disabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Enables or disables data multi-sectors transfers. When set to [Auto], the data transfer from and to the device occurs multiple sectors at a time if the device supports multi-sector transfer feature. When set to [Disabled], the data transfer from and to the device occurs one sector at a time. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Select the type of device connected to the system. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Primary IDE Master Device : Hard Disk Vendor : ST320413A Size : 20.0GB LBA Mode : Supported Block Mode : 16 Sectors PIO Mode : Supported Async DMA : MultiWord DMA-2 Ultra DMA : Ultra DMA-5 SMART Monitoring: Supported Type [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Block(Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled]
4-16 4-16 4-16 4-16 4-16 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup PIO Mode [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] Selects the PIO mode. Configuration options: [Auto] [0] [1] [2] [3] [4] SMART Monitoring [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] Sets the Smart Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology. Configuration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] Enables or disables 32-bit data transfer. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.3.6 4.3.6 4.3.6 4.3.6 4.3.6 IDE Configuration IDE Configuration IDE Configuration IDE Configuration IDE Configuration The items in this menu allow you to set or change the configurations for the IDE devices installed in the system. Select an item then press <Enter> if you wish to configure the item. Configure SATA As [Standard IDE] Configure SATA As [Standard IDE] Configure SATA As [Standard IDE] Configure SATA As [Standard IDE] Configure SATA As [Standard IDE] Allows you to set the Serial ATA devices connected to the Serial ATA connectors as IDE, AHCI, or RAID sets. Configuration options: [Standard IDE] [AHCI] [RAID] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Allows selection of the IDE operation mode depending on the installed operating system (OS). Set to [Enhanced Mode] if you are using native OS including Windows ® 2000/XP. Configuration options: [Compatible Mode] [Enhanced Mode] Enhanced Mode Support On [S-ATA] Allows you to use native OS on Serial ATA and Parallel ATA ports. It is recommend that you do not change the default setting for better OS compatibility. In this setting, you may use legacy OS on the Parallel ATA ports only if you do not install any Serial ATA device. IDE Configuration Configure SATA As [Standard IDE] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Enhanced Mode Support On [S-ATA] IDE Detect Time Out (Sec) [35] When in AHCI/RAID mode SATA controller is forced to Native mode.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-17 4-17 4-17 4-17 4-17 The P-ATA S-ATA and P-ATA options are for advanced users only. If you set to any of these options and encountered problems, revert to the default setting S-ATA S-ATA S-ATA S-ATA S-ATA . Configuration options: [P-ATA S-ATA] [S-ATA] [P-ATA] The Onboard IDE Operate Mode Onboard IDE Operate Mode Onboard IDE Operate Mode Onboard IDE Operate Mode Onboard IDE Operate Mode and its sub-menu items appear only when the Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As item is set to [Standard IDE]. Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROOM [Enabled] Enables or disables the onboard Serial ATA boot ROM. This item appears only when the Configure SATA As item is set as RAID. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM appears only when the Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As item is set to [RAID]. ALPE and ASP [Disabled] ALPE and ASP [Disabled] ALPE and ASP [Disabled] ALPE and ASP [Disabled] ALPE and ASP [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Agressive Link Power Management (ALPE) and Aggressive Slumber/Partial (ASP) management features. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Stagger Spinup Support [Enabled] Enables or disables the stagger spinup support. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] AHCI Port 3 Interlock Switch [Disabled] Enables or disables the Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI) Port 3 interlock switch. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The ALPE and ASP ALPE and ASP ALPE and ASP ALPE and ASP ALPE and ASP and its sub-menu appear only when the Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As item is set to [AHCI]. IDE Detect Time Out [35] IDE Detect Time Out [35] IDE Detect Time Out [35] IDE Detect Time Out [35] IDE Detect Time Out [35] Selects the time out value for detecting ATA/ATAPI devices. Configuration options: [0] [5] [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [35]
4-18 4-18 4-18 4-18 4-18 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.3.7 4.3.7 4.3.7 4.3.7 4.3.7 System Information System Information System Information System Information System Information This menu gives you an overview of the general system specifications. The BIOS automatically detects the items in this menu. AMI BIOS AMI BIOS AMI BIOS AMI BIOS AMI BIOS Displays the auto-detected BIOS information Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor Displays the auto-detected CPU specification System Memory System Memory System Memory System Memory System Memory Displays the auto-detected system memory Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit AMIBIOS Version : 08.00.10 Build Date : 06/11/04 Processor Type : Genuine Intel(R) CPU 3.20GHz Speed : 2800 MHz Count : 1 System Memory Size : 1024MB
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-19 4-19 4-19 4-19 4-19 4.4 Advanced menu The Advanced menu items allow you to change the settings for the CPU and other system devices. JumperFree Configuration LAN Cable Status USB Configuration CPU Configuration Chipset Onboard Devices Configuration PCI PnP Speech Configuration 4.4.1 4.4.1 4.4.1 4.4.1 4.4.1 JumperFree Configuration JumperFree Configuration JumperFree Configuration JumperFree Configuration JumperFree Configuration AI Overclocking [Auto] AI Overclocking [Auto] AI Overclocking [Auto] AI Overclocking [Auto] AI Overclocking [Auto] Allows you to select the overclocking options to achieve the desired CPU internal frequency. Select either one of the preset overclocking options. Configuration options: [Manual] [Auto] [Standard] [Overclock Profile] [AI NOS]. Selecting a very high CPU frequency may cause the system to become unstable! If this happens, revert to the default setting. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Configure System Frequency/Voltage AI Overclocking [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Select the targe CPU frequency, and the relevant parameters will be auto-adjusted. Frequencies higher than CPU manufacturer recommends are not guaranteed to be stable. If the system becomes unstable, return to the default. Take caution when changing the settings of the Advanced menu items. Incorrect field values can cause the system to malfunction. Adjust system frequency/voltage.
4-20 4-20 4-20 4-20 4-20 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Performance Mode [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Allows you to select the system performance mode. Configuration options: [Auto] [Standard] [Turbo] The following item appears only when you set the AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking item to [Manual]. CPU Frequency [XXX] CPU Frequency [XXX] CPU Frequency [XXX] CPU Frequency [XXX] CPU Frequency [XXX] Displays the frequency sent by the clock generator to the system bus and PCI bus. The value of this item is auto-detected by the BIOS. Use the < > < > < > < > < > and <-> <-> <-> <-> < - > keys to adjust the CPU frequency. You can also type the desired CPU frequency using the numberic keypad. The values range from 100 to 400. Refer to the table below for the correct Front Side Bus and CPU External Frequency settings. FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus CPU External Frequency CPU External Frequency CPU External Frequency CPU External Frequency CPU External Frequency FSB 800 200 MHz FSB 533 133 MHz FSB 400 100 MHz DRAM Frequency [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] Allows you to set the DDR operating frequency. Configuration options: [Auto] [400MHz] [533MHz] [600MHz] Selecting a very high DRAM frequency may cause the system to become unstable! If this happens, revert to the default setting. PCI Express Frequency [Auto] PCI Express Frequency [Auto] PCI Express Frequency [Auto] PCI Express Frequency [Auto] PCI Express Frequency [Auto] Allows you to set the PCI Express frequency. This item is set to [Auto] by default. Configuration options: [Auto] [90]...[133] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] Allows you to synchronize the PCI frequency with the PCI Express or CPU frequency. Configuration options: [To CPU] [33.33MHz] [ Auto] Spread Spectrum [Auto] Spread Spectrum [Auto] Spread Spectrum [Auto] Spread Spectrum [Auto] Spread Spectrum [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable the clock generator spread spectrum. Configuration options: [ Disabled] [Enabled] [ Auto]
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-21 4-21 4-21 4-21 4-21 The following items also appear when the AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking item is set to [AI NOS]. Memory Voltage [Auto] Memory Voltage [Auto] Memory Voltage [Auto] Memory Voltage [Auto] Memory Voltage [Auto] Allows you to select the DDR2 reference voltage. Configuration options: [1.80V] [1.90V] [2.00V] [2.10V] [Auto] Refer to the DDR2 documentation before adjusting the memory voltage. Setting a very high memory voltage may damage the memory module(s)! Chipset Core Voltage [Auto] Chipset Core Voltage [Auto] Chipset Core Voltage [Auto] Chipset Core Voltage [Auto] Chipset Core Voltage [Auto] Allows you to select the chipset core voltage. Configuration options: [1.50V] [1.60V] [Auto] Refer to the CPU documentation before setting the chipset core voltage. Setting a high chipset core voltage may damage the chipset! CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] Allows you to select the CPU VCore voltage. Configuration options: [Auto] [1.7000V] [1.6875V] [1.6750V] [1.6625V] [1.6500V] [1.6375V] [1.6250V] [1.6125V] [1.6000V] [1.5875V] [1.5750V] [1.5625V] [1.5500V] [1.5375V] [1.5250V] [1.5125V] [1.5000V] [1.4875V] [1.4750V] [1.4625V] [1.4500V] [1.4375V] [1.4250V] [1.4125V] [1.4000V] [1.3875V] Setting a high Vcore voltage may damage the CPU! FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] Allows you to select the front side bus termination voltage. Configuration options: [1.20V] [1.40V] [Auto] The following item appears only when the AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking item is set to [Overclock Profile]. Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Allows you to overclock the CPU speed through the available preset values. Configuration options: [Overclock 5%] [FSB888/DDR2-667] [Overclock 10%] [FSB900/DDR2-600] [Overclock 15%] [FSB950/DDR2-633] [Overclock 20%] [FSB1000/DDR2-667] [Overclock 30%] [FSB1066/DDR2-533] [FSB1066/DDR2-710]
4-22 4-22 4-22 4-22 4-22 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4.2 4.4.2 4.4.2 4.4.2 4.4.2 LAN Cable Status LAN Cable Status LAN Cable Status LAN Cable Status LAN Cable Status This menu displays the status of the Local Area Network (LAN) cable connected to the LAN (RJ-45) port. The following item appears only when the AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking item is set to [AI NOS]. NOS Mode [Auto] NOS Mode [Auto] NOS Mode [Auto] NOS Mode [Auto] NOS Mode [Auto] Allows you to set the NOS mode for various CPU loading. Selecting [Auto] allows the NOS to automatically overclock the CPU speed based on the CPU loading. Configuration options: [Auto] [Standard] [Sensitive] [Heavy Load] The following item appears only when the NOS Mode NOS Mode NOS Mode NOS Mode NOS Mode item is set to [Standard], [Sensitive], or [Heavy]. Turbo NOS [Disabled] Turbo NOS [Disabled] Turbo NOS [Disabled] Turbo NOS [Disabled] Turbo NOS [Disabled] Allows you to disable or set the overclock percentage for the selected NOS Mode. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Overclock 3%] [Overclock 5%] [Overclock 7%] [Overclock 10%] [Overclock 15%] [Overclock 20%] Twin Turbo NOS [Disabled] Twin Turbo NOS [Disabled] Twin Turbo NOS [Disabled] Twin Turbo NOS [Disabled] Twin Turbo NOS [Disabled] Allows you to disable or set the overclock percentage for the selected Turbo NOS. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Overclock 3%] [Overclock 5%] [Overclock 7%] [Overclock 10%] [Overclock 15%] [Overclock 20%] [Overclock 30%] POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable LAN cable check during POST. When enabled, the menu reports the cable faults or shorts, and displays the point (length) where the fault or short is detected. Configuration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] LAN Cable Status Pair Status Length 1-2 Normal N/A 3-6 Normal N/A 4-5 Normal N/A 7-8 Normal N/A Check LAN cable during POST.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-23 4-23 4-23 4-23 4-23 4.4.3 4.4.3 4.4.3 4.4.3 4.4.3 USB Configuration USB Configuration USB Configuration USB Configuration USB Configuration The items in this menu allows you to change the USB-related features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the configuration options. USB Function [Enabled] USB Function [Enabled] USB Function [Enabled] USB Function [Enabled] USB Function [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the USB function. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for legacy USB devices. Setting to [Auto] allows the system to detect the presence of USB devices at startup. If detected, the USB controller legacy mode is enabled. If no USB device is detected, the legacy USB support is disabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the USB 2.0 controller. Configuration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] Allows you to set the USB 2.0 controller mode to HiSpeed (480 Mbps) or FullSpeed (12 Mbps). Configuration options: [FullSpeed] [HiSpeed] The Module Version Module Version Module Version Module Version Module Version and USB Devices Enabled USB Devices Enabled USB Devices Enabled USB Devices Enabled USB Devices Enabled items show the auto-detected values. If no USB device is detected, the item shows None None None None None . USB Configuration Module Version - 2.23.2-9.4 USB Devices Enabled: None USB Function [Enabled] Legacy USB Support [Auto] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] Enables USB host controllers.
4-24 4-24 4-24 4-24 4-24 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4.4 4.4.4 4.4.4 4.4.4 4.4.4 CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration The items in this menu show the CPU-related information that the BIOS automatically detects. Ratio CMOS Setting [ 8] Ratio CMOS Setting [ 8] Ratio CMOS Setting [ 8] Ratio CMOS Setting [ 8] Ratio CMOS Setting [ 8] Sets the ratio between the CPU core clock and the Front Side Bus frequency. The BIOS auto-detects the default value of this item. Use the < > < > < > < > < > or <-> <-> <-> <-> < - > keys to adjust the values. Configuration options: [ 8]...[28] VID CMOS Setting [ 45] VID CMOS Setting [ 45] VID CMOS Setting [ 45] VID CMOS Setting [ 45] VID CMOS Setting [ 45] Allows you to set the VID CMOS setting at which the processor is to run. The BIOS auto-detects the default value of this item. Use the < > < > < > < > < > or <-> <-> <-> <-> <-> keys to adjust the values. You can only adjust the Ratio CMOS Ratio CMOS Ratio CMOS Ratio CMOS Ratio CMOS and the VID CMOS VID CMOS VID CMOS VID CMOS VID CMOS settings if you installed an unlocked CPU. Refer to the CPU documentation for details. Microcode Updation [Enabled] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the microcode updation. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Setting this item to [Enabled] allows legacy operating systems to boot even without support for CPUs with extended CPUID functions. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] When set to [Auto], the BIOS automatically checks the CPUâs capability to enable the C1E support. In C1E mode, the CPU power consumption is lower when idle. Configuration options: [Auto] [Disabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Configure Advanced CPU settings Manufacturer: Intel Brand String: Genuine Intel(R) CPU 3.20GHz Frequency : 3200 MHz FSB Speed : 800 MHz Cache L1 : 16 KB Cache L2 : 1024 KB Cache L3 : 0 KB Ratio Status: Unlocked Ratio Actual Value : 14 Ratio CMOS Setting: [ 8] VID CMOS Setting: [ 45] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Max CPUID Value Limit: [Disabled] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] Hyper Threading Technology [Enabled] Sets the ratio between CPU Core Clock and the FSB Frequency. NOTE: If an invalid ratio is set in CMOS then actual and setpoint values may differ.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-25 4-25 4-25 4-25 4-25 Advanced Chipset Settings Advanced Chipset Settings Advanced Chipset Settings Advanced Chipset Settings Advanced Chipset Settings Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] When this item is enabled, the DRAM timing parameters are set according to the DRAM SPD (Serial Presence Detect). When disabled, you can manually set the DRAM timing parameters through the DRAM sub-items. The following sub-items appear when this item is Disabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] DRAM CAS# Latency [5 Clocks] Controls the latency between the SDRAM read command and the time the data actually becomes available. Configuration options: [5 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [3 Clocks] DRAM RAS# Precharge [4 Clocks] Controls the idle clocks after issuing a precharge command to the DDR SDRAM. Configuration options: [2 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [5 Clocks] DRAM RAS# to CAS# Delay [4 Clocks] Controls the latency between the DDR SDRAM active command and the read/write command. Configuration options: [2 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [5 Clocks] 4.4.5 4.4.5 4.4.5 4.4.5 4.4.5 Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset The Chipset menu allows you to change the advanced chipset settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Advanced Chipset Settings Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Hyper Path 2 [Auto] Booting Graphic Adapter Priori [PCI Express/PCI] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] Allows you to disable or set to auto the CPU Internal Thermal Control function. Configuration options: [Auto] [Disabled] Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the processor Hyper-Threading Technology. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Enable or disable DRAM timing.
4-26 4-26 4-26 4-26 4-26 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup DRAM RAS# Activate to Precharge Delay [15 Clocks] Configuration options: [4 Clocks] [5 Clocks] ~ [15 Clocks] DRAM Write Recovery Time [4 Clocks] Configuration options: [2 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [5 Clocks] Hyper Path 2 [Auto] Hyper Path 2 [Auto] Hyper Path 2 [Auto] Hyper Path 2 [Auto] Hyper Path 2 [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Hyper Path 2 feature. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] Booting Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Booting Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Booting Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Booting Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Booting Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Allows selection of the graphics controller to use as primary boot device. Configuration options: [PCI Express/PCI] [PCI/PCI Express] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] Sets the length of the PCI Express graphics card buffer. Configuration options: [Auto] [Long] [Short] Link Latency [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] Sets the PCI Express graphics card link latency. Configuration options: [Auto] [Slow] [Normal] PEG Link Mode [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] Sets the PCI Express graphics card link mode. Configuration options: [Auto] [Slow] [Normal] [Fast] [Faster] PEG Root Control [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] Allows you to enable, disable, or set to automatic the PCI Express graphics card root control. Configuration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] Slot Power [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] Sets the PCI Express graphics card slot power. Configuration options: [Auto] [Light] [Normal] [Heavy] [Heavier]
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-27 4-27 4-27 4-27 4-27 4.4.6 4.4.6 4.4.6 4.4.6 4.4.6 Onboard Devices Configuration Onboard Devices Configuration Onboard Devices Configuration Onboard Devices Configuration Onboard Devices Configuration Azalia Controller [Enabled] Azalia Controller [Enabled] Azalia Controller [Enabled] Azalia Controller [Enabled] Azalia Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the high-definition audio CODEC. Configuration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] Front Panel Support Type [AC97] Front Panel Support Type [AC97] Front Panel Support Type [AC97] Front Panel Support Type [AC97] Front Panel Support Type [AC97] Allows you to set the front panel audio connector (AAAF) mode to legacy ACâ97 or highâdefinition audio depending on the audio standard that the front panel audio module supports. Configuration options: [AC â97] [Azalia] OnBoard 1394 Controller [Enabled] OnBoard 1394 Controller [Enabled] OnBoard 1394 Controller [Enabled] OnBoard 1394 Controller [Enabled] OnBoard 1394 Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard IEEE 1394 controller. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard PCI Express Gigabit LAN controller. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The Gigabit LAN controller does not support S5 Wake-On-LAN function under DOS mode or Windows ® ME. Configure Win627EHF Super IO Chipset Azalia Controller [Enabled] Front Panel Support Type [AC97] Onboard 1394 Controller [Enabled] Onboard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] LAN Option ROM [Disabled] Onboard WIFI Controller [Enabled] ITE8212F Controller [IDE Mode] Detecting Device Time [Quick Mode] Silicon Image Controller [RAID Mode] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] Parallel Port IRQ [IRQ7] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Enable or disable Azalia Controller. LAN Option ROM [Disabled] This item allows you to enable or disable the option ROM in the onboard LAN controller. This item appears only when the Onboard Onboard Onboard Onboard Onboard PCIEX Gbe LAN PCIEX Gbe LAN PCIEX Gbe LAN PCIEX Gbe LAN PCIEX Gbe LAN items are set to Enabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-28 4-28 4-28 4-28 4-28 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup OnBoard WIFI Controller [Enabled] OnBoard WIFI Controller [Enabled] OnBoard WIFI Controller [Enabled] OnBoard WIFI Controller [Enabled] OnBoard WIFI Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard Wi-Fi controller. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] ITE8212F Controller [IDE Mode] ITE8212F Controller [IDE Mode] ITE8212F Controller [IDE Mode] ITE8212F Controller [IDE Mode] ITE8212F Controller [IDE Mode] Allows you to set the onboard ITE ® 8212F IDE RAID controller operating mode. Configuration options: [RAID Mode] [IDE Mode] [Disabled] Detecting Device Time [Quick Mode] Sets the time the ITE8212F IDE RAID controller detects devices connected to the IDE RAID connectors. This item appears only when the ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller i s set to IDE Mode. Configuration options: [Standard Mode] [Quick Mode] Silicon Image Controller [RAID Mode] Silicon Image Controller [RAID Mode] Silicon Image Controller [RAID Mode] Silicon Image Controller [RAID Mode] Silicon Image Controller [RAID Mode] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard Silicon Image SATA RAID controller. Configuration options: [RAID Mode] [SATA Mode] [Disabled] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Allows you to select the Serial Port1 base address. Configuration options: [Disabled] [3F8/IRQ4] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Address [378] Allows you to select the Parallel Port base addresses. Configuration options: [Disabled] [378] [278] [3BC] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Allows you to select the Parallel Port mode. Configuration options: [Normal] [Bi-directional] [EPP] [ECP] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] Appears only when the Parallel Port Mode is set to [ECP]. This item allows you to set the Parallel Port ECP DMA. Configuration options: [DMA0] [DMA1] [DMA3] Parallel Port IRQ [IRQ7] Configuration options: [IRQ5] [IRQ7] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Allows you to select the Game Port address or to disable the port. Configuration options: [Disabled] [200/300] [200/330] [208/300] [208/330]
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-29 4-29 4-29 4-29 4-29 4.4.7 4.4.7 4.4.7 4.4.7 4.4.7 PCI PnP PCI PnP PCI PnP PCI PnP PCI PnP The PCI PnP menu items allow you to change the advanced settings for PCI/PnP devices. The menu includes setting IRQ and DMA channel resources for either PCI/PnP or legacy ISA devices, and setting the memory size block for legacy ISA devices. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Advanced PCI/PnP Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. Plug And Play O/S [No] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Palette Snooping [Disabled] PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] IRQ-3 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-4 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-5 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-7 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-9 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-10 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-11 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-14 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-15 assigned to [PCI Device] Plug And Play O/S [No] Plug And Play O/S [No] Plug And Play O/S [No] Plug And Play O/S [No] Plug And Play O/S [No] When set to [No], BIOS configures all the devices in the system. When set to [Yes] and if you install a Plug and Play operating system, the operating system configures the Plug and Play devices not required for boot. Configuration options: [No] [Yes] PCI Latency Timer [64] PCI Latency Timer [64] PCI Latency Timer [64] PCI Latency Timer [64] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allows you to select the value in units of PCI clocks for the PCI device latency timer register. Configuration options: [32] [64] [96] [128] [160] [192] [224] [248] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] When set to [Yes], BIOS assigns an IRQ to PCI VGA card if the card requests for an IRQ. When set to [No], BIOS does not assign an IRQ to the PCI VGA card even if requested. Configuration options: [No] [Yes] Palette Snooping [Disabled] Palette Snooping [Disabled] Palette Snooping [Disabled] Palette Snooping [Disabled] Palette Snooping [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], the pallete snooping feature informs the PCI devices that an ISA graphics device is installed in the system so that the latter can function correctly. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Take caution when changing the settings of the PCI PnP menu items. Incorrect field values can cause the system to malfunction. NO: Lets the BIOS configue all the devices in the system. YES: Lets the operating system configure Plug and Play (PnP) devices not required for boot if your system has a Plug and Play operating system.
4-30 4-30 4-30 4-30 4-30 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] Allows BIOS to use PCI bus mastering when reading/writing to IDE devices. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] When set to [PCI Device], the specific IRQ is free for use of PCI/PnP devices. When set to [Reserved], the IRQ is reserved for legacy ISA devices. Configuration options: [PCI Device] [Reserved] 4.4.8 4.4.8 4.4.8 4.4.8 4.4.8 Speech Configuration Speech Configuration Speech Configuration Speech Configuration Speech Configuration Speech POST Reporter [Enabled] Speech POST Reporter [Enabled] Speech POST Reporter [Enabled] Speech POST Reporter [Enabled] Speech POST Reporter [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Speech POST Reporter⢠feature. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The following items appear only when Speech POST Reporter is set to Enabled. Report IDE Error [Disabled] Report IDE Error [Disabled] Report IDE Error [Disabled] Report IDE Error [Disabled] Report IDE Error [Disabled] Enables or disables the report feature in the event of an IDE error. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Report System Booting [Disabled] Report System Booting [Disabled] Report System Booting [Disabled] Report System Booting [Disabled] Report System Booting [Disabled] Enables or disables the report after booting the system. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Speech Option Speech POST Reporter [Enabled] Report IDE Error [Disabled] Report System Booting [Disabled]
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-31 4-31 4-31 4-31 4-31 4.5 Power menu The Power menu items allow you to change the settings for the ACPI and Advanced Power Management (APM) features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the configuration options. 4.5.1 4.5.1 4.5.1 4.5.1 4.5.1 Suspend Mode [Auto] Suspend Mode [Auto] Suspend Mode [Auto] Suspend Mode [Auto] Suspend Mode [Auto] Allows you to select the Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) state to be used for system suspend. Configuration options: [S1 (POS) Only] [S3 Only] [Auto] 4.5.2 4.5.2 4.5.2 4.5.2 4.5.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Determines whether to invoke VGA BIOS POST on S3/STR resume. Configuration options: [Yes] [No] 4.5.3 4.5.3 4.5.3 4.5.3 4.5.3 ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] Allows you to add more tables for Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) 2.0 specifications. Configuration options: [No] [Yes] 4.5.4 4.5.4 4.5.4 4.5.4 4.5.4 ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) support in the Application-Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC). When set to Enabled, the ACPI APIC table pointer is included in the RSDT pointer list. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Suspend Mode [Auto] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] APM Configuration Hardware Monitor Select the ACPI state used for System Suspend.
4-32 4-32 4-32 4-32 4-32 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.5.5 4.5.5 4.5.5 4.5.5 4.5.5 APM Configuration APM Configuration APM Configuration APM Configuration APM Configuration Power Button Mode [On/Off] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Allows the system to go into On/Off mode or suspend mode when the power button is pressed. Configuration options: [On/Off] [Suspend] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] When set to Power Off, the system goes into off state after an AC power loss. When set to Power On, the system goes on after an AC power loss. When set to Last State, the system goes into either off or on state, whatever the system state was before the AC power loss. Configuration options: [Power Off] [Power On] [Last State] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable RTC to generate a wake event. When this item is set to Enabled, the items RTC Alarm Date, RTC Alarm Hour, RTC Alarm Minute, and RTC Alarm Second appear with set values. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Allows either settings of [Enabled] or [Disabled] for powering up the computer when the external modem receives a call while the computer is in Soft-off mode. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The computer cannot receive or transmit data until the computer and applications are fully running. Thus, connection cannot be made on the first try. Turning an external modem off and then back on while the computer is off causes an initialization string that turns the system power on. Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to turn on the system through a PCI LAN or modem card. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] APM Configuration Power Button Mode [On/Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Keyboard Wakeup Password : Not Installed Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Go into On/Off or Suspend when Power button is pressed.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-33 4-33 4-33 4-33 4-33 Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Allows you to use specific keys on the keyboard to turn on the system. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Wakeup Password Wakeup Password Wakeup Password Wakeup Password Wakeup Password This item appears only when the Power On By PS/2 Keyboard Power On By PS/2 Keyboard Power On By PS/2 Keyboard Power On By PS/2 Keyboard Power On By PS/2 Keyboard i s s e t to [Enabled]. Select this item to set or change the keyboard wakeup password. Keyboard Wakeup Password Shows [Not Installed] [Not Installed] [Not Installed] [Not Installed] [Not Installed] i f the Wakeup Password Wakeup Password Wakeup Password Wakeup Password Wakeup Password i s disabled. After you have set a keyboard password, this item shows [Installed] [Installed] [Installed] [Installed] [Installed] . Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to use the PS/2 mouse to turn on the system. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-34 4-34 4-34 4-34 4-34 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.5.6 4.5.6 4.5.6 4.5.6 4.5.6 Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor CPU Temperature [51ºC/122.5ºF] MB Temperature [41ºC/105.5ºF] CPU Fan Speed [3813 RPM] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Chassis Fan Speed [N/A] Power Fan Speed [N/A] VCORE Voltage [ 1.320V] 3.3V Voltage [ 3.345V] 5V Voltage [ 5.094V] 12V Voltage [11.880V] CPU Temperature [xxxºC/xxxºF] CPU Temperature [xxxºC/xxxºF] CPU Temperature [xxxºC/xxxºF] CPU Temperature [xxxºC/xxxºF] CPU Temperature [xxxºC/xxxºF] MB Temperature [xxxºC/xxxºF] MB Temperature [xxxºC/xxxºF] MB Temperature [xxxºC/xxxºF] MB Temperature [xxxºC/xxxºF] MB Temperature [xxxºC/xxxºF] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the motherboard and CPU temperatures. Select [Disabled] if you do not wish to display the detected temperatures. CPU Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] CPU Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] CPU Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] CPU Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] CPU Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the CPU fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the motherboard, the field shows N/A. CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Q-Fan feature that smartly adjusts the fan speeds for more efficient system operation. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The CPU Q-Fan Mode CPU Q-Fan Mode CPU Q-Fan Mode CPU Q-Fan Mode CPU Q-Fan Mode , CPU Fan Ratio CPU Fan Ratio CPU Fan Ratio CPU Fan Ratio CPU Fan Ratio , CPU Target CPU Target CPU Target CPU Target CPU Target Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature , and Chassis Q-Fan Control Chassis Q-Fan Control Chassis Q-Fan Control Chassis Q-Fan Control C h a s s i s Q - F a n C o n t r o l items appear when you enable the CPU Q-Fan Control CPU Q-Fan Control CPU Q-Fan Control CPU Q-Fan Control CPU Q-Fan Control feature. CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] Allows you to select the type of CPU fan cable connected to the CPU fan connector. Set to [PWM] when using a 4-pin CPU fan cable. Set to [DC] when using a 3-pin CPU fan cable. Configuration options: [PWM] [DC] Some CPU fans with a 4-pin cable do not comply with Intel ® âs PWM fan specification. When using this type of CPU fan, you can not reduce the CPU fan speed even if you set the CPU Q-Fan Mode to [PWM].
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-35 4-35 4-35 4-35 4-35 CPU Fan Ratio [Auto] CPU Fan Ratio [Auto] CPU Fan Ratio [Auto] CPU Fan Ratio [Auto] CPU Fan Ratio [Auto] Allows you to select the appropriate CPU fan speed ratio for the system. The default [Auto] automatically selects the fan speed ratio when operating a low CPU temperature. Select a higher ratio if you installed additional devices and the system requires more ventilation. Configuration options: [Auto] [90%] [80%] [70%] [60%] CPU Target Temperature [xxxºC] CPU Target Temperature [xxxºC] CPU Target Temperature [xxxºC] CPU Target Temperature [xxxºC] CPU Target Temperature [xxxºC] Allows you to set the CPU temperature threshold when the CPU fan speed is increased to lower the CPU temperature. The configuration options for this item depend on the recommended Intel ® Fan Speed Control (FSC) temperature settings. The Intel ® FSC provides target temperature options at ±15º with 3º interval. Chassis Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the chassis fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the chassis, the specific field shows N/A. Chassis Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Chassis Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Chassis Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Chassis Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Chassis Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Q-Fan feature that smartly adjusts the chassis fan speeds for more efficient system operation. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Power Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Power Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Power Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Power Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the power fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the power fan connector, the specific field shows N/A. VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects the voltage output through the onboard voltage regulators.
4-36 4-36 4-36 4-36 4-36 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.6 Boot menu The Boot menu items allow you to change the system boot options. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub-screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit APM Configuration Boot Device Priority Boot Settings Configuration Security 4.6.1 4.6.1 4.6.1 4.6.1 4.6.1 Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] These items specify the boot device priority sequence from the available devices. The number of device items that appears on the screen depends on the number of devices installed in the system. Configuration options: [xxxxx Drive] [Disabled] Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub-screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device [1st FLOPPY DRIVE] 2nd Boot Device [PM-ST330620A] 3rd Boot Device [PS-ASUS CD-S360]
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-37 4-37 4-37 4-37 4-37 4.6.2 4.6.2 4.6.2 4.6.2 4.6.2 Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Quick Boot [Enabled] Quick Boot [Enabled] Quick Boot [Enabled] Quick Boot [Enabled] Quick Boot [Enabled] Enabling this item allows the BIOS to skip some power on self tests (POST) while booting to decrease the time needed to boot the system. When set to [Disabled], BIOS performs all the POST items. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the full screen logo display feature. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Set this item to [Enabled] to use the ASUS MyLogo2⢠feature. Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Sets the display mode for option ROM. Configuration options: [Force BIOS] [Keep Current] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Allows you to select the power-on state for the NumLock. Configuration options: [Off] [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for PS/2 mouse. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] Wait for âF1â If Error [Enabled] Wait for âF1â If Error [Enabled] Wait for âF1â If Error [Enabled] Wait for âF1â If Error [Enabled] Wait for âF1â If Error [Enabled] When set to Enabled, the system waits for the F1 key to be pressed when error occurs. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Hit âDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Hit âDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Hit âDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Hit âDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Hit âDELâ Message Display [Enabled] When set to Enabled, the system displays the message âPress DEL to run Setupâ during POST. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Boot Settings Configuration Quick Boot [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] AddOn ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Bootup Num-Lock [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Wait For âF1â If Error [Enabled] Hit âDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Allows BIOS to skip certain tests while booting. This will decrease the time needed to boot the system.
4-38 4-38 4-38 4-38 4-38 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this function allows the option ROMs to trap Interrupt 19. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.6.3 4.6.3 4.6.3 4.6.3 4.6.3 Security Security Security Security Security The Security menu items allow you to change the system security settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the configuration options. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Security Settings Supervisor Password : Not Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disabled password. Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Select this item to set or change the supervisor password. The Supervisor Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed . After you set a password, this item shows Installed Installed Installed Installed Installed . To set a Supervisor Password: 1. Select the Change Supervisor Password item and press <Enter>. 2. From the password box, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Confirm the password when prompted. The message âPassword Installedâ appears after you successfully set your password. To change the supervisor password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. To clear the supervisor password, select the Change Supervisor Password then press <Enter>. The message âPassword Uninstalledâ appears. If you forget your BIOS password, you can clear clear it by erasing the CMOS Real Time Clock (RTC) RAM. See section â2.6 Jumpersâ for information on how to erase the RTC RAM.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-39 4-39 4-39 4-39 4-39 After you have set a supervisor password, the other items appear to allow you to change other security settings. User Access Level [Full Access] User Access Level [Full Access] User Access Level [Full Access] User Access Level [Full Access] User Access Level [Full Access] This item allows you to select the access restriction to the Setup items. Configuration options: [No Access] [View Only] [Limited] [Full Access] No Access No Access No Access No Access No Access prevents user access to the Setup utility. View Only View Only View Only View Only View Only allows access but does not allow change to any field. Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited allows changes only to selected fields, such as Date and Time. Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access allows viewing and changing all the fields in the Setup utility. Change User Password Change User Password Change User Password Change User Password Change User Password Select this item to set or change the user password. The User Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed . After you set a password, this item shows Installed Installed Installed Installed Installed . To set a User Password: 1. Select the Change User Password item and press <Enter>. 2. On the password box that appears, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Confirm the password when prompted. The message âPassword Installedâ appears after you set your password successfully. To change the user password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Security Settings Supervisor Password : Not Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password User Access Level [Full Access] Change User Password Clear User Password Password Check [Setup] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled]
4-40 4-40 4-40 4-40 4-40 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Clear User Password Clear User Password Clear User Password Clear User Password Clear User Password Select this item to clear the user password. Password Check [Setup] Password Check [Setup] Password Check [Setup] Password Check [Setup] Password Check [Setup] When set to [Setup], BIOS checks for user password when accessing the Setup utility. When set to [Always], BIOS checks for user password both when accessing Setup and booting the system. Configuration options: [Setup] [Always] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the boot sector virus protection. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Select this option only if you do not want to save the changes that you made to the Setup program. If you made changes to fields other than System Date, System Time, and Password, the BIOS asks for a confirmation before exiting. Discard Changes Discard Changes Discard Changes Discard Changes Discard Changes Allows you to discard the selections you made and restore the previously saved values. After selecting this option, a confirmation appears. Select Yes Yes Yes Yes Y e s to discard any changes and load the previously saved values. Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Once you are finished making your selections, choose this option from the Exit menu to ensure the values you selected are saved to the CMOS RAM. An onboard backup battery sustains the CMOS RAM so it stays on even when the computer is turned off. When you select this option, a confirmation window appears. Select Yes Yes Yes Yes Y e s to save the changes and exit. If you attempt to exit the Setup program without saving your changes, the program prompts you with a message asking if you want to save your changes before exiting. Press <Enter> to save the changes while exiting. Exit system setup after saving the changes. F10 key can be used for this operation. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub-screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Exit Options Exit & Save Changes Exit & Discard Changes Discard Changes Load Setup Defaults Pressing <Esc> does not immediately exit this menu. Select one of the options from this menu or <F10> from the legend bar to exit. 4.7 Exit menu The Exit menu items allow you to load the optimal or failsafe default values for the BIOS items, and save or discard your changes to the BIOS items.
4-42 4-42 4-42 4-42 4-42 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Allows you to load the default values for each of the parameters on the Setup menus. When you select this option or if you press <F5>, a confirmation window appears. Select Yes Yes Yes Yes Y e s to load default values. Select Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes o r make other changes before saving the values to the non-volatile RAM.
5 Software support This chapter describes the contents of the support CD that comes with the motherboard package.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe Chapter summary 5 5.1 Installing an operating system ............................................. 5-1 5.2 Support CD information ........................................................ 5-1 5.3 Software information ........................................................... 5-8 5.4 RAID configurations ............................................................ 5-16 5.5 Creating a RAID driver disk ................................................. 5-38
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-1 5-1 5-1 5-1 5-1 5.1 Installing an operating system This motherboard supports Windows ® 2000/2003 Server/XP operating systems (OS). Always install the latest OS version and corresponding updates to maximize the features of your hardware. 5.2 Support CD information The support CD that came with the motherboard package contains the drivers, software applications, and utilities that you can install to avail all motherboard features. 5.2.1 5.2.1 5.2.1 5.2.1 5.2.1 Running the support CD Running the support CD Running the support CD Running the support CD Running the support CD Place the support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers D r i v e r s menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer. Click an icon to Click an icon to Click an icon to Click an icon to Click an icon to display support display support display support display support display support CD/motherboard CD/motherboard CD/motherboard CD/motherboard CD/motherboard information information information information information Click an item to install Click an item to install Click an item to install Click an item to install Click an item to install ⢠Motherboard settings and hardware options vary. Use the setup procedures presented in this chapter for reference only. Refer to your OS documentation for detailed information. ⢠Make sure that you install Windows ® 2000 Service Pack 4 or the Windows ® XP Service Pack1 or later versions before installing the drivers for better compatibility and system stability. If Autorun Autorun Autorun Autorun Autorun i s NOT enabled in your computer, browse the contents of the support CD to locate the file ASSETUP.EXE from the BIN folder. Double-click the ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE t o run the CD. The contents of the support CD are subject to change at any time without notice. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) for updates.
5-2 5-2 5-2 5-2 5-2 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.2.2 5.2.2 5.2.2 5.2.2 5.2.2 Drivers menu Drivers menu Drivers menu Drivers menu Drivers menu The drivers menu shows the available device drivers if the system detects installed devices. Install the necessary drivers to activate the devices. QFE Update QFE Update QFE Update QFE Update QFE Update Installs the Quick Fix Engineering (QFE) driver updates. Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Installs the Intel ® Chipset INF Update Program. This driver enables Plug-n-Play INF support for the Intel ® chipset components on the motherboard. When installed to the target system, this driver provides the method for configuring the chipset components. You can install this utility using three different modes: interactive, silent or unattended preload. Installing the driver in interactive mode requires user input during installation. User input is not required when installing the driver in silent or unattended preload modes. Refer to the online help or readme file that came with the utility for details. C-MEDIA CMI9880 Audio Driver and Application C-MEDIA CMI9880 Audio Driver and Application C-MEDIA CMI9880 Audio Driver and Application C-MEDIA CMI9880 Audio Driver and Application C-MEDIA CMI9880 Audio Driver and Application Installs the C-MEDIA ® CMI9880 audio driver and application. See page 5-11 for details. ASUS Wireless LAN adapter Driver and Utility ASUS Wireless LAN adapter Driver and Utility ASUS Wireless LAN adapter Driver and Utility ASUS Wireless LAN adapter Driver and Utility ASUS Wireless LAN adapter Driver and Utility Installs the driver, utilities, and setup wizard for the ASUS WiFi-g⢠wireless solution. Refer to the WiFi-g⢠documentation for details. The screen display and driver options vary under different operating system versions.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-3 5-3 5-3 5-3 5-3 Marvell Yukon Gigabit Ethernet Driver Marvell Yukon Gigabit Ethernet Driver Marvell Yukon Gigabit Ethernet Driver Marvell Yukon Gigabit Ethernet Driver Marvell Yukon Gigabit Ethernet Driver Installs the driver for the Marvell ® Yukon 88E8052 PCI Express Gigabit LAN. IT8212 Driver and Application IT8212 Driver and Application IT8212 Driver and Application IT8212 Driver and Application IT8212 Driver and Application Installs the driver for the IT8212 IDE RAID controller. Make ITE8212 Driver Disk Make ITE8212 Driver Disk Make ITE8212 Driver Disk Make ITE8212 Driver Disk Make ITE8212 Driver Disk Allows you to create a driver disk for the IT8212 IDE RAID setup. See page 5-38 for details. USB 2.0 Driver USB 2.0 Driver USB 2.0 Driver USB 2.0 Driver USB 2.0 Driver Installs the USB 2.0 driver. Silicon Image RAID5 Driver Silicon Image RAID5 Driver Silicon Image RAID5 Driver Silicon Image RAID5 Driver Silicon Image RAID5 Driver Installs the Silicon Image 3114R RAID5 driver. Make Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk Allows you to create a RAID 5 driver disk for the Silicon Image RAID 5 configuration. See page 5-38 for details. 5.2.3 5.2.3 5.2.3 5.2.3 5.2.3 Utilities menu Utilities menu Utilities menu Utilities menu Utilities menu The Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities menu displays the software applications and utilities that the motherboard supports. Click on an item to install. Marvell Yukon VCT Application Marvell Yukon VCT Application Marvell Yukon VCT Application Marvell Yukon VCT Application Marvell Yukon VCT Application The Virtual Cable Tester (VCT) is a cable diagnostic application that analyzes and reports LAN cable faults and shorts. See page 5-10 for details.
5-4 5-4 5-4 5-4 5-4 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support ASUS PC Probe ASUS PC Probe ASUS PC Probe ASUS PC Probe ASUS PC Probe This smart utility monitors the fan speed, CPU temperature, and system voltages, and alerts you of any detected problems. This utility helps you keep your computer in healthy operating condition. ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update The ASUS Update utility that allows you to update the motherboard BIOS in Windows ® environment. This utility requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP). See page 4-8 for details. AI Booster AI Booster AI Booster AI Booster AI Booster The ASUS AI Booster application allows you to overclock the CPU speed in Windows ® environment. Microsoft DirectX 9.0b Microsoft DirectX 9.0b Microsoft DirectX 9.0b Microsoft DirectX 9.0b Microsoft DirectX 9.0b The Microsoft DirectX ® 9.0b is a multimedia technology that enhances computer graphics and sounds. DirectX ® improves the multimedia features of your computer so you can enjoy watching TV and movies, capturing videos, or playing games in your computer. Anti-virus application Anti-virus application Anti-virus application Anti-virus application Anti-virus application The anti-virus application scans, identifies, and destroys computer worms and viruses attempting to damage your data. View the online help for detailed information. Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor This Voice Editor application allows you to record and customize wave files for the ASUS POST Reporter⢠utility. Use this program to change the default vocal POST messages. See section â3.2 Vocal POST Messagesâ for details. ADOBE Acrobat Reader ADOBE Acrobat Reader ADOBE Acrobat Reader ADOBE Acrobat Reader ADOBE Acrobat Reader The Adobe Acrobat ® Reader V5.0 is for opening, viewing, and printing documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver Bring life to your idle screen by installing the ASUS screen saver.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-5 5-5 5-5 5-5 5-5 5.2.5 5.2.5 5.2.5 5.2.5 5.2.5 Contact information Contact information Contact information Contact information Contact information Click the Contact Contact Contact Contact Contact tab to display the ASUS contact information. You can also find this information on the inside front cover of this user guide. 5.2.4 5.2.4 5.2.4 5.2.4 5.2.4 Manuals menu Manuals menu Manuals menu Manuals menu Manuals menu The Manuals Manuals Manuals Manuals Manuals menu contains the user manuals for third party components and applications. Most user manual files are in Portable Document Format (PDF). Install the Adobe Acrobat Reader application from the Utilities tab before opening a user manual file.
5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.2.6 5.2.6 5.2.6 5.2.6 5.2.6 Other information Other information Other information Other information Other information The icons on the top right corner of the screen provide additional information on the motherboard and the contents of the support CD. Click an icon to display the specified information. Motherboard Info Motherboard Info Motherboard Info Motherboard Info Motherboard Info Displays the general specifications of the motherboard. Browse this CD Browse this CD Browse this CD Browse this CD Browse this CD Displays the contents of the support CD in graphical format.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-7 5-7 5-7 5-7 5-7 Technical Support Form Technical Support Form Technical Support Form Technical Support Form Technical Support Form Displays the ASUS Technical Support Request Form that you have to fill out when requesting technical support. Filelist Filelist Filelist Filelist Filelist Displays the contents of the support CD in text format.
5-8 5-8 5-8 5-8 5-8 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.3 Software information Most of the applications in the support CD have wizards that will conveniently guide you through the installation. View the online help or readme file that came with the software application for more information. 5.3.1 5.3.1 5.3.1 5.3.1 5.3.1 ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠The ASUS MyLogo2⢠utility lets you customize the boot logo. The boot logo is the image that appears on screen during the Power-On-Self-Tests (POST). The ASUS MyLogo2⢠is automatically installed when you install the ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update utility from the support CD. See section â5.2.3 Utilities menuâ for details. To launch the ASUS MyLogo2â¢: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility. Refer to section â4.1.4 ASUS Update utilityâ for details. 2. Select Options Options Options Options Options from the drop down menu, then click Next Next Next Next Next . 3. Check the option Launch MyLogo to replace system boot Launch MyLogo to replace system boot Launch MyLogo to replace system boot Launch MyLogo to replace system boot Launch MyLogo to replace system boot logo before flashing BIOS logo before flashing BIOS logo before flashing BIOS logo before flashing BIOS logo before flashing BIOS , then click Next Next Next Next Next . 4. Select Update BIOS from a file Update BIOS from a file Update BIOS from a file Update BIOS from a file Update BIOS from a file from the drop down menu, then click Next Next Next Next Next . 5. When prompted, locate the new BIOS file, then click Next Next Next Next N e x t. The ASUS MyLogo2 window appears. 6. From the left window pane, select the folder that contains the image you intend to use as your boot logo. ⢠Before using the ASUS MyLogo2â¢, use the AFUDOS utility to make a copy of your original BIOS file, or obtain the latest BIOS version from the ASUS website. See section â4.1.2 AFUDOS utilityâ. ⢠Make sure that the BIOS item Full Screen Logo Full Screen Logo Full Screen Logo Full Screen Logo Full Screen Logo i s set to [Enabled] if you wish to use ASUS MyLogo2. See section â4.6.2 Boot Settings Configurationâ. ⢠You can create your own boot logo image in GIF, JPG, or BMP file formats.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-9 9. When the screen returns to the ASUS Update utility, flash the original BIOS to load the new boot logo. 10. After flashing the BIOS, restart the computer to display the new boot logo during POST. 8. Adjust the boot image to your desired size by selecting a value on the Ratio Ratio Ratio Ratio Ratio box. 7. When the logo images appear on the right window pane, select an image to enlarge by clicking on it.
5-10 5-10 5-10 5-10 5-10 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 3. Click the Run Run Run Run R u n button to perform a cable test. 5.3.2 5.3.2 5.3.2 5.3.2 5.3.2 AI NET2 AI NET2 AI NET2 AI NET2 AI NET2 The AI NET2 features the Marvell ® Virtual Cable Tester⢠(VCT). VCT is a cable diagnostic utility that reports LAN cable faults and shorts using the Time Domain Reflectometry (TDR) technology. The VCT detects and reports open and shorted cables, impedance mismatches, pair swaps, pair polarity problems, and pair skew problems of up to 64 ns at one meter accuracy. The VCT feature reduces networking and support costs through a highly manageable and controlled network system. This utility can be incorporated in the network systems sofware for ideal field support as well as development diagnostics. Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠To use the the Marvell ® Virtual Cable Tester⢠utility: 1. Launch the VCT utility from the Windows ® desktop by clicking Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester . 2. Click Virtual Cable Tester Virtual Cable Tester Virtual Cable Tester Virtual Cable Tester Virtual Cable Tester from the menu to display the screen below. ⢠The VCT only runs on systems with Windows ® XP or Windows ® 2000 operating systems. ⢠The VCT utility only tests Ethernet cables connected to Gigabit LAN port(s). ⢠The Run Run Run Run R u n button on the Virtual Cable Tester⢠main window is disabled if no problem is detected on the LAN cable(s) connected to the LAN port(s). ⢠If you want the system to check the status of the LAN cable before entering the OS, enable the item Post Check LAN Cable Post Check LAN Cable Post Check LAN Cable Post Check LAN Cable Post Check LAN Cable i n t h e BIOS Setup.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-11 5.3.3 5.3.3 5.3.3 5.3.3 5.3.3 C-Media 3D audio configuration C-Media 3D audio configuration C-Media 3D audio configuration C-Media 3D audio configuration C-Media 3D audio configuration The C-Media 3D Audio Configuration utility allows easy installation and set up of audio devices through a user-friendly interface. The utility is automatically installed when you install the C-Media CMI9880 audio driver and application from the motherboard support CD. Refer to section â5.2.2 Drivers menu.â Launching the C-Media 3D Audio Configuration utility Launching the C-Media 3D Audio Configuration utility Launching the C-Media 3D Audio Configuration utility Launching the C-Media 3D Audio Configuration utility Launching the C-Media 3D Audio Configuration utility Launch the C-Media 3D Audio Configuration utility by double clicking the C-Media icon on the Windows ® taskbar. Using the C-Media 3D Audio Configuration utility Using the C-Media 3D Audio Configuration utility Using the C-Media 3D Audio Configuration utility Using the C-Media 3D Audio Configuration utility Using the C-Media 3D Audio Configuration utility The C-Media 3D Audio Configuration interface has five tabs: Main Setting, Mixer, Effect, Device Setting, and Information. Click a tab to display the details. Main Setting The Main Setting Main Setting Main Setting Main Setting Main Setting tab allows you to check the audio system status, configure the audio ports, set the speaker and audio DSP modes, and test the speaker output. Audio System Status Audio System Status Audio System Status Audio System Status Audio System Status . This section displays the output mode status, the real-time audio playback spectrum, and the digital I/O status. The number of speakers configured in the system determines the output mode status. Audio Audio Audio Audio Audio System System System System System Status Status Status Status Status Smart Jack Smart Jack Smart Jack Smart Jack Smart Jack settings settings settings settings settings Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode Selection Selection Selection Selection Selection Speaker Speaker Speaker Speaker Speaker Tester and Tester and Tester and Tester and Tester and Audio DSP Audio DSP Audio DSP Audio DSP Audio DSP Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Tabs Tabs Tabs Tabs Tabs
5-12 5-12 5-12 5-12 5-12 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Smart Jack Setting Smart Jack Setting Smart Jack Setting Smart Jack Setting Smart Jack Setting . You can configure the function of the rear panel, front panel, and digital I/O audio ports from this section. Click the Smart Jack setting button that corresponds to the port that you wish to configure. Mode Selection Mode Selection Mode Selection Mode Selection Mode Selection . This section allows you to set the Speaker Tester or the Digital Signal Processing (DSP). Click the button to change the audio modes. Speaker Tester and Audio DSP Setting Speaker Tester and Audio DSP Setting Speaker Tester and Audio DSP Setting Speaker Tester and Audio DSP Setting Speaker Tester and Audio DSP Setting . You can configure your speaker setup and the audio DSP settings in this section. Click the Play Play Play Play Play o r the Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop button to listen to the speakers or click the Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume button to adjust the speakersâ volume. Mixer The Mixer Mixer Mixer Mixer Mixer tab allows you to adjust the audio input and the recording output volume of devices connected to the system rear panel and front panel audio ports.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-13 5-13 5-13 5-13 5-13 Effect The Effect Effect Effect Effect Effect tab allows you to control the environment emulation, set the environment size, and adjust the equalizer settings. Environment Environment Environment Environment Environment settings settings settings settings settings Environment Environment Environment Environment Environment size size size size size Equalizer Equalizer Equalizer Equalizer Equalizer settings settings settings settings settings Environment Environment Environment Environment Environment . This section contains various pre-programmed enviroment emulations. There are four featured materials that emulate the bathroom, concert hall, underwater, and music pub environments. Click the corresponding button to set an environment emulation. To set other environment emulations, click the More Option More Option More Option More Option More Option list box. Environment Size Environment Size Environment Size Environment Size Environment Size . This section allows you to select the size of your room for an appropriate audio output. There are three room size models provided for the environment size emulation. Click any of the environment size buttons to set. Equalizer Equalizer Equalizer Equalizer Equalizer . The Equalizer section allows you to adjust the amplifier frequency. Use the 10-band equalizer to individually control the different frequency bands of your speaker system, or click a music style preset to load a pre-defined equalizer setting. Click the User Defined User Defined User Defined User Defined User Defined button to save or load your customized equalizer settings.
5-14 5-14 5-14 5-14 5-14 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Information The Information Information Information Information Information tab displays your 3D audio engine, audio CODEC, audio driver, audio controller, and DirectX information. Device Setting The Device Setting Device Setting Device Setting Device Setting Device Setting tab allows you to enable the audio CODEC multi-streaming feature, select a sound playback, and sound recording devices.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-15 5-15 5-15 5-15 5-15 Using Dolby Using Dolby Using Dolby Using Dolby Using Dolby ® Digital Live Digital Live Digital Live Digital Live Digital Live ⢠The Dolby ® Digital Live⢠technology encodes your computerâs digital audio contents to real-time Dolby ® Digital streams. Using the CODEC and the Sony/Philips Digital Interface (S/PDIF) ports on the motherboard, you can send the encoded Dolby ® Digital streams to an AC-3 decoder for playback on a multi-channel speaker system. Refer to the following illustrations when converting sounds to Dolby ® Digital streams. Direct or non-encoded Direct or non-encoded Direct or non-encoded Direct or non-encoded Direct or non-encoded audio in your computer audio in your computer audio in your computer audio in your computer audio in your computer passes through the passes through the passes through the passes through the passes through the AC-3 encoder. AC-3 encoder. AC-3 encoder. AC-3 encoder. AC-3 encoder. 1 2 The AC-3 encoder The AC-3 encoder The AC-3 encoder The AC-3 encoder The AC-3 encoder converts the converts the converts the converts the converts the sound into Dolby sound into Dolby sound into Dolby sound into Dolby sound into Dolby ® ® ® ® ® Digital streams. Digital streams. Digital streams. Digital streams. Digital streams. CMI9880 CMI9880 CMI9880 CMI9880 CMI9880 CODEC CODEC CODEC CODEC CODEC 3 The audio CODEC The audio CODEC The audio CODEC The audio CODEC The audio CODEC processes the streams processes the streams processes the streams processes the streams processes the streams then passes it to an AC-3 then passes it to an AC-3 then passes it to an AC-3 then passes it to an AC-3 then passes it to an AC-3 decoder through the decoder through the decoder through the decoder through the decoder through the S/PDIF out port. S/PDIF out port. S/PDIF out port. S/PDIF out port. S/PDIF out port. 4 The AC-3 decoder The AC-3 decoder The AC-3 decoder The AC-3 decoder The AC-3 decoder processes the processes the processes the processes the processes the streams then plays streams then plays streams then plays streams then plays streams then plays them back on a them back on a them back on a them back on a them back on a multi-channel multi-channel multi-channel multi-channel multi-channel speaker system. speaker system. speaker system. speaker system. speaker system. To enable the Dolby ® Digital Liveâ¢: 1. Connect an AC-3 decoder to the coaxial/optical S/PDIF out port. 2. Connect the AC-3 decoder to the multi-channel speaker system. 3. Launch the C-Media 3D Audio Configuration utility by double clicking the C-Media icon on the Windows ® taskbar. 4. Click the Dolby Digital Live Dolby Digital Live Dolby Digital Live Dolby Digital Live Dolby Digital Live button. You can now convert your computerâs audio content to Dolby ® Digital streams.
5-16 5-16 5-16 5-16 5-16 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.4 RAID configurations The motherboard comes with the Silicon Image Sil3114, ITE 8212, and the Intel ® ICH6R Southbride RAID controllers that allow you to configure IDE and Serial ATA hard disk drives as RAID sets. The motherboard supports the following RAID configurations. RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 (Data striping) optimizes two identical hard disk drives to read and write data in parallel, interleaved stacks. Two hard disks perform the same work as a single drive but at a sustained data transfer rate, double that of a single disk alone, thus improving data access and storage. Use of two new identical hard disk drives is required for this setup. RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 (Data mirroring) copies and maintains an identical image of data from one drive to a second drive. If one drive fails, the disk array management software directs all applications to the surviving drive as it contains a complete copy of the data in the other drive. This RAID configuration provides data protection and increases fault tolerance to the entire system. Use two new drives or use an existing drive and a new drive for this setup. The new drive must be of the same size or larger than the existing drive. RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 i s data striping and data mirroring combined without parity (redundancy data) having to be calculated and written. With the RAID 0 1 configuration you get all the benefits of both RAID 0 and RAID 1 configurations. Use four new hard disk drives or use an existing drive and three new drives for this setup. RAID 5 RAID 5 RAID 5 RAID 5 RAID 5 stripes both data and parity information across three or more hard disk drives. Among the advantages of RAID 5 configuration include better HDD performance, fault tolerance, and higher storage capacity. The RAID 5 configuration is best suited for transaction processing, relational database applications, enterprise resource planning, and other business systems. Use a minimum of three identical hard disk drives for this setup. RAID 10 RAID 10 RAID 10 RAID 10 RAID 10 i s a striped configuration with RAID 1 segments whose segments are RAID 1 arrays. This configuration has the same fault tolerance as RAID 1, and has the same overhead for fault-tolerance as mirroring alone. RAID 10 achieves high input/output rates by striping RAID 1 segments. In some instances, a RAID 10 configuration can sustain multiple simultaneous drive failure. A minimum of four hard disk drives is required for this setup. JBOD JBOD JBOD JBOD JBOD (Spanning) stands for Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks and refers to hard disk drives that are not yet configured as a RAID set. This configuration stores the same data redundantly on multiple disks that appear as a single disk on the operating system. Spanning does not deliver any advantage over using separate disks independently and does not provide fault tolerance or other RAID performance benefits.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-17 5-17 5-17 5-17 5-17 5.4.1 5.4.1 5.4.1 5.4.1 5.4.1 Installing hard disks Installing hard disks Installing hard disks Installing hard disks Installing hard disks The motherboard supports Ultra DMA /133/100/66 and Serial ATA hard disk drives. For optimal performance, install identical drives of the same model and capacity when creating a disk array. Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks To install IDE hard disks for a RAID configuration: 1. Set the jumpers of each hard disk as Master/Master or Slave/Slave. 2. Install the hard disks into the drive bays. 3. Connect the HDD signal cables. 4. Connect a 4-pin power cable to the power connector on each drive. Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks To install the SATA hard disks for a RAID configuration: 1. Install the SATA hard disks into the drive bays. 2. Connect the SATA signal cables. 3. Connect a SATA power cable to the power connector on each drive. If you want to boot the system from a hard disk drive included in a created RAID set, copy first the RAID driver from the support CD to a floppy disk before you install an operating system to the selected hard disk drive. Refer to section â5.5 Creating a RAID driver diskâ for details. Refer to the RAID controllers user manual on the support CD for detailed information on RAID configurations. Intel Intel Intel Intel Intel ® Matrix Storage Matrix Storage Matrix Storage Matrix Storage Matrix Storage . The Intel ® Matrix Storage technology supported by the ICH6R chip allows you to create a RAID 0 and a RAID 1 set using only two identical hard disk drives. The Intel ® Matrix Storage technology creates two partitions on each hard disk drive to create a virtual RAID 0 and RAID 1 sets. This technology also allows you to change the hard disk drive partition size without losing any data.
5-18 5-18 5-18 5-18 5-18 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.4.2 5.4.2 5.4.2 5.4.2 5.4.2 Silicon Image RAID configurations Silicon Image RAID configurations Silicon Image RAID configurations Silicon Image RAID configurations Silicon Image RAID configurations The Silicon Image RAID controller supports RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10, JBOD, and RAID 5 configurations. Use the Silicon Image RAID utility to configure a disk array. Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items After installing the hard disk drives, make sure to set the necessary RAID items in the BIOS before setting your RAID configuration. To set the BIOS RAID items: 1. Boot the system and press <Del> during the Power-On Self-Test (POST) to enter the BIOS Setup Utility. 2. From the Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration menu item in the BIOS set the Silicon Image Controller Silicon Image Controller Silicon Image Controller Silicon Image Controller Silicon Image Controller item to RAID Mode. 3. Save your changes and Exit Setup. Launching the Silicon Image Array Management Software Launching the Silicon Image Array Management Software Launching the Silicon Image Array Management Software Launching the Silicon Image Array Management Software Launching the Silicon Image Array Management Software Launch the Silicon Image Array Management software from Windows ® XP by clicking the Start Start Start Start Start button and selecting All Programs > Silicon Image All Programs > Silicon Image All Programs > Silicon Image All Programs > Silicon Image All Programs > Silicon Image > Sam > Sam > Sam > Sam > Sam ⢠For details on the Silicon Image SATARaid⢠RAID configuration, refer to the âSil3114 Userâs Manualâ in the motherboard support CD. ⢠A RAID 5 configuration requires at least 1 GB of system memory and 3 GHz processor core speed for optimum performance. ⢠You can only set the SATALink⢠RAID 5 and JBOD configuration using the SATALink⢠SATA RAID Management Software. ⢠Make sure to install the Silicon Image SATA Link Sil 3114 driver and the Silicon Image RAID 5 Array Management Utility before using RAID 5 configuration.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-19 5-19 5-19 5-19 5-19 Entering the Silicon Image BIOS RAID Configuration Utility Entering the Silicon Image BIOS RAID Configuration Utility Entering the Silicon Image BIOS RAID Configuration Utility Entering the Silicon Image BIOS RAID Configuration Utility Entering the Silicon Image BIOS RAID Configuration Utility To enter the Silicon Image BIOS RAID configuration utility: 1. Boot up your computer. 2. During POST, press <Ctrl S> or <F4>. The RAID BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference only, and may not exactly match the items on your screen. On the upper right corner of the screen is the Help message box. The message describes the function of each menu item. At the bottom of the screen is the legend box. The keys on the legend box allow you to navigate through the setup menu options. The following lists the keys found in the legend box and their corresponding functions. â â â â â , , , , , â â â â â : Select/Move to the next item ESC ESC ESC ESC E S C : Previous Menu Enter Enter Enter Enter Enter : Select Ctrl-E Ctrl-E Ctrl-E Ctrl-E Ctrl-E : Exit Create RAID set Delete RAID set Rebuild Raid1 set Resolve Conflicts Low Level Format Logical Drive Info RAID Configuration Utility - Silicon Image Inc. Copyright (C) 2004 ââ ââ ââ ââ ââ :Select Menu ESC:Previous Menu Enter:Select Ctrl-E:Exit MAIN MENU PHYSICAL DRIVE 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB STXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB STXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB STXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB STXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB LOGICAL DRIVE HELP Press âEnterâ to create RAID set
5-20 5-20 5-20 5-20 5-20 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Creating a RAID 0 set (Striped) Creating a RAID 0 set (Striped) Creating a RAID 0 set (Striped) Creating a RAID 0 set (Striped) Creating a RAID 0 set (Striped) To create a RAID set: 1. From the Silicon Image configuration utility main menu, select Create Create Create Create Create RAID set RAID set RAID set RAID set RAID set then press <Enter> to display an option menu. 2. Select RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 then press <Enter> to display the following. 3. Select your desired method of configuration. Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration a. Select Auto Configuration the press <Enter>. b. The utility prompts a confirmation message, press <Y>. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration By default, Auto configuration sets the stripe size to 64K and sets the logical drives based on the physical drives installed. MAIN MENU Create RAID set Delete RAID set Rebuild Raid1 set Resolve Conflicts Low Level Format Logical Drive Info RAID0 RAID1 RAID10 SPARE DRIVE
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 b. Use the up or down arrow keys to select a chunk size appropriate to your drive usage then press <Enter>. The selection bar moves to the Physical Drive menu. TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: For server systems, use of a lower array block size is recommended. For multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing, a higher array block size is recommended for optimum performance. PHYSICAL DRIVE 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration a. Select Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration and press <Enter>. The following pop-up menu appears. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration chunk size 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K c. Using the up or down arrow keys, select a drive then press <Enter> to set the first drive of the RAID set. Repeat the same procedure to set the second, third, and fourth drive. The number of available drives depend on the installed and enabled physical drives in the system. d. The utility prompts a confirmation message, press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the configuration Main Menu.
5-22 5-22 5-22 5-22 5-22 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirrored) Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirrored) Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirrored) Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirrored) Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirrored) To create a RAID 1 set: 1. From the Silicon Image configuration utility main menu, select Create Create Create Create Create RAID set RAID set RAID set RAID set RAID set then press <Enter>. The following sub-menu appears. MAIN MENU Create RAID set Delete RAID set Rebuild Raid1 set Resolve Conflicts Low Level Format Logical Drive Info RAID0 RAID1 RAID10 SPARE DRIVE 2. Select RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 then press <Enter> to display the following. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration 3. Select your desired method of configuration. Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration a. Select Auto Configuration then press <Enter>. b. The utility prompts a confirmation message. Press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the configuration Main Menu. ⢠Auto-configuration creates a RAID 1 set without backup copy. ⢠When migrating a single hard disk drive to a RAID 1 set, use of the Manual configuration is recommended.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-23 5-23 5-23 5-23 5-23 PHYSICAL DRIVE 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB b. Using the up or down arrow keys, select the source drive and press <Enter>. c. Repeat step b to select the target drive . d. After selecting the source and target drives, the following pop-up menu appears. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration Create with data copy Create without data copy Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration a. Select Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration and press <Enter>. The selection bar moves to the Physical Drives menu. ⢠The Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy option allows you to copy the current data from the source drive to the mirror drive. The Create Create Create Create Create without data copy without data copy without data copy without data copy without data copy option disables the disk copy function of the Mirrored set. ⢠If you selected Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy , the RAID 1 set must be repartitioned and reformatted to guarantee the consistency of its contents. ⢠Select Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy i f you have important data in your source drive.
5-24 5-24 5-24 5-24 5-24 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support e. If you selected Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy , the following pop-up menu appears. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration online copy offline copy f. Use the up or down arrow keys to select desired copy method, then press <Enter>. g. The utility prompts a confirmation message. Press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the configuration Main Menu. Creating a RAID 10 set (Mirrored Striped) Creating a RAID 10 set (Mirrored Striped) Creating a RAID 10 set (Mirrored Striped) Creating a RAID 10 set (Mirrored Striped) Creating a RAID 10 set (Mirrored Striped) To create a RAID 10 set: 1. From the Silicon Image configuration utility main menu, select Create Create Create Create Create RAID set RAID set RAID set RAID set RAID set then press <Enter>. The following sub-menu appears. To create a RAID 10 set: MAIN MENU Create RAID set Delete RAID set Rebuild Raid1 set Resolve Conflicts Low Level Format Logical Drive Info RAID0 RAID1 RAID10 SPARE DRIVE The online copy online copy online copy online copy online copy option automatically copies the data to the target drives on the background while writing to the source drives. The offline offline offline offline offline copy copy copy copy copy option allows you to copy the contents of the source drive to the target drives now. A copy progress appears if you previously selected offline copy.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-25 5-25 5-25 5-25 5-25 2. Select RAID 10 RAID 10 RAID 10 RAID 10 RAID 10 then press <Enter> to display the following. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration chunk size 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K 3. Select your desired method of configuration. Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration a. Select Auto Configuration then press <Enter>. b. The utility prompts a confirmation message. Press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the configuration Main Menu. Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration a. Select Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration and press <Enter>. The following pop-up menu appears. TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: For server systems, use of a lower array block size is recommended. For multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing, a higher array block size is recommended for optimum performance. Auto-configuration creates a RAID 10 set without backup copy.
5-26 5-26 5-26 5-26 5-26 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support c. Using the up or down arrow keys, select a drive then press <Enter> to set the first drive of the RAID set. d. Repeat step c to set the second, third, and fourth drive. The number of available drives depend on the installed and enabled physical drives in the system. e. After setting the RAID drives, the following pop-up menu appears. PHYSICAL DRIVE 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration Create with data copy Create without data copy b. Use the up or down arrow keys to select a chunk size appropriate to your drive usage then press <Enter>. The selection bar moves to the Physical Drive menu. ⢠The Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy option allows you to copy the current data from the source drive to the mirror drive. The Create Create Create Create Create without data copy without data copy without data copy without data copy without data copy option disables the disk copy function of the Mirrored set. ⢠If you selected Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy , the RAID 1 set must be repartitioned and reformatted to guarantee the consistency of its contents. ⢠Select Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy i f you have important data in your source drive.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-27 5-27 5-27 5-27 5-27 f. If you selected Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy , the following pop-up menu appears. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration online copy offline copy Creating a RAID 5 or JBOD set Creating a RAID 5 or JBOD set Creating a RAID 5 or JBOD set Creating a RAID 5 or JBOD set Creating a RAID 5 or JBOD set Use the Silicon Image Array Management software to create a RAID 5 or JBOD configuration on Windows ® 2000/XP. g. Use the up or down arrow keys to select desired copy method, then press <Enter>. h. The utility prompts a confirmation message. Press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the configuration Main Menu. A copy progress appears if you previously selected offline copy. The online copy online copy online copy online copy online copy option automatically copies the data to the target drives on the background while writing to the source drives. The offline offline offline offline offline copy copy copy copy copy option allows you to copy the contents of the source drive to the target drives now.
5-28 5-28 5-28 5-28 5-28 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.4.3 5.4.3 5.4.3 5.4.3 5.4.3 Intel Intel Intel Intel Intel ® ® ® ® ® RAID configurations RAID configurations RAID configurations RAID configurations RAID configurations This motherboard supports RAID 0, RAID 1, and Intel ® Matrix Storage configurations for Serial ATA hard disks drives through the Intel ® ICH6R chipset. Use the Intel ® Application Accelerator RAID Option ROM utility to configure a disk array. Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items After installing the hard disk drives, make sure to set the necessary RAID items in the BIOS before setting your RAID configuration. To set the BIOS RAID items: 1. Boot the system and press <Del> during the Power-On Self-Test (POST) to enter the BIOS Setup Utility. 2. From the Main > IDE Configuration Main > IDE Configuration Main > IDE Configuration Main > IDE Configuration Main > IDE Configuration menu in the BIOS, the Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As item as RAID. 3. Set the OnBoard Serial-ATA BOOTROM OnBoard Serial-ATA BOOTROM OnBoard Serial-ATA BOOTROM OnBoard Serial-ATA BOOTROM OnBoard Serial-ATA BOOTROM item as Enabled. 4. Save your changes and exit Setup. Entering the Intel Entering the Intel Entering the Intel Entering the Intel Entering the Intel ® ® ® ® ® Application Accelerator RAID Option Application Accelerator RAID Option Application Accelerator RAID Option Application Accelerator RAID Option Application Accelerator RAID Option ROM utility ROM utility ROM utility ROM utility ROM utility To enter the Intel ® Application Accelerator RAID option ROM utility: 1. Boot up your computer. 2. During POST, press <Ctrl I> to display the main menu of the utility. [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] RAID Volumes: None defined. Non-RAID Disks: Port Drive Model Serial # Size Type/Status (Vol ID) 0 ST380013AS xxxxxxxx 74.5GB Non-RAID Disk 1 ST380013AS xxxxxxxx 74.5GB Non-RAID Disk Intel(R) Application Accelerator RAID Option ROM v4.0.0.6211 Copyright(C) 2003-04 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ MAIN MENU ] 1. Create RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 4. Exit [ ]-Select [ ]-Select [ESC] Exit [ESC] Exit [Enter]-Select Menu [Enter]-Select Menu The RAID BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference only, and may not exactly match the items on your screen.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-29 5-29 5-29 5-29 5-29 At the bottom of the screen are the navigation keys. These keys allow you to move through and select menu options. Creating a RAID Volume Creating a RAID Volume Creating a RAID Volume Creating a RAID Volume Creating a RAID Volume To create a RAID volume: 1. From the Intel Application Accelerator RAID Option ROM utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume then press <Enter>. The following screen appears. [ HELP ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length taht can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and can not contain special characters. Intel(R) Application Accelerator RAID Option ROM v4.0.0.6211 Copyright(C) 2003-04 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] Name: RAID_Volume1 RAID Level: RAID0(Stripe) Disks: Select Disk Strip Size: 128KB Capacity: 149.0GB [ ]-Change [ ]-Change [TAB]-Next [TAB]-Next [ESC] Previous Menu [ESC] Previous Menu [Enter]-Select [Enter]-Select 2. Key-in a unique name for your RAID volume then press <Enter>. 3. Use the up or down arrow keys to select your desired RAID Level then press <Enter>. a. If you selected RAID 0 (Stripe), use the up or down arrow keys to select the stripe size for your RAID 0 array then press <Enter>.The available values range from 8 KB to 128 KB. The default selection is 128 KB. The strip value should be chosen based on the planned drive usage. ⢠8 /16 KB - low disk usage ⢠64 KB - typical disk usage ⢠128 KB - performance disk usage [ ]-Change [ ]-Change [TAB]-Next [TAB]-Next [ESC] Previous Menu [ESC] Previous Menu [Enter]-Select [Enter]-Select
5-30 5-30 5-30 5-30 5-30 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: For server systems, use of a lower array block size is recommended. For multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing, a higher array block size is recommended for optimum performance. b. If you selected RAID (MIrrored), the Create Volume prompt appears. 4. On the Create Volume prompt, press <Enter> to create the array. The utility prompts a confirmation message, press <Y>. WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISK WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume (Y/N) 5. Select 4. Exit 4. Exit 4. Exit 4. Exit 4. Exit then press <Enter> to exit the RAID configuration utility. The utility prompts a confirmation message, press <Y>. Deleting a RAID Volume Deleting a RAID Volume Deleting a RAID Volume Deleting a RAID Volume Deleting a RAID Volume [ HELP ] Deleting a volume will destroy the volume data on the drive(s) and cause any member disks to become available as non-RAID disks. WARNING: EXISTING DATA WITHIN THIS VOLUME WILL BE LOST AND NON-RECOVERABLE Intel(R) Application Accelerator RAID Option ROM v4.0.0.6211 Copyright(C) 2003-04 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ DELETE ARRAY MENU ] [ ]-Select [ ]-Select [<ESC>]-Previous Menu [<ESC>]-Previous Menu [<DEL>]-Delete Volume [<DEL>]-Delete Volume Name Level Drives Capacity Status Bootable RAID_Volume1 RAID0(Stripe) 2 149.0GB Normal Yes To delete a RAID Volume: 1. Select the option 2. Delete RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume then press <Enter> to display the following. Take caution in using this option. All data on the RAID drives will be lost!
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-31 5-31 5-31 5-31 5-31 Resetting RAID Disks Drives Resetting RAID Disks Drives Resetting RAID Disks Drives Resetting RAID Disks Drives Resetting RAID Disks Drives Resetting RAID data will remove the internal RAID structures from the selected RAID disks. By removing these structures the drive will revert back to a Non-RAID disk. [ RESET RAID DATA ] WARNING: Resetting a disk causes all data on the disk to be lost. Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 STXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.0GB Member Disk 1 STXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.0GB Member Disk Select the disk that should be reset [ ]-Previous/Next [ ]-Previous/Next [Space]-Selects [Space]-Selects [Enter]-Selection Complete [Enter]-Selection Complete 2. Use the up or down arrow keys to highlight a RAID drive you wish to reset then press <Space>. 3. Repeat step 2 to select other RAID drives. 4. Press <Enter> to reset RAID drive. 5. The utility prompts a confirmation message, press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the configuration Main Menu. 2. Press <Del> to delete the RAID volume. The following confirmation message appears. ALL DATA IN THE VOLUME WILL BE LOST!! Are you sure you want to delete volume "RAID_Volume0"? (Y/N) [ VOLUME DELETE VERIFICATION ] 3. Press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the configuration Main Menu. Take caution when resetting a RAID to non-RAID. Resetting all RAID data will remove any internal RAID structure from all RAID disks! 1. Select the option 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID then press <Enter>.
5-32 5-32 5-32 5-32 5-32 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Auto Configuration...........[ 1 ] Define RAID..................[ 2 ] Delete RAID..................[ 3 ] Rebuild RAID.................[ 4 ] RAID Card Configuration......[ 5 ] IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [1]..[5] Select [ESC] Exit [MAIN MENU] 5.4.4 5.4.4 5.4.4 5.4.4 5.4.4 ITE ITE ITE ITE ITE ® ® ® ® ® 8212F RAID configurations 8212F RAID configurations 8212F RAID configurations 8212F RAID configurations 8212F RAID configurations The ITE ® 8212F IDE RAID controller supports RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1 and JBOD configurations. Use the IT8212 BIOS Setup Utility or the ATA RAID Manager application to configure a disk array. Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items After installing the hard disk drives, make sure to set the necessary RAID items in the BIOS before setting your RAID configuration. To set the BIOS RAID items: 1. Boot the system and press <Del> during the Power-On Self-Test (POST) to enter the BIOS Setup Utility. 2. From the Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration menu in the BIOS, set the ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller item to RAID Mode. 3. Save your changes and exit Setup. Entering the ITE Entering the ITE Entering the ITE Entering the ITE Entering the ITE ® ® ® ® ® 8212F Setup Utility 8212F Setup Utility 8212F Setup Utility 8212F Setup Utility 8212F Setup Utility To enter the ITE ® 8212F Setup Utility: 1. Boot up your computer. 2. The ITE8212F controller scans for IDE devices attached on the IDE RAID ports. When prompted, press <Ctrl F> or <Ctrl E> to display the main menu of the utility.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-33 5-33 5-33 5-33 5-33 RAID Mode................................ Stripe Un-used Drive(s)......................... 4 Drive(s) in Array........................ 0 Array Capacity (size in MB).............. 8056 IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [ Auto Configuration Menu ] [ Array Configuration ] Setup Array Type as: RAID 0 [ â â â â â , â â â â â ,Space] Change Option [CTRL-Y] Save [ESC] Exit 3. At the bottom of the screen are the navigation keys. These keys allow you to move through and select from the menu options. Auto-configuring a RAID array Auto-configuring a RAID array Auto-configuring a RAID array Auto-configuring a RAID array Auto-configuring a RAID array This option allows you to select a supported RAID set for the utility to automatically configure. To auto-configure a RAID set: 1. From the IT8212 Setup Utility screen, press <1>. The following screen appears. 2. Use the left or right arrow keys or the space bar to select a RAID set. As you select an option, the screen displays the array configuration of the RAID based on the number of IDE devices installed. 3. Press <Ctrl Y> to save your RAID set. 4. Press <Esc> to exit. 4. Press the number of your selection or <Esc> to exit. [1]..[5] Select [ESC] Exit
5-34 5-34 5-34 5-34 5-34 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [ Define RAID Menu ] Array No Array Mode Drive No Size(MB) Status Array 0 ---- ---- ----- ----- Array 1 ---- ---- ----- ----- Array 2 ---- ---- ----- ----- Array 3 ---- ---- ----- ----- â â â â â : Capacity (GB) ⦠⦠⦠⦠⦠: Bootable Array [ â â â â â ] Up [ â â â â â ] Down [Space] Boot Array [Enter] Select [ESC] Exit Defining a RAID array Defining a RAID array Defining a RAID array Defining a RAID array Defining a RAID array This option allows you to define supported RAID arrays. To define a RAID array: 1. From the IT8212 Setup Utility screen, press <2>. The following screen appears. 2. Use the up or down arrow keys or the space bar to select a RAID array, then press <Enter>. The following sub-menu appears. IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [ Define RAID Sub-Menu ] â â â â â : Capacity (GB) [ â â â â â ] Up [ â â â â â ] Down [Space] Change Option [Ctrl-Y] Save [ESC] Exit Channel ID Drive Name Size(MB) Assignment Pri/D0 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Y Pri/D1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Y Sec/D0 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Y Sec/D1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Y [ Drive Assignments] Array No Array Mode Drive No Status Array 0 Stripe 4 Functional Block Size: 64KB
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-35 5-35 5-35 5-35 5-35 3. Use the up or down arrow keys to select editable fields. 4. Use the Space bar to change field values. 5. Press <Ctrl Y> to save RAID array. 6. Press <Esc> to exit. Deleting a RAID array Deleting a RAID array Deleting a RAID array Deleting a RAID array Deleting a RAID array This option allows you to delete an existing RAID array. To delete a RAID array: 1. From the IT8212 Setup Utility screen, press <3>. The following screen appears. IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [ Delete RAID Menu ] Array No Array Mode Drive No Size(MB) Status Array 0 Stripe 2 XXXXXX Functional Array 1 Mirror 2 XXXX Functional Array 2 ---- ---- ----- ----- Array 3 ---- ---- ----- ----- â â â â â : Capacity (GB) ⦠⦠⦠⦠⦠: Bootable Array [ â â â â â ] Up [ â â â â â ] Down [D] Delete [ESC] Exit 2. Use the up or down arrow keys to select a RAID array, then press <D> to delete. 3. Press <Esc> to exit.
5-36 5-36 5-36 5-36 5-36 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [ Rebuild RAID Menu ] Array No Array Mode Drive No Size(MB) Status Array 0 Stripe 4 XXXXXX Functional Array 1 Mirror 2 XXXX Functional Array 2 ---- ---- ----- ----- Array 3 ---- ---- ----- ----- â â â â â : Capacity (GB) ⦠⦠⦠⦠⦠: Bootable Array [ â â â â â ] Up [ â â â â â ] Down [Enter] Select [ESC] Exit Rebuilding a RAID array Rebuilding a RAID array Rebuilding a RAID array Rebuilding a RAID array Rebuilding a RAID array This option allows you to reconstruct an existing RAID array. This option applies only to RAID1 (Mirrored) or RAID 0 1(Striped Mirrored) sets. To rebuild a RAID array: 1. From the IT8212 Setup Utility screen, press <4>. The following screen appears. 2. Use the up or down arrow keys to select a RAID array, then press <Enter> to rebuild. The following screen appears. IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [ Source Drive ] [ Target Drive ] Channel ID Drive Name Size (MB) Pri/D1 XXXXXXXXXX XXXXX â â â â â : Capacity (GB) [ â â â â â ] Up [ â â â â â ] Down [Enter] Select [ESC] Exit [ Drive List] Channel ID Drive Name Size (MB) Sec/D1 XXXXXXXXXX XXXXX Channel ID Drive Name Size (MB) Pri/D1 XXXXXXXXXX XXXXX Sec/D1 XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-37 5-37 5-37 5-37 5-37 Channel 0 Interrupt: B I/P Port: 0000AC00 Channel 1 Interrupt: B I/P Port: 0000A800 IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [ RAID Card Configuration ] [ RAID Card Resource ] Auto-Rebuild: Enable â â â â â : Capacity (GB) Drive Mode: P = PIO, D = DMA, U = UDMA [ â â â â â , â â â â â ,Space] Change Option [ESC] Exit Channel Size Drive ID Drive Name (MB) Array No Mode Pri/D0 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Array 0 U5 Pri/D1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Array 0 U2 Sec/D0 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Array 0 U4 Sec/D1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Array 0 U6 [ Drive Status ] 3. Use the up or down arrow keys to select a drive, then press <Enter>. Follow succeeding screen instructions. 4. Press <Esc> to exit. Viewing your RAID configuration Viewing your RAID configuration Viewing your RAID configuration Viewing your RAID configuration Viewing your RAID configuration This option allows you to view your RAID configuration. You can also enable or disable the Auto-rebuild function in this section. To view your RAID configuration: 1. From the IT8212 Setup Utility screen, press <5>. The following screen appears. 2. Use the left or right keys or the space bar enable or disable the Auto-rebuild Auto-rebuild Auto-rebuild Auto-rebuild Auto-rebuild item. 3. Press <Esc> to exit.
5-38 5-38 5-38 5-38 5-38 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.5 Creating a RAID driver disk A floppy disk with the RAID driver is required when installing Windows ® 2000/XP operating system on a hard disk drive that is included in a RAID set. To create a RAID driver disk: 1. Place the motherboard support CD in the optical drive. 2. When the Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers menu appears, select the RAID driver disk you wish to create: ⢠Click Make ITE8212 Driver Disk Make ITE8212 Driver Disk Make ITE8212 Driver Disk Make ITE8212 Driver Disk Make ITE8212 Driver Disk t o create an ITE ® 8212F RAID driver disk. ⢠Click Make Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk t o create a Silicon Image SATARaid⢠RAID driver disk Or Or Or Or Or Browse the contents of the support CD to locate the driver disk utility: ⢠ITE8212 RAID Driver Disk ITE8212 RAID Driver Disk ITE8212 RAID Driver Disk ITE8212 RAID Driver Disk ITE8212 RAID Driver Disk : \Drivers\ITE8212\MakeDisk ⢠Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk : \Drivers\Sil3114\RAID_Disk ⢠Intel Intel Intel Intel Intel ® RAID Driver Disk RAID Driver Disk RAID Driver Disk RAID Driver Disk RAID Driver Disk : \Drivers\Chipset\Intel\IAA\F6 Install Floppy\F6flpy32 3. Insert a formatted high-density floppy disk to the floppy disk drive. 4. Follow screen instructions to complete the process. 5. After creating a RAID driver disk, eject the floppy disk, then write-protect it to prevent computer virus infection. To install the RAID driver: 1. Install an operating system to the selected hard disk drive. During installation, the computer prompts you to press the F6 F6 F6 F6 F 6 key if you are installing a third-party SCSI or RAID driver. 2. Press <F6>, then insert the RAID driver disk to the floppy disk drive. 3. Follow screen instructions to install the RAID drivers. Refer to section â5.2.2 Drivers menuâ for details.
ii ii ii ii ii E1672 E1672 E1672 E1672 E1672 First Edition First Edition First Edition First Edition First Edition June 2004 June 2004 June 2004 June 2004 June 2004 Copyright © 2004 ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. (âASUSâ). Product warranty or service will not be extended if: (1) the product is repaired, modified or altered, unless such repair , modification of alteration is authorized in writing by ASUS; or (2) the serial number of the product is defaced or missing. ASUS PROVIDES THIS MANUAL âAS ISâ WITHOUT W ARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANT ABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ASUS, ITS DIRECT ORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT , SPECIAL, INCIDENT AL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF USE OR DA T A, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS AND THE LIKE), EVEN IF ASUS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY DEFECT OR ERROR IN THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT . SPECIFICA TIONS AND INFORMA TION CONT AINED IN THIS MANUAL ARE FURNISHED FOR INFORMA TIONAL USE ONL Y , AND ARE SUBJECT T O CHANGE A T ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY ASUS. ASUS ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS OR INACCURACIES THA T MA Y APPEAR IN THIS MANUAL, INCLUDING THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE DESCRIBED IN IT . Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identification or explanation and to the ownersâ benefit, without intent to infringe.
iii iii iii iii iii Contents Notices ................................................................................................ vi Safety information ............................................................................. vii About this guide ............................................................................... viii Typography ......................................................................................... ix P5AD2 Deluxe specifications summary ................................................ x Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.1 Welcome! .............................................................................. 1-1 1.2 Package contents ................................................................. 1-1 1.3 Special features .................................................................... 1-2 1.3.1 Product highlights ................................................... 1-2 1.3.2 ASUS AI Proactive features .................................... 1-5 1.3.3 Innovative ASUS features ....................................... 1-6 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.1 Before you proceed .............................................................. 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview .......................................................... 2-2 2.2.1 Placement direction ................................................ 2-2 2.2.2 Screw holes ............................................................ 2-2 2.2.3 ASUS Stack Cool ..................................................... 2-3 2.2.4 Motherboard layout ................................................ 2-4 2.2.5 Layout contents ..................................................... 2-5 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) .............................................. 2-7 2.3.1 Installling the CPU ................................................... 2-7 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and fan ........................ 2-9 2.4 System memory ................................................................. 2-12 2.4.1 Overview ............................................................... 2-12 2.4.2 Memory configurations ......................................... 2-12 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM ................................................... 2-14 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM ................................................. 2-14 2.5 Expansion slots ................................................................... 2-15 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card .................................. 2-15 2.5.2 Configuring an expansion card .............................. 2-15 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments .......................................... 2-16 2.5.4 PCI slots ................................................................ 2-17 2.5.5 PCI Express x16 slot ............................................. 2-17 2.5.6 PCI Express x1 slot ............................................... 2-17 2.6 Jumpers .............................................................................. 2-18 2.7 Connectors ......................................................................... 2-20 2.7.1 Rear panel connectors .......................................... 2-20 2.7.2 Internal connectors ............................................... 2-22
iv iv iv iv iv Contents Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up 3.1 Starting up for the first time ................................................ 3-1 3.2 Powering off the computer .................................................. 3-2 3.2.1 Using the OS shut down function ........................... 3-2 3.2.2 Using the dual function power switch .................... 3-2 3.3 ASUS POST Reporter⢠.......................................................... 3-3 3.3.1 Vocal POST messages ............................................ 3-3 3.3.2 Winbond Voice Editor ............................................. 3-5 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ........................................ 4-1 4.1.1 Creating a bootable floppy disk .............................. 4-1 4.1.2 AFUDOS utility ........................................................ 4-2 4.1.3 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ................................ 4-5 4.1.4 ASUS EZ Flash utility .............................................. 4-7 4.1.5 ASUS Update utility ................................................ 4-8 4.2 BIOS setup program ........................................................... 4-11 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen ................................................. 4-12 4.2.2 Menu bar ............................................................... 4-12 4.2.3 Navigation keys .................................................... 4-12 4.2.4 Menu items ........................................................... 4-13 4.2.5 Sub-menu items ................................................... 4-13 4.2.6 Configuration fields .............................................. 4-13 4.2.7 Pop-up window ..................................................... 4-13 4.2.8 Scroll bar .............................................................. 4-13 4.2.9 General help .......................................................... 4-13 4.3 Main menu .......................................................................... 4-14 4.3.1 System Time ......................................................... 4-14 4.3.2 System Date ......................................................... 4-14 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A ................................................ 4-14 4.3.4 Language .............................................................. 4-14 4.3.5 Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave ......... 4-15 4.3.6 IDE Configuration .................................................. 4-16 4.3.7 System Information .............................................. 4-18 4.4 Advanced menu .................................................................. 4-19 4.4.1 JumperFree Configuration .................................... 4-19 4.4.2 LAN Cable Status ................................................. 4-22 4.4.3 USB Configuration ................................................. 4-23 4.4.4 CPU Configuration ................................................. 4-24 4.4.5 Chipset ................................................................. 4-25
v v v v v Contents 4.4.6 Onboard Devices Configuration ............................ 4-27 4.4.7 PCI PnP ................................................................. 4-29 4.4.8 Speech Configuration ........................................... 4-30 4.5 Power menu ........................................................................ 4-31 4.5.1 Suspend Mode ...................................................... 4-31 4.5.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume ................................ 4-31 4.5.3 ACPI 2.0 Support .................................................. 4-31 4.5.4 ACPI APIC Support ................................................ 4-31 4.5.5 APM Configuration ................................................ 4-32 4.5.6 Hardware Monitor ................................................. 4-34 4.6 Boot menu .......................................................................... 4-36 4.6.1 Boot Device Priority .............................................. 4-36 4.6.2 Boot Settings Configuration ................................. 4-37 4.6.3 Security ................................................................ 4-38 4.7 Exit menu ........................................................................... 4-41 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.1 Installing an operating system ............................................. 5-1 5.2 Support CD information ........................................................ 5-1 5.2.1 Running the support CD ......................................... 5-1 5.2.2 Drivers menu .......................................................... 5-2 5.2.3 Utilities menu .......................................................... 5-3 5.2.4 Manuals menu ......................................................... 5-5 5.2.5 Contact information ............................................... 5-5 5.2.6 Other information ................................................... 5-6 5.3 Software information ........................................................... 5-8 5.3.1 ASUS MyLogo2⢠.................................................... 5-8 5.3.2 AI NET2 ................................................................ 5-10 5.3.3 C-Media 3D audio configuration ........................... 5-11 5.4 RAID configurations ............................................................ 5-16 5.4.1 Installing hard disks .............................................. 5-17 5.4.2 Silicon Image RAID configurations ........................ 5-18 5.4.3 Intel ® RAID configurations .................................... 5-28 5.4.4 ITE ® 8212F RAID configurations ........................... 5-32 5.5 Creating a RAID driver disk ................................................. 5-38
vi vi vi vi vi Notices Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference, and ⢠This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with manufacturerâs instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. ⢠Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. ICES-003. ICES-003. ICES-003. ICES-003. The use of shielded cables for connection of the monitor to the graphics card is required to assure compliance with FCC regulations. Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the userâs authority to operate this equipment.
vii vii vii vii vii Safety information Electrical safety Electrical safety Electrical safety Electrical safety Electrical safety ⢠To prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet before relocating the system. ⢠When adding or removing devices to or from the system, ensure that the power cables for the devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power cables from the existing system before you add a device. ⢠Before connecting or removing signal cables from the motherboard, ensure that all power cables are unplugged. ⢠Seek professional assistance before using an adpater or extension cord. These devices could interrupt the grounding circuit. ⢠Make sure that your power supply is set to the correct voltage in your area. If you are not sure about the voltage of the electrical outlet you are using, contact your local power company. ⢠If the power supply is broken, do not try to fix it by yourself. Contact a qualified service technician or your retailer. Operation safety Operation safety Operation safety Operation safety Operation safety ⢠Before installing the motherboard and adding devices on it, carefully read all the manuals that came with the package. ⢠Before using the product, make sure all cables are correctly connected and the power cables are not damaged. If you detect any damage, contact your dealer immediately. ⢠To avoid short circuits, keep paper clips, screws, and staples away from connectors, slots, sockets and circuitry. ⢠Avoid dust, humidity, and temperature extremes. Do not place the product in any area where it may become wet. ⢠Place the product on a stable surface. ⢠If you encounter technical problems with the product, contact a qualified service technician or your retailer.
viii viii viii viii viii About this guide This user guide contains the information you need when installing and configuring the motherboard. How this guide is organized How this guide is organized How this guide is organized How this guide is organized How this guide is organized This manual contains the following parts: ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction This chapter describes the features of the motherboard and the new technology it supports. ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the switches, jumpers, and connectors on the motherboard. ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence, the vocal POST messages, and ways of shutting down the system. ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided. ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support This chapter describes the contents of the support CD that comes with the motherboard package. Where to find more information Where to find more information Where to find more information Where to find more information Where to find more information Refer to the following sources for additional information and for product and software updates. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. ASUS websites ASUS websites ASUS websites ASUS websites ASUS websites The ASUS website provides updated information on ASUS hardware and software products. Refer to the ASUS contact information. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. Optional documentation Optional documentation Optional documentation Optional documentation Optional documentation Your product package may include optional documentation, such as warranty flyers, that may have been added by your dealer. These documents are not part of the standard package.
ix ix ix ix ix Conventions used in this guide Conventions used in this guide Conventions used in this guide Conventions used in this guide Conventions used in this guide To make sure that you perform certain tasks properly, take note of the following symbols used throughout this manual. Typography Bold text Bold text Bold text Bold text Bold text Indicates a menu or an item to select. Italics Used to emphasize a word or a phrase. <Key> Keys enclosed in the less-than and greater-than sign means that you must press the enclosed key. Example: <Enter> means that you must press the Enter or Return key. <Key1 Key2 Key3> If you must press two or more keys simultaneously, the key names are linked with a plus sign ( ). Example: <Ctrl Alt D> Command Means that you must type the command exactly as shown, then supply the required item or value enclosed in brackets. Example: At the DOS prompt, type the command line: afudos /i[filename] afudos /iP5GD2.ROM DANGER/WARNING: DANGER/WARNING: DANGER/WARNING: DANGER/WARNING: DANGER/WARNING: Information to prevent injury to yourself when trying to complete a task. CAUTION: CAUTION: CAUTION: CAUTION: CAUTION: Information to prevent damage to the components when trying to complete a task. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: Tips and additional information to help you complete a task. IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: Instructions that you MUST follow to complete a task.
x x x x x P5AD2 Deluxe specifications summary (continued on the next page) CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Memory Memory Memory Memory Memory Expansion slots Expansion slots Expansion slots Expansion slots Expansion slots Storage Storage Storage Storage Storage Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN (optional) (optional) (optional) (optional) (optional) High Definition High Definition High Definition High Definition High Definition Audio Audio Audio Audio Audio LAN LAN LAN LAN LAN USB USB USB USB USB IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 LGA775 socket for Intel ® Pentium ® 4/Celeron processor Compatible with Intel ® PCG 04A and 04B processors Supports Intel ® Hyper-Threading Technology Northbridge: Intel ® 925X Memory Controller Hub (MCH) Southbridge: Intel ® ICH6R 800/533 MHz Dual-channel memory architecture 4 x 240-pin DIMM sockets support unbufferred non-ECC 533/400 MHz DDR2 memory modules Up to 4 GB system memory Native DDR2-600 support 1 x PCI Express x16 slot 2 x PCI Express x1 slots 3 x PCI slots Intel ® ICH6R South Bridge supports: - 1 x Ultra DMA 100/66/33 - 4 x Serial ATA with RAID 0, RAID 1 configuration and Intel ® Matrix Storage Technology Silicon Image 3114R RAID controller supports: - 4 x Serial ATA with RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10, JBOD and RAID 5 (software patch, no WHQL) configuration ITE 8212F IDE RAID controller supports: - 2 x Ultra DMA 133/100/66 IDE - RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1, and JBOD configuration WiFi-g⢠wireless solution provides: - support for IEEE 802.11g/b standards - up to 54Mbps wireless data transmission - Software Access Point (Soft AP) feature on Windows ® XP/2003 Server OS Intel ® High Definition Audio (HD Audio) C-Media CMI9880 7.1-channel audio CODEC Dolby ® Digital Live⢠technology support Coaxial and optical S/PDIF out ports Marvell ® 88E8053 PCI Express⢠Gigabit LAN controlle r Supports Marvell ® Virtual Cable Tester technology Supports POST Network-diagnostic program Supports up to 8 USB 2.0 ports 2 x IEEE 1394a ports
xi xi xi xi xi ASUS AI Overclocking ASUS NOS (Non-delay Overclocking System) ASUS C.P.R. (CPU Parameter Recall) Adjustable CPU, memory, and PCI Express voltages Stepless Frequency Selection (SFS) from 100MHz up to 400 MHz at 1 MHz increment Adjustable FSB/DDR2 frequencies with fixed PCI/PCI-E frequencies ASUS Post Reporter⢠ASUS Q-Fan2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS MyLogo2 ASUS Stack Cool⢠technology 8 MB Flash ROM, AMI BIOS, PnP, DMI2.0, SM BIOS 2.3, WfM2.0 1 x Parallel port 1 x IEEE 1394a port 1 x LAN (RJ-45) port 1 x Wireless LAN antenna port (Wireless edition only) 1 x Wireless LAN LED (Wireless edition only) 4 x USB 2.0 ports 1 x Optical S/PDIF Out port 1 x Coaxial S/PDIF Out port 1 x PS/2 keyboard port (purple) 1 x PS/2 mouse port (green) 8-channel audio ports 1 x Floppy disk drive connector 1 x Primary IDE connector 2 x IDE RAID connectors 8 x Serial ATA RAID connectors 1 x Optical drive audio connector 1 x Front panel audio connector 2 x USB connectors 1 x IEEE 1394a port connectors 1 x GAME/MIDI port connector 1 x Serial port connector Chassis intrusion connector CPU, chassis (x2), and power fan connectors ATX power connectors (24-pin and 4-pin) System panel connector ATX power supply (with 24-pin and 4-pin 12 V plugs) ATX 12V 2.0 compliant P5AD2 Deluxe specifications summary (continued on the next page) Overclocking Overclocking Overclocking Overclocking Overclocking features features features features features Special features Special features Special features Special features Special features BIOS features BIOS features BIOS features BIOS features BIOS features Rear panel Rear panel Rear panel Rear panel Rear panel Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal connectors connectors connectors connectors connectors Power Power Power Power Power Requirement Requirement Requirement Requirement Requirement
xii xii xii xii xii P5AD2 Deluxe specifications summary Form Factor Form Factor Form Factor Form Factor Form Factor Support CD Support CD Support CD Support CD Support CD contents contents contents contents contents ATX form factor: 12 in x 9.6 in (30.5 cm x 24.4 cm) Device drivers ASUS PC Probe ASUS Live Update Utility ASUS WiFi-g⢠One-Touch Wizard Anti-virus software *Specifications are subject to change without notice.
1 Product introduction This chapter describes the motherboard features and the new technologies it supports.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe Chapter summary 1 1.1 Welcome! .............................................................................. 1-1 1.2 Package contents ................................................................. 1-1 1.3 Special features .................................................................... 1-2
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-1 1.1 Welcome! Thank you for buying an ASUS Thank you for buying an ASUS Thank you for buying an ASUS Thank you for buying an ASUS Thank you for buying an ASUS ® ® ® ® ® P5AD2 Deluxe motherboard! P5AD2 Deluxe motherboard! P5AD2 Deluxe motherboard! P5AD2 Deluxe motherboard! P5AD2 Deluxe motherboard! The motherboard delivers a host of new features and latest technologies, making it another standout in the long line of ASUS quality motherboards! Before you start installing the motherboard, and hardware devices on it, check the items in your package with the list below. 1.2 Package contents Check your motherboard package for the following items. Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe motherboard I/O modules I/O modules I/O modules I/O modules I/O modules Serial port module USB 2.0 (2 ports) and GAME (1 port) module Cables Cables Cables Cables Cables 6 x Serial ATA signal cables 3 x Serial ATA power cables (dual plugs) 2 x Ultra DMA/133 cables 80-conductor IDE cable Floppy disk drive cable Accessories Accessories Accessories Accessories Accessories Dipolar wireless LAN antenna (Wireless Edition only) I/O shield Application CDs Application CDs Application CDs Application CDs Application CDs ASUS motherboard support CD InterVideo ® WinDVD Suite ® Platinum (Retail version only) Documentation Documentation Documentation Documentation Documentation User guide If any of the above items is damaged or missing, contact your retailer.
1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.3 Special features 1.3.1 1.3.1 1.3.1 1.3.1 1.3.1 Product highlights Product highlights Product highlights Product highlights Product highlights Latest processor technology Latest processor technology Latest processor technology Latest processor technology Latest processor technology The motherboard comes with a 775-pin surface mount Land Grid Array (LGA) socket designed for the Intel ® Pentium ® 4 processor in the 775-land package. The motherboard supports the Intel ® Pentium ® 4 processor with 800/533 MHz Front Side Bus (FSB). The motherboard also supports the Intel ® Hyper-Threading Technology and is fully compatible with Intel ® 04B and 04A processors. See page 2-7 for details. Intel Intel Intel Intel Intel ® 925X chipset 925X chipset 925X chipset 925X chipset 925X chipset The Intel ® 925X Memory Controller Hub (MCH) and the ICH6R I/O controller hub provide the vital interfaces for the motherboard. The MCH supports the Intel ® Performance Accelerating Technology (PAT) that boosts system performance. The MCH also provides the processor, dual-channel memory, and PCI Express interfaces. The Intel ® ICH6R Southbridge represents the sixth generation I/O controller hub that provides the interface for the PCI Express and 8-channel high definition audio. DDR2 memory support DDR2 memory support DDR2 memory support DDR2 memory support DDR2 memory support The motherboard supports DDR2 memory which features data transfer rates of 533/400 MHz to meet the higher bandwidth requirements of the latest 3D graphics, multimedia, and Internet applications. The dual-channel DDR2 architecture doubles the bandwidth of your system memory to boost system performance, eliminating bottlenecks with peak bandwidths of up to 8.5 GB/s. Serial ATA technology Serial ATA technology Serial ATA technology Serial ATA technology Serial ATA technology The motherboard supports the Serial ATA technology through the Serial ATA interfaces and the Intel ® ICH6R. The SATA specification allows for thinner, more flexible cables with lower pin count, reduced voltage requirement, and up to 150 MB/s data transfer rate. See page 2-24 and 2-25 for details.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 1-3 1-3 1-3 1-3 1-3 Triple RAID solution Triple RAID solution Triple RAID solution Triple RAID solution Triple RAID solution Onboard RAID controllers provide the motherboard with multi-RAID functionality that allows you to select the best RAID solution using IDE or Serial ATA devices. The Intel ® ICH6R allows RAID 0 and RAID 1 configuration for four SATA connectors and supports the Intel ® Matrix Storage Technology. See page 2-24 for details. The Sil3114R controller supports four additional SATA connectors and allows RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10, JBOD, and a software patch to support RAID 5. See page 2-25 for details. If you are using IDE hard disk drives, the ITE8212 controller provides RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1, and JBOD functionality for two IDE channels that supports for up to four IDE hard disk drives. See page 2-23 for details. PCI Express⢠interface PCI Express⢠interface PCI Express⢠interface PCI Express⢠interface PCI Express⢠interface The motherboard fully supports PCI Express, the latest I/O interconnect technology that speeds up the PCI bus. PCI Express features point-to-point serial interconnections between devices and allows higher clockspeeds by carrying data in packets. This high speed interface is software compatible with existing PCI specifications. See page 2-17 for details. 8-channel high definition audio 8-channel high definition audio 8-channel high definition audio 8-channel high definition audio 8-channel high definition audio Onboard is the C-Media CMI9880 7.1-channel audio CODEC. This CODEC is fully-compliant with Intel ® High Definition Audio standard (192 KHz, 24-bit audio). With the CODEC, 8-channel audio ports, and S/PDIF interfaces, you can connect your computer to home theater decoders to produce crystal-clear digital audio. The CMI9880 CODEC comes with a software application that features jack detection to monitor the plugging status of each jack, impedance sensing to determine audio device classes, and pre-defined equalization for various audio devices. See page 2-21, 2-22, and 5-11 for details. Dolby Dolby Dolby Dolby Dolby ® Digital Live Digital Live Digital Live Digital Live Digital Live ⢠The CMI9880 audio CODEC comes with an AC-3 encoder capable of transforming your computerâs digital audio contents into real-time Dolby ® Digital stream. This digital stream passes through the S/PDIF out interfaces to an AC-3 decoder for 7.1-channel playback. See page 5-15 for details.
1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction S/PDIF digital sound ready S/PDIF digital sound ready S/PDIF digital sound ready S/PDIF digital sound ready S/PDIF digital sound ready The motherboard supports the S/PDIF In/Out function through the S/PDIF interfaces on the rear panel and at midboard. The S/PDIF technology turns your computer into a high-end entertainment system with digital connectivity to powerful audio and speaker systems. See page 2-21 for details. IEEE 1394a support IEEE 1394a support IEEE 1394a support IEEE 1394a support IEEE 1394a support The motherboard supports the IEEE 1394 interface that provides high-speed and flexible PC connectivity to a wide range of peripherals and devices compliant to IEEE 1394 standards. The IEEE 1394 interface allows up to 400Mbps transfer rates through simple, low-cost, high-bandwidth asynchronous (real-time) data interfacing between computers, peripherals, and consumer electronic devices such as camcorders, VCRs, printers,TVs, and digital cameras. See page 2-20 and 2-28 for details. USB 2.0 technology USB 2.0 technology USB 2.0 technology USB 2.0 technology USB 2.0 technology The motherboard implements the Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0 specification, dramatically increasing the connection speed from the 12 Mbps bandwidth on USB 1.1 to a fast 480 Mbps on USB 2.0. USB 2.0 is backward compatible with USB 1.1. See page 2-21 and 2-27 for details. Gigabit and wireless LAN solutions Gigabit and wireless LAN solutions Gigabit and wireless LAN solutions Gigabit and wireless LAN solutions Gigabit and wireless LAN solutions The motherboard comes with an onboard Gigabit and wireless LAN controllers to provide a total solution for your networking needs. The Gigabit LAN controller uses the PCI Express segment to provide faster data bandwidth. The onboard wireless LAN controller supports up to 54 Mbps data transmission for your wireless Internet, LAN, and file sharing requirements. See page 2-20 and 2-21 for details. Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring The CPU temperature is monitored by the ASIC (integrated in the Winbond Super I/O) to prevent overheating and damage. The system fan rotations per minute (RPM) is monitored for timely failure detection. The ASIC monitors the voltage levels to ensure stable supply of current for critical components. See page 4-34 for details.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-5 1.3.2 1.3.2 1.3.2 1.3.2 1.3.2 ASUS AI Proactive features ASUS AI Proactive features ASUS AI Proactive features ASUS AI Proactive features ASUS AI Proactive features ASUS Stack Cool⢠ASUS Stack Cool⢠ASUS Stack Cool⢠ASUS Stack Cool⢠ASUS Stack Cool⢠ASUS Stack Cool⢠is an ideal thermal solution that reduces the heat dissipated by large capacitors and motherboard components. By placing a specially designed PCB under the motherboard CPU socket, Stack Cool⢠effectively lowers the system temperature by 10º Celsius. Cooler system temperature means more stable system performance, longer component life, and more silent operation. See page 2-3 for details. ASUS WiFi-g⢠ASUS WiFi-g⢠ASUS WiFi-g⢠ASUS WiFi-g⢠ASUS WiFi-g⢠(Wireless Edition only) ASUS WiFi-g⢠is an IEEE 802.11g-compliant wireless LAN adapter that allows data transmission of up to 54 Mbps using the 2.4 GHz frequency band. ASUS provides full software application support and a user-friendly wizard to help you set up your wireless local area network effortlessly. The ASUS WiFi-g⢠is backward compatible with IEEE 802.11b devices. See page 2-21 and the WiFi-g⢠user guide for details. AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) ASUS Non-delay Overclocking System⢠(NOS) is a technology that auto-detects the CPU loading and dynamically overclocks the CPU speed only when needed. See page 4-22 for details. AI NET2 AI NET2 AI NET2 AI NET2 AI NET2 AI NET2 is a BIOS-based diagnostic tool that detects and reports Ethernet cable faults and shorts. With this utility, you can easily monitor the condition of the Ethernet cable connected to the LAN (RJ-45) port. During the bootup process, AI NET2 immediately diagnoses the LAN cable and reports shorts and faults up to 100 meters at 1 meter accuracy. See page 4-22 and 5-10 for details.
1-6 1-6 1-6 1-6 1-6 Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.3.3 1.3.3 1.3.3 1.3.3 1.3.3 Innovative ASUS features Innovative ASUS features Innovative ASUS features Innovative ASUS features Innovative ASUS features ASUS Hyper Path 2 technology ASUS Hyper Path 2 technology ASUS Hyper Path 2 technology ASUS Hyper Path 2 technology ASUS Hyper Path 2 technology The ASUS Hyper Path 2 technology optimizes the full potential of the Intel ® chipset by shortening the latency time between the CPU and the system memory. Enabling Hyper Path 2 on systems with the Intel ® PAT improves memory performance without affecting system stability. See page 4-25 for details. See page 4-25 for details. Native DDR2-600 support Native DDR2-600 support Native DDR2-600 support Native DDR2-600 support Native DDR2-600 support This motherboard offers native DDR2-600 memory support to ensure superior system performance. With current processors supporting 800 MHz FSB, DDR2-600 provides the fastest solution for eliminating system bottlenecks when running system-intensive applications. See page 2-12, 2-13 and 4-20 for details. CrashFree BIOS 2 CrashFree BIOS 2 CrashFree BIOS 2 CrashFree BIOS 2 CrashFree BIOS 2 This feature allows you to restore the original BIOS data from the support CD in case when the BIOS codes and data are corrupted. This protection eliminates the need to buy a replacement ROM chip. See page 4-5 for details. ASUS Q-Fan 2 technology ASUS Q-Fan 2 technology ASUS Q-Fan 2 technology ASUS Q-Fan 2 technology ASUS Q-Fan 2 technology The ASUS Q-Fan 2 technology smartly adjusts the fan speeds according to the system loading to ensure quiet, cool, and efficient operation. |See page 4-34 for details. ASUS POST Reporter⢠ASUS POST Reporter⢠ASUS POST Reporter⢠ASUS POST Reporter⢠ASUS POST Reporter⢠The motherboard offers a new exciting feature called the ASUS POST Reporter⢠to provide friendly voice messages and alerts during the Power-On Self-Tests (POST) informing you of the system boot status and causes of boot errors, if any. The bundled Winbond Voice Editor software lets you to customize the voice messages in different languages. |See page 3-3 for details. ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS Multi-language BIOS The multi-language BIOS allows you to select the language of your choice from the available options. The localized BIOS menus allow easier and faster configuration. See page 4-14 for details. ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠This new feature present in the motherboard allows you to personalize and add style to your system with customizable boot logos. See page 5-8 for details.
2 Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the jumpers and connectors on the motherboard.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe Chapter summary 2 2.1 Before you proceed .............................................................. 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview .......................................................... 2-2 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) .............................................. 2-7 2.4 System memory ................................................................. 2-12 2.5 Expansion slots ................................................................... 2-15 2.6 Jumpers .............................................................................. 2-18 2.7 Connectors ......................................................................... 2-20
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-1 Onboard LED Onboard LED Onboard LED Onboard LED Onboard LED The motherboard comes with a standby power LED. The green LED lights up to indicate that the system is ON, in sleep mode, or in soft-off mode. This is a reminder that you should shut down the system and unplug the power cable before removing or plugging in any motherboard component. The illustration below shows the location of the onboard LED. 2.1 Before you proceed Take note of the following precautions before you install motherboard components or change any motherboard settings. ⢠Unplug the power cord from the wall socket before touching any component. ⢠Use a grounded wrist strap or touch a safely grounded object or to a metal object, such as the power supply case, before handling components to avoid damaging them due to static electricity. ⢠Hold components by the edges to avoid touching the ICs on them. ⢠Whenever you uninstall any component, place it on a grounded antistatic pad or in the bag that came with the component. ⢠Before you install or remove any component, ensure Before you install or remove any component, ensure Before you install or remove any component, ensure Before you install or remove any component, ensure Before you install or remove any component, ensure that the ATX power supply is switched off or the that the ATX power supply is switched off or the that the ATX power supply is switched off or the that the ATX power supply is switched off or the that the ATX power supply is switched off or the power cord is detached from the power supply. power cord is detached from the power supply. power cord is detached from the power supply. power cord is detached from the power supply. power cord is detached from the power supply. Failure to do so may cause severe damage to the motherboard, peripherals, and/or components. P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe Onboard LED SB_PWR1 ON Standby Power OFF Powered Off
2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information P5AD2 ® 2.2 Motherboard overview Before you install the motherboard, study the configuration of your chassis to ensure that the motherboard fits into it. Make sure to unplug the chassis power cord before installing or removing the motherboard. Failure to do so can cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components. Do not overtighten the screws! Doing so can damage the motherboard. 2.2.1 2.2.1 2.2.1 2.2.1 2.2.1 Placement direction Placement direction Placement direction Placement direction Placement direction When installing the motherboard, make sure that you place it into the chassis in the correct orientation. The edge with external ports goes to the rear part of the chassis as indicated in the image below. 2.2.2 2.2.2 2.2.2 2.2.2 2.2.2 Screw holes Screw holes Screw holes Screw holes Screw holes Place nine (9) screws into the holes indicated by circles to secure the motherboard to the chassis. Place this side towards Place this side towards Place this side towards Place this side towards Place this side towards the rear of the chassis the rear of the chassis the rear of the chassis the rear of the chassis the rear of the chassis
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2.2.3 2.2.3 2.2.3 2.2.3 2.2.3 ASUS Stack Cool ASUS Stack Cool ASUS Stack Cool ASUS Stack Cool ASUS Stack Cool The motherboard comes with the ASUS Stack Cool, an innovative thermal solution that provides supplementary cooling to the motherboard. Stack Cool is a mini-PCB installed underneath the motherboard CPU socket to conduct heat away from motherboard components. Stack Cool effectively lowers the motherboard temperature by as much as 10ºC. Motherboard holes Motherboard holes Motherboard holes Motherboard holes Motherboard holes (for the CPU fan and (for the CPU fan and (for the CPU fan and (for the CPU fan and (for the CPU fan and heatsink assembly pins) heatsink assembly pins) heatsink assembly pins) heatsink assembly pins) heatsink assembly pins)
2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.2.4 2.2.4 2.2.4 2.2.4 2.2.4 Motherboard layout Motherboard layout Motherboard layout Motherboard layout Motherboard layout P5AD2 ® CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power CD Super I/O 8 Mbit FWH A TX12V1 FLOPPY1 AAFP DDR2 DIMM_A1 (64 bit,240-pin module) KBPWR1 SB_PWR1 USBPW34 USBPW12 24.5cm (9.6in) 30.5cm (12.0in) Bottom:Mic In Center:Line Out T op:Line In 1394 T op: USB1 USB2 Bottom: P ANEL1 CHASSIS1 GAME1 USB78 USB56 USBPW56 USBPW78 COM1 SEC_RAID1 PRI_RAID1 CLRTC1 S ATA 1 CHA_F AN1 SA T A_RAID1 SAT A_RAID2 SAT A_RAID3 PCIEX1_1 PCIEX1_2 PCI1 IE1394_2 Intel 925X Intel ICH6R P ARALLEL PORT MS1 KB1 SPDIF_O SPDIF_O2 DDR2 DIMM_A2 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B2 (64 bit,240-pin module) PWR_F AN1 CPU_F AN1 PRI_IDE1 Speech Controller TSB43AB22A ITE 8212F Marvell 88W8310 C-Media CMI9880 Marvell 88W8000G Silicon Image SiL 31 14R WL_LED WL_ANT EA TXPWR S ATA 3 S ATA 2 S ATA 4 PCIEX16 PCI2 PCI3 SA T A_RAID4 Marvell 88E8053 USB2.0 T : USB3 B: USB4 T op: LAN port R R LGA775 CHA_F AN2 Below: Center/Subwoofer Center: Side Speaker Out T op: Rear Speaker Out
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-5 2.2.5 2.2.5 2.2.5 2.2.5 2.2.5 Layout contents Layout contents Layout contents Layout contents Layout contents Slots Slots Slots Slots Slots Page Page Page Page Page 1. DDR2 DIMM slots 2-12 2. PCI slots 2-17 3. PCI Express slot 2-17 Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers Page Page Page Page Page 1. Clear RTC RAM (3-pin CLRTC1) 2-18 2. USB Device wake-up (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34, 2-19 USBPW56, USBPW78) 3. Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) 2-19 Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Page Page Page Page Page 1. Parallel port 2-20 2. IEEE 1394a port 2-20 3. LAN (RJ-45) port 2-20 4. Rear Speaker Out port (gray) 2-20 5. Side Speaker Out port (black) 2-20 6. Line In port (light blue) 2-20 7. Line Out port (lime) 2-20 8. Wireless LAN antenna port (Wireless Edition only) 2-21 9. Wireless LAN LED (Wireless Edition only) 2-21 10. Microphone port (pink) 2-21 11. Center/Subwoofer port (yellow orange) 2-21 12. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4 2-21 13. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2 2-21 14. Optical S/PDIF Out port 2-21 15. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port 2-21 16. PS/2 keyboard port (purple) 2-21 17. PS/2 mouse port (green) 2-21
2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Page Page Page Page Page 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) 2-22 2. Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1) 2-22 3. IDE RAID connectors (40-1 pin PRI_RAID1 [blue], 2-23 SEC_RAID1 [black]) 4. Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) 2-24 5. Serial ATA RAID connectors (7-pin SATA_RAID1, SATA_RAID2, 2-25 SATA_RAID3, SATA_RAID4) 6. Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) 2-26 7. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS1) 2-26 8. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) 2-27 9. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) 2-27 10. IEEE 1394a port connector (10-1 pin IE1394 _2) 2-28 11. GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME1) 2-28 12. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) 2-29 13. CPU, Chassis, and Power Fan connectors (3-pin CPU_FAN1, PWR_FAN1, CHA_FAN1, CHA_FAN2) 2-29 14. ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR1, 4-pin ATX12V1) 2-30 15. System panel connector (20-pin PANEL1) 2-31 System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) System warnsing speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) ATX power button/soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET)
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-7 2-7 2-7 2-7 2-7 2.3.1 2.3.1 2.3.1 2.3.1 2.3.1 Installing the CPU Installing the CPU Installing the CPU Installing the CPU Installing the CPU To install a CPU: 1. Locate the CPU socket on the motherboard. 2. Press the load lever with your thumb (a), then move it to the left (b) until it is released from the retention tab. 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) The motherboard comes with a surface mount LGA775 socket designed for the Intel ® Pentium ® 4 processor in the 775-land package Before installing the CPU, make sure that the cam box is facing towards you and the load lever is on your left. Retention tab Retention tab Retention tab Retention tab Retention tab Load lever Load lever Load lever Load lever Load lever This side of the cam This side of the cam This side of the cam This side of the cam This side of the cam box should face you. box should face you. box should face you. box should face you. box should face you. Cap Cap Cap Cap Cap A B ⢠Upon purchase of the motherboard, make sure that the LGA775 socket has its cap on and the socket contacts are not bent. If the cap is damaged or missing, or if the socket contacts are bent, contact your retailer immediately. ⢠Keep the cap after installing the motherboard. ASUS will process Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) requests only if the motherboard comes with the cap on the LGA775 socket. P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe Socket 775
2-8 2-8 2-8 2-8 2-8 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 3. Lift the load lever in the direction of the arrow to a 135º angle. 4. Lift the load plate with your thumb and forefinger to a 100º angle (A), then push the PnP cap from the load plate window to remove (B). To prevent damage to the socket pins, do not remove the PnP cap unless you are installing a CPU. 5. Position the CPU over the socket, making sure that the gold triangle is on the bottom- left corner of the socket. The socket alignment key should fit into the CPU notch. Alignment key Alignment key Alignment key Alignment key Alignment key Gold triangle mark Gold triangle mark Gold triangle mark Gold triangle mark Gold triangle mark The CPU fits in only one correct orientation. DO NOT force the CPU into the socket to prevent bending the connectors on the socket and damaging the CPU! 6. Close the load plate (A), then push the load lever (B) until it snaps into the retention tab. Load plate Load plate Load plate Load plate Load plate A B A B
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-9 2-9 2-9 2-9 2-9 2.3.2 2.3.2 2.3.2 2.3.2 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and fan Installing the CPU heatsink and fan Installing the CPU heatsink and fan Installing the CPU heatsink and fan Installing the CPU heatsink and fan The Intel ® Pentium ® 4 LGA775 processor requires a specially designed heatsink and fan assembly to ensure optimum thermal condition and performance. ⢠Install the motherboard to the chassis before installing the CPU fan and heatsink assembly ⢠When you purchased a boxed Intel ® Pentium ® 4 processor, the package includes the CPU fan and heatsink assembly. If you purchased a CPU separately, make sure that you use only Intel ® -certified multi-directional heatsink and fan. ⢠Your boxed Intel ® Pentium ® 4 LGA775 processor package should come with installation instructions for the CPU, heatsink, and the retention mechanism. If the instructions in this section do not match the CPU documentation, follow the latter. ⢠Your Intel ® Pentium ® 4 LGA775 heatsink and fan assembly comes in a push-pin design and requires no tool to install. Notes on Intel Notes on Intel Notes on Intel Notes on Intel Notes on Intel ® Hyper-Threading Technology Hyper-Threading Technology Hyper-Threading Technology Hyper-Threading Technology Hyper-Threading Technology ⢠This motherboard supports Intel ® Pentium ® 4 CPUs in the 775-land package with Hyper-Threading Technology. ⢠Hyper-Threading Technology is supported under Windows ® XP/2003 Server and Linux 2.4.x (kernel) and later versions only. Under Linux, use the Hyper-Threading compiler to compile the code. If you are using any other operating systems, disable the Hyper-Threading Techonology item in the BIOS to ensure system stability and performance. ⢠Installing Windows ® XP Service Pack 1 or later version is recommended. ⢠Make sure to enable the Hyper-Threading Technology item in BIOS before installing a supported operating system. ⢠For more information on Hyper-Threading Technology, visit www.intel.com/info/hyperthreading. To use the Hyper-Threading Technology on this motherboard: 1. Install an Intel ® Pentium ® 4 CPU that supports Hyper-Threading Technology. 2. Power up the system and enter the BIOS Setup (see Chapter 4). Under the Advanced Menu, make sure that the item Hyper-Threading Technology is set to Enabled. The item appears only if you installed a CPU that supports Hyper-Threading Techonology. 3. Reboot the computer.
2-10 2-10 2-10 2-10 2-10 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2. Push each of the pins downward to secure the heatsink and fan assembly in place. 3. Rotate the push-pins clockwise to lock. Follow these steps to install the CPU heatsink and fan. 1. Place the heatsink on top of the installed CPU, making sure that the four pins match the holes on the motherboard. Push pin Push pin Push pin Push pin Push pin Motherboard hole Motherboard hole Motherboard hole Motherboard hole Motherboard hole
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-11 2-11 2-11 2-11 2-11 4. When the fan and heatsink assembly is in place, connect the CPU fan cable to the connector on the motherboard labeled CPU_FAN1. Do not forget to connect the CPU fan connector! Hardware monitoring errors can occur if you fail to plug this connector. P5AD2 P5AD2 Deluxe Fan connectors CPU_F AN1 GND CPU F AN PWR CPU F AN IN CPU F AN PWM
2-12 2-12 2-12 2-12 2-12 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.4 System memory 2.4.1 2.4.1 2.4.1 2.4.1 2.4.1 Overview Overview Overview Overview Overview The motherboard comes with four Double Data Rate 2 (DDR2) Dual Inline Memory Modules (DIMM) sockets. A DDR2 module has the same physical dimensions as a DDR DIMM but has a 240-pin footprint compared to the 184-pin DDR DIMM. DDR2 DIMMs are notched differently to prevent installation on a DDR DIMM socket. The figure illustrates the location of the DDR2 DIMM sockets: 2.4.2 2.4.2 2.4.2 2.4.2 2.4.2 Memory configurations Memory configurations Memory configurations Memory configurations Memory configurations You may install 256 MB, 512 MB and 1 GB unbuffered non-ECC DDR2 DIMMs into the DIMM sockets. ⢠For dual-channel configuration, the total size of memory module(s) installed per channel must be the same (DIMM_A1 DIMM_B1 = DIMM_A2 DIMM_B2). ⢠Always install DIMMs with the same CAS latency. For optimum compatibility, it is recommended that you obtain memory modules from the same vendor. Refer to the DDR2 Qualified Vendors List on the next page for details. ⢠Due to chipset resource allocation, the system may detect less than 4 GB system memory when you installed four 1 GB DDR2 memory modules. ⢠This motherboard does not support memory modules made up of 128 Mb chips or double sided x16 memory modules. P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe DDR2 DIMM sockets DIMM_A1 DIMM_A2 DIMM_B1 DIMM_B2 128 pins 1 12 pins Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Sockets Sockets Sockets Sockets Sockets Color Color Color Color Color Channel A Channel A Channel A Channel A Channel A DIMM_A1 and DIMM_B1 DIMM_A1 and DIMM_B1 DIMM_A1 and DIMM_B1 DIMM_A1 and DIMM_B1 DIMM_A1 and DIMM_B1 Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Channel B Channel B Channel B Channel B Channel B DIMM_A2 and DIMM_B2 DIMM_A2 and DIMM_B2 DIMM_A2 and DIMM_B2 DIMM_A2 and DIMM_B2 DIMM_A2 and DIMM_B2 Black Black Black Black Black
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-13 2-13 2-13 2-13 2-13 DDR2 (533 MHz) Qualified Vendors List DDR2 (533 MHz) Qualified Vendors List DDR2 (533 MHz) Qualified Vendors List DDR2 (533 MHz) Qualified Vendors List DDR2 (533 MHz) Qualified Vendors List 512 MB SAMSUNG M378T6553BG0-CD5 SS K4T51083QB-GCD5 â ⢠⢠1024 MB SAMSUNG M378T2953BG0-CD5 DS K4T51083QB-GCD5 4 ⢠⢠⢠256 MB SAMSUNG M378T3253FG0-CD5 SS K4T56083QF-GCD5 4 ⢠⢠512 MB SAMSUNG M378T6453FG0-CD5 DS K4T56083QF-GCD5 4 ⢠⢠⢠512 MB Infineon HYS64T64000GU-3.7-A SS HYB18T512800AC37 4 ⢠⢠⢠256 MB MICRON MT8HTF3264AY-53EB3 SS 4FBIID9CHM 4 ⢠⢠⢠512 MB CORSAIR CM2X512-4200 DS Heat-Sink Package 4 ⢠⢠⢠512 MB MICRON MT16HTF6464AG-53EB2 DS 4FBIID9BQM 4 ⢠⢠⢠1024 MB MICRON MT16HTF12864AY-53EA1 DS 4JAIID9CRZ 4 ⢠⢠⢠1024 MB Kingston KVR533D2N4/1G DS E5108AB-5C-E â ⢠⢠⢠256 MB Kingston KVR533D2N4/256 SS HYB18T512160AC-3.7 â ⢠⢠⢠1024 MB Hynix HYMP512U648-C4 DS HY5PS12821FP-C4 4 ⢠⢠⢠256 MB MICRON MT8HTF3264AY-53EB3 SS 4FBIID9CHM 4 ⢠⢠⢠512 MB MICRON MT16HTF6464AY-53EB2 DS 4FBIID9CHM 4 ⢠⢠⢠DDR2-533 with 600 MHz capability (overclocking) DDR2-533 with 600 MHz capability (overclocking) DDR2-533 with 600 MHz capability (overclocking) DDR2-533 with 600 MHz capability (overclocking) DDR2-533 with 600 MHz capability (overclocking) Size Size Size Size Size Vendor Vendor Vendor Vendor Vendor Model Model Model Model Model Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Component Component Component Component Component CL CL CL CL CL A A A A A B B B B B C C C C C DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support 512 MB SAMSUNG M378T6553BG0-CD5 SS K4T51083QB-GCD5 ⢠⢠⢠256 MB SAMSUNG M378T3253FG0-CD5 SS K4T56083QF-GCD5 ⢠⢠⢠512 MB Infineon HYB18T512800AC37 SS HYS64T64000GU-3.7-A ⢠⢠⢠512 MB CORSAIR CM2X512-4300 DS Heat-Sink Package ⢠⢠⢠512 MB Hynix HYMP564U648-C4 SS HY5PS12821F-C4 ⢠⢠⢠256 MB MICRON MT8HTF3264AG-53EB3 SS 3UBIIZ9BQT ⢠⢠⢠512 MB MICRON MT16HTF6464AG-53EB1 DS 3TBIIZ9BQT ⢠⢠⢠256 MB MICRON MT8HTF3264AG-53EB3 SS 3TBIIZ9BQT ⢠⢠⢠512 MB Kingston KVR533D2N4/512 SS E5108AB-5C-E ⢠⢠⢠512 MB Hynix HYMP564U648-C4 SS HY5PS12821F-C4 ⢠⢠⢠1024 MB Hynix N/A DS HY5PS12821F-C4 ⢠⢠⢠512 MB Hynix HYMP564U648-C4 AA SS HY5PS12821F-C4 ⢠⢠⢠1024 MB Hynix HYMP512U648-C4 DS HY5PS12821F-C4 ⢠⢠⢠1024 MB Hynix HYM512U648-C4 AA DS HY5PS12821FP-C4 ⢠⢠⢠512 MB KINGMAX 4CBIIZ9BQT DS HLBC28K-38M14-MAA ⢠⢠⢠512 MB A-DATA N/A SS K4T51083QB-GCD5 ⢠⢠⢠256 MB BRAIN POWER BS212-1-256M-MIC-533 SS 4CBIIZ9BQT ⢠⢠⢠512 MB BRAIN POWER BS213-1-512M-MIC-533 DS 4CBIIZ9BQT ⢠⢠⢠512 MB ELPIDA EBE51UD8ABFA-5C SS E5108AB-5C-E ⢠⢠⢠512 MB ELPIDA EBE51UD8ABFA-5C-E SS E5108AB-5C-E ⢠⢠⢠1024 MB ELPIDA EBE11UD8ABFA-5C-E DS E5108AB-5C-E ⢠⢠⢠512 MB Pmi MAB4512MIC SS K4T51083QB-GCD5 ⢠⢠⢠Size Size Size Size Size Vendor Vendor Vendor Vendor Vendor Model Model Model Model Model Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Component Component Component Component Component A A A A A B B B B B C C C C C DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) : SS SS SS SS S S - Single-sided DS DS DS DS D S - Double-sided CL CL CL CL C L - CAS Latency DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support : A A A A A - Supports one module inserted into either slot, in Single-channel memory configuration. B B B B B - Supports one pair of modules inserted into either the yellow slots or the black slots as one pair of Dual-channel memory configuration. C C C C C - Supports two pairs of modules inserted into the yellow and black slots as two pairs of Dual-channel memory configuration. Visit the ASUS website for the latest DDR2 Qualified Vendors List.
2-14 2-14 2-14 2-14 2-14 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.4.3 2.4.3 2.4.3 2.4.3 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM Unplug the power supply before adding or removing DIMMs or other system components. Failure to do so can cause severe damage to both the motherboard and the components. To install a DIMM: 1. Unlock a DIMM socket by pressing the retaining clips outward. 2. Align a DIMM on the socket such that the notch on the DIMM matches the break on the socket. 3. Firmly insert the DIMM into the socket until the retaining clips snap back in place and the DIMM is properly seated. 2.4.4 2.4.4 2.4.4 2.4.4 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Follow these steps to remove a DIMM. 1. Simultaneously press the retaining clips outward to unlock the DIMM. 2. Remove the DIMM from the socket. ⢠A DDR2 DIMM is keyed with a notch so that it fits in only one direction. Do not force a DIMM into a socket to avoid damaging the DIMM. ⢠The DDR2 DIMM sockets do not support DDR DIMMs. DO not install DDR DIMMs to the DDR2 DIMM sockets. Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch Support the DIMM lightly with your fingers when pressing the retaining clips. The DIMM might get damaged when it flips out with extra force. DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch 1 2 3 1 2 1
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-15 2-15 2-15 2-15 2-15 2.5 Expansion slots In the future, you may need to install expansion cards. The following sub-sections describe the slots and the expansion cards that they support. 2.5.1 2.5.1 2.5.1 2.5.1 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card To install an expansion card: 1. Before installing the expansion card, read the documentation that came with it and make the necessary hardware settings for the card. 2. Remove the system unit cover (if your motherboard is already installed in a chassis). 3. Remove the bracket opposite the slot that you intend to use. Keep the screw for later use. 4. Align the card connector with the slot and press firmly until the card is completely seated on the slot. 5. Secure the card to the chassis with the screw you removed earlier. 6. Replace the system cover. 2.5.2 2.5.2 2.5.2 2.5.2 2.5.2 Configuring an expansion card Configuring an expansion card Configuring an expansion card Configuring an expansion card Configuring an expansion card After installing the expansion card, configure the it by adjusting the software settings. 1. Turn on the system and change the necessary BIOS settings, if any. See Chapter 4 for information on BIOS setup. 2. Assign an IRQ to the card. Refer to the tables on the next page. 3. Install the software drivers for the expansion card. Make sure to unplug the power cord before adding or removing expansion cards. Failure to do so may cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components. When using PCI cards on shared slots, ensure that the drivers support âShare IRQâ or that the cards do not need IRQ assignments. Otherwise, conflicts will arise between the two PCI groups, making the system unstable and the card inoperable.
2-16 2-16 2-16 2-16 2-16 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.5.3 2.5.3 2.5.3 2.5.3 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments Interrupt assignments Interrupt assignments Interrupt assignments Interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments IRQ IRQ IRQ IRQ IRQ Priority Priority Priority Priority Priority Standard Function Standard Function Standard Function Standard Function Standard Function 0 1 System Timer 1 2 Keyboard Controller 2 â Re-direct to IRQ#9 3 11 Communications Port (COM2)* 4 12 Communications Port (COM1)* 5 13 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 6 14 Floppy Disk Controller 7 15 Printer Port (LPT1)* 8 3 System CMOS/Real Time Clock 9 4 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 10 5 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 11 6 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 12 7 PS/2 Compatible Mouse Port* 13 8 Numeric Data Processor 14 9 Primary IDE Channel 15 10 Secondary IDE Channel * These IRQs are usually available for ISA or PCI devices. IRQ assignments for this motherboard IRQ assignments for this motherboard IRQ assignments for this motherboard IRQ assignments for this motherboard IRQ assignments for this motherboard A A A A A B B B B B C C C C C D D D D D E E E E E F F F F F G G G G G H H H H H PCI slot 1 â â â â â â shared â PCI slot 2 â â â â â shared â â PCI slot 3 â shared â â ââââ PCI E x16 slot shared â â â ââââ PCI E x1 slot 1 shared â â â ââââ PCI E x1 slot 2 â â â shared ââââ Onboard USB controller 1 shared â â â ââââ Onboard USB controller 2 â shared â â ââââ Onboard USB controller 3 â â shared â ââââ Onboard USB controller 4 â â â shared ââââ Onboard USB 2.0 controller shared â â â ââââ Onboard IDE port shared â â â ââââ Onboard SATA port â shared â â ââââ Onboard Azalia audio shared â â â ââââ Onboard LAN â shared â â ââââ Onboard wireless LAN â â â â used â â â Onboard PCI SATA RAID (SI) â â â â â â shared â Onboard PCI IDE RAID (ITE) â â â â â â â used Onboard 1394 controller â â â â â shared â â
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-17 2-17 2-17 2-17 2-17 2.5.4 2.5.4 2.5.4 2.5.4 2.5.4 PCI slots PCI slots PCI slots PCI slots PCI slots The PCI slots support cards such as a LAN card, SCSI card, USB card, and other cards that comply with PCI specifications. The figure shows a LAN card installed on a PCI slot. 2.5.5 2.5.5 2.5.5 2.5.5 2.5.5 PCI Express x16 slot PCI Express x16 slot PCI Express x16 slot PCI Express x16 slot PCI Express x16 slot This motherboard supports PCI Express x16 graphic cards that comply with the PCI Express specifications. The following figure shows a graphics card installed on the PCI Express x16 slot. 2.5.6 2.5.6 2.5.6 2.5.6 2.5.6 PCI Express x1 slot PCI Express x1 slot PCI Express x1 slot PCI Express x1 slot PCI Express x1 slot This motherboard supports PCI Express x1 network cards, SCSI cards and other cards that comply with the PCI Express specifications. The following figure shows a network card installed on the PCI Express x1 slot.
2-18 2-18 2-18 2-18 2-18 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.6 Jumpers 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) This jumper allows you to clear the Real Time Clock (RTC) RAM in CMOS. You can clear the CMOS memory of date, time, and system setup parameters by erasing the CMOS RTC RAM data. The onboard button cell battery powers the RAM data in CMOS, which include system setup information such as system passwords. To erase the RTC RAM: 1. Turn OFF the computer and unplug the power cord. 2. Remove the onboard battery. 3. Move the jumper cap from pins 1-2 (default) to pins 2-3. Keep the cap on pins 2-3 for about 5~10 seconds, then move the cap back to pins 1-2. 4. Re-install the battery. 5. Plug the power cord and turn ON the computer. 6. Hold down the <Del> key during the boot process and enter BIOS setup to re-enter data. You do not need to clear the RTC when the system hangs due to overclocking. For system failure due to overclocking, use the C.P.R. (CPU Parameter Recall) feature. Shut down and reboot the system so the BIOS can automatically reset parameter settings to default values. Except when clearing the RTC RAM, never remove the cap on CLRTC jumper default position. Removing the cap will cause system boot failure! 12 23 P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe Clear RTC RAM CLRTC1 Normal Clear CMOS (Default)
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-19 2-19 2-19 2-19 2-19 3. 3. 3. 3. 3. Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) This jumper allows you to enable or disable the keyboard wake-up feature. Set this jumper to pins 2-3 ( 5VSB) to wake up the computer when you press a key on the keyboard (the default is the Space Bar). This feature requires an ATX power supply that can supply at least 1A on the 5VSB lead, and a corresponding setting in the BIOS. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. USB device wake-up jumpers (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34, USB device wake-up jumpers (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34, USB device wake-up jumpers (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34, USB device wake-up jumpers (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34, USB device wake-up jumpers (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34, USBPW56, USBPW78) USBPW56, USBPW78) USBPW56, USBPW78) USBPW56, USBPW78) USBPW56, USBPW78) Set these jumpers to 5V to wake up the computer from S1 sleep mode (CPU stopped, DRAM refreshed, system running in low power mode) using the connected USB devices. Set to 5VSB to wake up from S3 and S4 sleep modes (no power to CPU, DRAM in slow refresh, power supply in reduced power mode). The USBPWR12 and USBPWR34 jumpers are for the rear USB ports. The USBPWR56 and USBPWR78 jumpers are for the internal USB connectors that you can connect to additional USB ports. ⢠The USB device wake-up feature requires a power supply that can provide 500mA on the 5VSB lead for each USB port; otherwise, the system would not power up. ⢠The total current consumed must NOT exceed the power supply capability ( 5VSB) whether under normal condition or in sleep mode. P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe Keyboard power setting (Default) 5V 5VSB KBPWR1 23 12 P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe USB device wake-up 3 2 2 1 5V (Default) 5VSB USBPW56 USBPW78 3 2 2 1 5V (Default) 5VSB USBPW12 USBPW34
2-20 2-20 2-20 2-20 2-20 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.7 Connectors 2.7.1 2.7.1 2.7.1 2.7.1 2.7.1 Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. Parallel port. Parallel port. Parallel port. Parallel port. Parallel port. This 25-pin port connects a parallel printer, a scanner, or other devices. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. IEEE 1394a port. IEEE 1394a port. IEEE 1394a port. IEEE 1394a port. IEEE 1394a port. This 6-pin IEEE 1394a port provides high-speed connectivity for audio/video devices, storage peripherals, PCs, or portable devices. 3. 3. 3. 3. 3. LAN (RJ-45) port. LAN (RJ-45) port. LAN (RJ-45) port. LAN (RJ-45) port. LAN (RJ-45) port. This port allows Gigabit connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) through a network hub. Refer to the table below for the LAN port LED indications. 12 1 3 15 2 13 4 14 16 17 11 5 6 10 7 8 9 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. Rear Speaker Out port (gray). Rear Speaker Out port (gray). Rear Speaker Out port (gray). Rear Speaker Out port (gray). Rear Speaker Out port (gray). This port connects the rear speakers on a 4-channel, 6-channel, or 8-channel audio configuration. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. Side Speaker Out port (black). Side Speaker Out port (black). Side Speaker Out port (black). Side Speaker Out port (black). Side Speaker Out port (black). This port connects the side speakers in an 8-channel audio configuration. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. Line In port (light blue). Line In port (light blue). Line In port (light blue). Line In port (light blue). Line In port (light blue). This port connects a tape, CD, DVD player, or other audio sources. 7. 7. 7. 7. 7. Line Out port (lime). Line Out port (lime). Line Out port (lime). Line Out port (lime). Line Out port (lime). This port connects a headphone or a speaker. In 4-channel, 6-channel, and 8-channel configuration, the function of this port becomes Front Speaker Out. Refer to the audio configuration table on the next page for the function of the audio ports in 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration. ACT/LINK LED ACT/LINK LED ACT/LINK LED ACT/LINK LED ACT/LINK LED SPEED LED SPEED LED SPEED LED SPEED LED SPEED LED Status Status Status Status Status Description Description Description Description Description Status Status Status Status Status Description Description Description Description Description OFF No link OFF 10 Mbps connection GREEN Linked ORANGE 100 Mbps connection BLINKING Data activity GREEN 1 Gbps connection LAN port LED indications LAN port LED indications LAN port LED indications LAN port LED indications LAN port LED indications LAN port LAN port LAN port LAN port LAN port SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED LED LED LED LED LED ACT/LINK ACT/LINK ACT/LINK ACT/LINK ACT/LINK LED LED LED LED LED
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-21 2-21 2-21 2-21 2-21 12. 12. 12. 12. 12. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. These two 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. 13. 13. 13. 13. 13. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. These two 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. 14. 14. 14. 14. 14. Optical S/PDIF Out port Optical S/PDIF Out port Optical S/PDIF Out port Optical S/PDIF Out port Optical S/PDIF Out port . This port connects an external audio output device via an optical S/PDIF cable. 15. 15. 15. 15. 15. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port. This port connects an external audio output device via a coaxial S/PDIF cable. 16. 16. 16. 16. 16. PS/2 keyboard port (purple). PS/2 keyboard port (purple). PS/2 keyboard port (purple). PS/2 keyboard port (purple). PS/2 keyboard port (purple). This port is for a PS/2 keyboard. 17. 17. 17. 17. 17. PS/2 mouse port (green). PS/2 mouse port (green). PS/2 mouse port (green). PS/2 mouse port (green). PS/2 mouse port (green). This port is for a PS/2 mouse. 8. 8. 8. 8. 8. Wireless LAN antenna port Wireless LAN antenna port Wireless LAN antenna port Wireless LAN antenna port Wireless LAN antenna port (Wireless Edition only) . . . . . This port connects to the optional dipolar antenna for the onboard WiFi-g⢠solution. 9. 9. 9. 9. 9. Wireless LAN LED Wireless LAN LED Wireless LAN LED Wireless LAN LED Wireless LAN LED (Wireless Edition only) . . . . . This green AIR AIR AIR AIR AIR L E D indicates the data transmission status of the onboard wireless LAN adapter. Refer to the table below for the LED indications. 10. 10. 10. 10. 10. Microphone port (pink). Microphone port (pink). Microphone port (pink). Microphone port (pink). Microphone port (pink). This port connects a microphone. 11. 11. 11. 11. 11. Center/Subwoofer port (yellow orange). Center/Subwoofer port (yellow orange). Center/Subwoofer port (yellow orange). Center/Subwoofer port (yellow orange). Center/Subwoofer port (yellow orange). This port connects the center/subwoofer speakers. Status Status Status Status Status Indication Indication Indication Indication Indication On On On On O n The onboard WiFi-g⢠is on but has no data activity. Off Off Off Off O f f The onboard WiFi-g⢠card is off. Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing Flashing The onboard WiFi-g⢠card is transmitting and/or receiving data. Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Light Blue Light Blue Light Blue Light Blue Light Blue Line In Line In Line In Line In Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Line Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Pink Pink Pink Pink Pink Mic In Mic In Mic In Mic In Gray Gray Gray Gray Gray â Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Black Black Black Black Black â â â Side Speaker Out Yellow Orange Yellow Orange Yellow Orange Yellow Orange Yellow Orange â â Center/Subwoofer Center/Subwoofer Port Port Port Port Port 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel (Headset) (Headset) (Headset) (Headset) (Headset) Wireless LAN LED indications Wireless LAN LED indications Wireless LAN LED indications Wireless LAN LED indications Wireless LAN LED indications
2-22 2-22 2-22 2-22 2-22 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1) Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1) Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1) Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1) Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1) This connector is for an Ultra DMA 100/66 signal cable. The Ultra DMA 100/66 signal cable has three connectors: a blue connector for the primary IDE connector on the motherboard, a black connector for an Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE slave device (optical drive/hard disk drive), and a gray connector for an Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE master device (hard disk drive). If you install two hard disk drives, you must configure the second drive as a slave device by setting its jumper accordingly. Refer to the hard disk documentation for the jumper settings. 2.7.2 2.7.2 2.7.2 2.7.2 2.7.2 Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) This connector is for the provided floppy disk drive (FDD) signal cable. Insert one end of the cable to this connector, then connect the other end to the signal connector at the back of the floppy disk drive. Pin 5 on the connector is removed to prevent incorrect cable connection when using a FDD cable with a covered Pin 5. ⢠Pin 20 on the IDE connector is removed to match the covered hole on the Ultra DMA cable connector. This prevents incorrect insertion when you connect the IDE cable. ⢠Use the 80-conductor IDE cable for Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE devices. P5AD2 ® NOTE: Orient the red markings on the floppy ribbon cable to PIN 1. P5AD2 Deluxe Floppy disk drive connector PIN 1 FLOPPY P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe IDE connector NOTE: Orient the red markings (usually zigzag) on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. PRI_IDE1 PIN 1
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-23 2-23 2-23 2-23 2-23 ⢠Before creating a RAID set using Ultra ATA hard disks, make sure that you have connected the Ultra ATA signal cable and installed Ultra ATA 133/100/66 hard disk drives. ⢠The system automatically assigns the boot sequence of ATAPI devices connected to the IDE RAID connectors. ⢠The ITE ® 8212F controller supports a maximum of two Ultra ATA hard disk drives in RAID 1 configuration. ⢠Before creating a RAID 1 set, make sure that you set the hard disk drives as either Master or Slave device. Refer to the hard disk drive documentation for details. 3. 3. 3. 3. 3. IDE RAID connectors (40-1 pin PRI_RAID1 [red], IDE RAID connectors (40-1 pin PRI_RAID1 [red], IDE RAID connectors (40-1 pin PRI_RAID1 [red], IDE RAID connectors (40-1 pin PRI_RAID1 [red], IDE RAID connectors (40-1 pin PRI_RAID1 [red], SEC_RAID1 [red]) SEC_RAID1 [red]) SEC_RAID1 [red]) SEC_RAID1 [red]) SEC_RAID1 [red]) These connectors are for Ultra ATA 133/100/66 signal cables. The IDE RAID connectors support up to four IDE hard disk drives that you can configure as a disk array through the onboard IDE RAID controller. Refer to Chapter 5 for details on how to set up RAID configurations. These connectors are set to IDE IDE IDE IDE IDE M M M M M ode ode ode ode ode b y default. In IDE IDE IDE IDE IDE M M M M M ode ode ode ode o d e, you can connect IDE devices to these connectors such as boot/data hard disk drives or optical drives. If you intend to create an IDE RAID set using these connectors, set the ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller item in the BIOS to [RAID Mode]. See section â4.4.6 Onboard Devices Configurationâ for details. P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe IDE RAID connectors NOTE: Orient the red markings (usually zigzag) on the IDE cable to PIN 1. PRI_RAID1 PIN 1 SEC_RAID1
2-24 2-24 2-24 2-24 2-24 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1 [red], SATA2 [red], Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1 [red], SATA2 [red], Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1 [red], SATA2 [red], Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1 [red], SATA2 [red], Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1 [red], SATA2 [red], SATA3 [black], SATA4 [black]) SATA3 [black], SATA4 [black]) SATA3 [black], SATA4 [black]) SATA3 [black], SATA4 [black]) SATA3 [black], SATA4 [black]) These connectors are for the Serial ATA signal cables for Serial ATA hard disk drives. If you installed Serial ATA hard disk drives, you can create a RAID 0 or RAID 1 configuration with the Intel ® Matrix Storage Technology through the onboard Intel ® ICH6R RAID controller. Refer to Chapter 5 for details on how to set up Serial RAID configurations. These connectors are set to Standard IDE Standard IDE Standard IDE Standard IDE Standard IDE mode by default. In S S S S S tandard IDE tandard IDE tandard IDE tandard IDE tandard IDE mode, you can connect Serial ATA boot/data hard disk drives to these connectors. If you intend to create a Serial ATA RAID set using these connectors, set the Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As item in the BIOS to [RAID]. See section â4.3.6 IDE Configurationâ on page 4-15 for details. Important notes on Serial ATA Important notes on Serial ATA Important notes on Serial ATA Important notes on Serial ATA Important notes on Serial ATA ⢠You must install Windows ® 2000 Service Pack 4 or the Windows ® XP Service Pack 1 before using Serial ATA hard disk drives. The Serial ATA RAID feature (RAID 0/RAID 1) is available only if you are using Windows ® 2000/XP. ⢠Use only two Serial ATA RAID connectors for each RAID 0 or RAID 1 set. ⢠When using the connectors in S S S S S tandard IDE tandard IDE tandard IDE tandard IDE tandard IDE mode, connect the primary (boot) hard disk drive to the SATA1 or SATA2 connector. Refer to the table below for the recommended SATA hard disk drive connections. Serial ATA hard disk drive connection Serial ATA hard disk drive connection Serial ATA hard disk drive connection Serial ATA hard disk drive connection Serial ATA hard disk drive connection P5AD2 P5AD2 Deluxe SA T A connectors S ATA 1 GND RSA T A_TXP1 RSA T A_TXN1 GND RSA T A_RXP1 RSA T A_RXN1 GND S ATA 4 GND RSA T A_TXP4 RSA T A_TXN4 GND RSA T A_RXP4 RSA T A_RXN4 GND S ATA 3 GND RSA T A_TXP3 RSA T A_TXN3 GND RSA T A_RXP3 RSA T A_RXN3 GND S ATA 2 GND RSA T A_TXP2 RSA T A_TXN2 GND RSA T A_RXP2 RSA T A_RXN2 GND Connector Connector Connector Connector Connector Color Color Color Color Color Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Use Use Use Use Use SATA1/SATA2 SATA1/SATA2 SATA1/SATA2 SATA1/SATA2 SATA1/SATA2 Red Red Red Red Red Master Master Master Master Master Boot disk Boot disk Boot disk Boot disk Boot disk SATA3/SATA4 SATA3/SATA4 SATA3/SATA4 SATA3/SATA4 SATA3/SATA4 Black Black Black Black Black Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave Data disk Data disk Data disk Data disk Data disk
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-25 2-25 2-25 2-25 2-25 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. Serial ATA RAID connectors (7-pin SATA_RAID1, Serial ATA RAID connectors (7-pin SATA_RAID1, Serial ATA RAID connectors (7-pin SATA_RAID1, Serial ATA RAID connectors (7-pin SATA_RAID1, Serial ATA RAID connectors (7-pin SATA_RAID1, SATA_RAID2, SATA_RAID3, SATA_RAID4) SATA_RAID2, SATA_RAID3, SATA_RAID4) SATA_RAID2, SATA_RAID3, SATA_RAID4) SATA_RAID2, SATA_RAID3, SATA_RAID4) SATA_RAID2, SATA_RAID3, SATA_RAID4) These connectors are for Serial ATA signal cables. These connectors support up to four Serial ATA hard disk drives that you can configure as a disk array through the onboard SATA RAID controller. Refer to Chapter 5 for details on how to set up Serial ATA RAID configurations. These connectors are set to RAID Mode RAID Mode RAID Mode RAID Mode RAID Mode b y default. If you want to connect Serial ATA boot/data hard disk drives to these connectors, set the Silicon Image Controller Silicon Image Controller Silicon Image Controller Silicon Image Controller Silicon Image Controller item in the BIOS to [SATA Mode] . See section â4.4.6 Onboard Devices Configurationâ for details. ⢠Before creating a RAID set using Serial ATA hard disks, make sure that you have connected the Serial ATA signal cable and installed Serial ATA hard disk drives; ; otherwise, you cannot enter the Silicon Image RAID utility and SATA BIOS setup during POST. ⢠You can only create RAID 5 and JBOD configuration using the SATALink⢠SATA RAID Management software. See Chapter 5 for details. The RAID 5 feature is not Windows ® Hardware Quality Labs (WHQL)-certified. P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe SA T A RAID connectors GND RSA T A_TXP2 RSA T A_TXN2 GND RSA T A_RXP2 RSA T A_RXN2 GND SA T A_RAID1 GND RSA T A_TXP1 RSA T A_TXN1 GND RSA T A_RXP1 RSA T A_RXN1 GND SA T A_RAID2 GND RSA T A_TXP4 RSA T A_TXN4 GND RSA T A_RXP4 RSA T A_RXN4 GND SA T A_RAID3 GND RSA T A_TXP3 RSA T A_TXN3 GND RSA T A_RXP3 RSA T A_RXN3 GND SA T A_RAID4
2-26 2-26 2-26 2-26 2-26 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) This connector is for the 4-pin audio cable that connects to the audio connector at the back of the optical drive. Enable the CD-IN function in the audio utility when using this connector. P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe CD audio connector CD Right Audio Channel Left Audio Channel Ground Ground 7. 7. 7. 7. 7. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS1) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS1) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS1) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS1) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS1) This connector is for a chassis-mounted intrusion detection sensor or switch. Connect one end of the chassis intrusion sensor or switch cable to this connector. The chassis intrusion sensor or switch sends a high-level signal to this connector when a chassis component is removed or replaced. The signal is then generated as a chassis intrusion event. By default, the pins labeled âChassis Signalâ and âGroundâ are shorted with a jumper cap. Remove the jumper caps only when you intend to use the chassis intrusion detection feature. P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe Chassis intrusion connector CHASSIS1 5VSB_MB Chassis Signal GND (Default)
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-27 2-27 2-27 2-27 2-27 9. 9. 9. 9. 9. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) These connectors are for USB 2.0 ports. Connect the USB/GAME module cable to any of these connectors, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. These USB connectors comply with USB 2.0 specification that supports up to 480 Mbps connection speed. 8. 8. 8. 8. 8. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) This connector is for a chassis-mounted front panel audio I/O module that supports either HD Audio or legacy ACâ97 audio standard. Never connect a 1394 cable 1394 cable 1394 cable 1394 cable 1394 cable t o the USB connectors. Doing so will damage the motherboard! ⢠It is recommended that you connect a high-definition front panel audio module to this connector to avail the motherboard high-definition audio capability. ⢠By default, this connector is set to legacy ACâ97 audio. If you want to connect a high-definition front panel audio module to this connector, set the Front Panel Support Type Front Panel Support Type Front Panel Support Type Front Panel Support Type F r o n t P a n e l S u p p o r t T y p e item in the BIOS Setup to [Azalia]. See page 4-27 for details. P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe USB 2.0 connectors USB56 USB 5V USB_P6- USB_P6 GND NC USB 5V USB_P5- USB_P5 GND 1 USB78 USB 5V USB_P8- USB_P8 GND NC USB 5V USB_P7- USB_P7 GND 1 P5AD2 P5AD2 Deluxe Front panel audio connector AAFP NC MIC2 Line out_R Line out_L NC NC MICPWR NC AGND SENSE2_RETUR PORT1 L PORT2 R PORT2 L SENSE1_RETUR SENSE_SEND PORT1 R PRESENCE# GND ACâ97-compliant pin definition Azalia-compliant pin definition
2-28 2-28 2-28 2-28 2-28 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 10. 10. 10. 10. 10. IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 a port a port a port a port a port connector (10-1 pin IE1394_ connector (10-1 pin IE1394_ connector (10-1 pin IE1394_ connector (10-1 pin IE1394_ connector (10-1 pin IE1394_ 2 [red]) 2 [red]) 2 [red]) 2 [red]) 2 [red]) This connector is for an IEEE 1394a port. Connect the IEEE 1394a module cable to this connector, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. Never connect a USB cable USB cable USB cable USB cable USB cable t o the IEEE 1394a connectors. Doing so will damage the motherboard! 11. 11. 11. 11. 11. GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME1) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME1) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME1) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME1) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME1) This connector is for a GAME/MIDI port. Connect the USB/GAME module cable to this connector, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. The GAME/MIDI port connects a joystick or game pad for playing games, and MIDI devices for playing or editing audio files. P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe GAME connector GAME1 5V 5V J2B1 J2CX MIDI_OUT J2CY J2B2 MIDI_IN J1B1 J1CX GND GND J1CY J1B2 5V P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe IEEE 1394 connectors IE1394_2 1 GND 12V TPB2- GND TP A2- 12V TPB2 GND TP A2
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-29 2-29 2-29 2-29 2-29 12. 12. 12. 12. 12. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) This connector is for a serial (COM) port. Connect the serial port module cable to this connector, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. 13. 13. 13. 13. 13. CPU, Chassis, and Power Fan connectors CPU, Chassis, and Power Fan connectors CPU, Chassis, and Power Fan connectors CPU, Chassis, and Power Fan connectors CPU, Chassis, and Power Fan connectors (3-pin CPU_FAN1, PWR_FAN1, CHA_FAN1, CHA_FAN2) (3-pin CPU_FAN1, PWR_FAN1, CHA_FAN1, CHA_FAN2) (3-pin CPU_FAN1, PWR_FAN1, CHA_FAN1, CHA_FAN2) (3-pin CPU_FAN1, PWR_FAN1, CHA_FAN1, CHA_FAN2) (3-pin CPU_FAN1, PWR_FAN1, CHA_FAN1, CHA_FAN2) The fan connectors support cooling fans of 350 mA ~ 2000 mA (24 W max.) or a total of 1 A ~ 3 .48 A (41.7 6 W max.) at 12V. Connect the fan cables to the fan connectors on the motherboard, making sure that the black wire of each cable matches the ground pin of the connector. Only the CPU_FAN1 and CHA_FAN1 connectors support the ASUS Q-Fan 2 feature. Do not forget to connect the fan cables to the fan connectors. Insufficient air flow inside the system may damage the motherboard components. These are not jumpers! Do not place jumper caps on the fan connectors! P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe Serial port connector PIN 1 COM1 P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe Fan connectors CPU_F AN1 CHA_F AN1 PWR_F AN1 GND Rotation 12V GND Rotation 12V GND CPU F AN PWR CPU F AN IN CPU F AN PWM GND Rotation 12V CHA_F AN2
2-30 2-30 2-30 2-30 2-30 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 14. 14. 14. 14. 14. ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR1, 4-pin ATX12V1) ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR1, 4-pin ATX12V1) ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR1, 4-pin ATX12V1) ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR1, 4-pin ATX12V1) ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR1, 4-pin ATX12V1) These connectors are for ATX power supply plugs. The power supply plugs are designed to fit these connectors in only one orientation. Find the proper orientation and push down firmly until the connectors completely fit. P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe A TX power connectors EA TXPWR1 A TX12V1 3 V olts 3 V olts Ground 5 V olts 5 V olts Ground Ground Power OK 5V Standby 12 V olts -5 V olts 5 V olts 3 V olts -12 V olts Ground Ground Ground PSON# Ground 5 V olts 12 V olts 3 V olts 5 V olts Ground 12V DC GND 12V DC GND ⢠Use of an ATX 12 V Specification 2.0 -compliant power supply unit (PSU) that provides a minimum power of 350 W is recommended for a fully-configured system. ⢠Do not forget to connect the 4-pin ATX 12 V power plug; otherwise, the system will not boot up. ⢠Use of a PSU with a higher power output is recommended when configuring a system with more power consuming devices. The system may become unstableor may not boot up if the power is inadequate. ⢠When using an ATX 12 V PSU with a 20-pin power plug, make sure that it can provide at least 15 A on the 12 V lead, and a minimum power of 350 W. Use of an ATX 12 V PSU with a 20-pin power plug is not recommended. ⢠The ATX 12 V Specification 2.0-compliant (350 W) PSU passed the motherboard power requirement test with the following configuration: CPU : Intel ® Pentium ® 4 3.6 GHz Memory : 512 MB DDR2 (x 4) Graphics card : PCI Express x16 Nvidia EN5900 Parallel ATA devices : IDE hard disk drive (x 2) Serial ATA device : SATA hard disk drive Optical drives : CD-ROM (x 2) SCSI devices : SCSI card and SCSI hard disk drive ⢠You must install a PSU with a higher power rating if you intend to install additional devices.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 2-31 2-31 2-31 2-31 2-31 ⢠System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) This 3-pin connector is for the system power LED. Connect the chassis power LED cable to this connector. The system power LED lights up when you turn on the system power, and blinks when the system is in sleep mode. ⢠Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) This 2-pin connector is for the HDD Activity LED. Connect the HDD Activity LED cable to this connector. The IDE LED lights up or flashes when data is read from or written to the HDD. ⢠System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) This 4-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted system warning speaker. The speaker allows you to hear system beeps and warnings. ⢠ATX power button/soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) ATX power button/soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) ATX power button/soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) ATX power button/soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) ATX power button/soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) This connector is for the system power button. Pressing the power button turns the system on or puts the system in sleep or soft-off mode depending on the BIOS settings. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds while the system is ON turns the system OFF. ⢠Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) This 2-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted reset button for system reboot without turning off the system power. 15. 15. 15. 15. 15. System panel connector (20-pin PANEL1) System panel connector (20-pin PANEL1) System panel connector (20-pin PANEL1) System panel connector (20-pin PANEL1) System panel connector (20-pin PANEL1) This connector supports several chassis-mounted functions. The sytem panel connector is color-coded for easy connection. Refer to the connector description below for details. P5AD2 ® P5AD2 Deluxe System panel connector P ANEL1 PLED- PWR 5V Speaker SPEAKER PLED Ground Reset Ground Reset Ground Ground PWRSW PLED IDE_LED- IDE_LED IDE_LED
2-32 2-32 2-32 2-32 2-32 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information
3 Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence, the vocal POST messages, and ways of shutting down the system.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe Chapter summary 3 3.1 Starting up for the first time ................................................ 3-1 3.2 Powering off the computer .................................................. 3-2 3.3 ASUS POST Reporter⢠.......................................................... 3-3
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-1 3.1 Starting up for the first time 1. After making all the connections, replace the system case cover. 2. Be sure that all switches are off. 3. Connect the power cord to the power connector at the back of the system chassis. 4. Connect the power cord to a power outlet that is equipped with a surge protector. 5. Turn on the devices in the following order: a. Monitor b. External SCSI devices (starting with the last device on the chain) c. System power 6. After applying power, the system power LED on the system front panel case lights up. For systems withATX power supplies, the system LED lights up when you press the ATX power button. If your monitor complies with âgreenâ standards or if it has a âpower standbyâ feature, the monitor LED may light up or switch between orange and green after the system LED turns on. The system then runs the power-on self tests or POST. While the tests are running, the BIOS beeps (see BIOS beep codes table below) or additional messages appear on the screen. If you do not see anything within 30 seconds from the time you turned on the power, the system may have failed a power-on test. Check the jumper settings and connections or call your retailer for assistance. AMI BIOS beep codes AMI BIOS beep codes AMI BIOS beep codes AMI BIOS beep codes AMI BIOS beep codes Beep Description Beep Description Beep Description Beep Description Beep Description Error Error Error Error Error One beep Keyboard controller error Refresh Time error No master drive detected Two continuous beeps followed by Floppy controller failure two short beeps Two continuous beeps followed by Hardware component failure four short beeps 7. At power on, hold down the <Delete> key to enter the BIOS Setup. Follow the instructions in Chapter 4.
3-2 3-2 3-2 3-2 3-2 Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up 3.2 Powering off the computer 3.2.1 3.2.1 3.2.1 3.2.1 3.2.1 Using the OS shut down function Using the OS shut down function Using the OS shut down function Using the OS shut down function Using the OS shut down function If you are using Windows ® 2000: 1. Click the Start Start Start Start Start button then click Shut Down... Shut Down... Shut Down... Shut Down... Shut Down... 2. Make sure that the Shut Down Shut Down Shut Down Shut Down Shut Down option button is selected, then click the OK OK OK OK O K button to shut down the computer. 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows ® shuts down. If you are using Windows ® XP: 1. Click the Start Start Start Start Start button then select Turn Off Computer. Turn Off Computer. Turn Off Computer. Turn Off Computer. Turn Off Computer. 2. Click the Turn Off Turn Off Turn Off Turn Off Turn Off button to shut down the computer. 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows ® shuts down. 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 Using the dual function power switch Using the dual function power switch Using the dual function power switch Using the dual function power switch Using the dual function power switch While the system is ON, pressing the power switch for less than four seconds puts the system to sleep mode or to soft-off mode, depending on the BIOS setting. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds lets the system enter the soft-off mode regardless of the BIOS setting. Refer to section â4.5 Power Menuâ in Chapter 4 for details.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 3-3 3-3 3-3 3-3 3-3 3.3 ASUS POST Reporter⢠This motherboard includes the Winbond speech controller to support a special feature called the ASUS POST Reporterâ¢. This feature lets you hear vocal messages during POST that alerts you of system events and boot status. In case of a boot failure, you will hear the specific cause of the problem. These POST messages are customizable using the Winbond Voice Editor software that came with your package. You can record your own messages to replace the default messages. 3.3.1 3.3.1 3.3.1 3.3.1 3.3.1 Vocal POST messages Vocal POST messages Vocal POST messages Vocal POST messages Vocal POST messages Following is a list of the default POST messages and the corresponding actions you can take: POST Message POST Message POST Message POST Message POST Message Action Action Action Action Action No CPU installed ⢠Install a supported processor to the CPU socket. See section â2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU)â for details. System failed CPU test ⢠Check the CPU if properly installed. ⢠Call ASUS technical support for assistance. See the ASUS contact information on the inside front cover of this user guide. System failed memory test ⢠Install supported DDR2 DIMMs into the memory sockets. ⢠Check if the DIMMs on the DIMM sockets are properly installed. ⢠Make sure that your DIMMs are not defective. ⢠Refer to section â2.4 System memoryâ for instructions on installing a DIMM. System failed VGA test ⢠Install a PCI graphics card into one of the PCI slots, or a PCI Express AGP card into the PCI Express x16 slot. ⢠Make sure that your graphics card is not defective. System failed due to CPU ⢠Check your CPU overclocking settings in the BIOS setup and restore the default CPU parameters. No keyboard detected ⢠Check if your keyboard is properly connected to the purple PS/2 connector on the rear panel. ⢠See section â2.7.1 Rear panel connectorsâ for the location of the connector. No IDE hard disk detected ⢠Make sure you have connected an IDE hard disk drive to one of the IDE connectors on the motherboard.
3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up POST Message POST Message POST Message POST Message POST Message Action Action Action Action Action CPU temperature too high ⢠Check if the CPU fan is working properly. CPU fan failed ⢠Check the CPU fan and make sure it turns on after you apply power to the system. ⢠Make sure that your CPU fan supports the fan speed detection function. CPU voltage out of range ⢠Check your power supply and make sure it is not defective. ⢠Call ASUS technical support for assistance. See the âASUS contact informationâ on the inside front cover of this user guide. Computer now booting from operating ⢠No action required system You can enable or disable the ASUS POST Reporter⢠in the Speech Speech Speech Speech Speech Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration option in the BIOS setup. See section 4.4.8 for details.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-5 3.3.2 3.3.2 3.3.2 3.3.2 3.3.2 Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor The Winbond Voice Editor software allows you to customize the vocal POST messages. You can install this application from the support CD. Launching the Voice Editor Launching the Voice Editor Launching the Voice Editor Launching the Voice Editor Launching the Voice Editor You can launch the program from the Windows ® desktop by clicking Start Start Start Start Start > All Programs > Winbond Voice Editor > Voice Editor > All Programs > Winbond Voice Editor > Voice Editor > All Programs > Winbond Voice Editor > Voice Editor > All Programs > Winbond Voice Editor > Voice Editor > All Programs > Winbond Voice Editor > Voice Editor . The Winbond Voice Editor screen appears. Playing the default wave files Playing the default wave files Playing the default wave files Playing the default wave files Playing the default wave files To play the default wave files, simply click on a POST event on the left side of the screen, then click the Play button. Default Messages Default Messages Default Messages Default Messages Default Messages POST Events POST Events POST Events POST Events POST Events To avoid conflicts, do not run the Winbond Voice Editor while running the ASUS PC Probe application. The default language setting is English.
3-6 3-6 3-6 3-6 3-6 Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up 3. Click the Write Write Write Write Write button from the Voice Editor main window to update the EEPROM. 4. Click Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes t o confirm. Changing the default language Changing the default language Changing the default language Changing the default language Changing the default language To change the default language: 1. Click the Load Load Load Load Load button from the Voice Editor main window. A window with the available languages appears. 2. Select your desired language, then click Open Open Open Open Open . The event messages for the language you selected appear on the Voice Editor main window. Not all events on some languages have a corresponding message due to file size constraints. The next time you boot your computer, the ASUS Post Reporter announces the messages in the selected language.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 3-7 3-7 3-7 3-7 3-7 Customizing your POST messages Customizing your POST messages Customizing your POST messages Customizing your POST messages Customizing your POST messages The Voice Editor application allows you to record your own POST messages if your language is not supported or if you wish to to replace the pre-installed wave files. To customize your POST messages. 1. Launch the Voice Editor application and note the list of POST events on the leftmost column of the screen. 2. Prepare your message for each event. 3. Use a recording software (e.g. Windows ® Recorder) to record your messages, then save the messages as wave files (.WAV). 4. From the Voice Editor screen, click the Add Add Add Add Add button to display the Add Wave File Add Wave File Add Wave File Add Wave File Add Wave File window. 5. Copy the wave files that you recorded to the database, then close the window when done. ⢠The total compressed size for all the wave files must not exceed 1Mbit, so keep your messages as short as possible. ⢠To keep file sizes small, save your files at a low quality. For example, use 8-bit, mono quality at 22Khz sampling rate. ⢠Create a separate folder for your wave files so you can locate them easily.
3-8 3-8 3-8 3-8 3-8 Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up If you receive an error message telling you that the files exceed the total allowable size, do any or all of the following: ⢠Shorten your messages. ⢠Save the wave files at a lower quality ⢠Do not include seldom-used events like FDD Detection, IDE HDD Detection, etc. 6. Select a POST event on the Voice Editor main window, then click the Edit Edit Edit Edit Edit button. The Event Sound Editor Event Sound Editor Event Sound Editor Event Sound Editor Event Sound Editor window appears. 7. Locate and select your wave file for the event, then click on the arrow opposite Voice1. The file you select appears on the space next to it. 8. Click OK OK OK OK O K to return to the Voice Editor main window. 9. Do steps 6 to 8 for the other events. 10. When done, click Save Save Save Save S a v e. A window appears prompting you to save your configuration. 11. Type a file name with an .flh .flh .flh .flh .flh extension, then click Save. 12. Click the Write Write Write Write Write button to compress the file and copy into the EEPROM. 13. Click Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes o n the confirmation window that appears.
4 BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change the system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe Chapter summary 4 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ........................................ 4-1 4.2 BIOS setup program ........................................................... 4-11 4.3 Main menu .......................................................................... 4-14 4.4 Advanced menu .................................................................. 4-19 4.5 Power menu ........................................................................ 4-31 4.6 Boot menu .......................................................................... 4-36 4.7 Exit menu ........................................................................... 4-41
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS The following utilities allow you to manage and update the motherboard Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) setup. 1. ASUS AFUDOS ASUS AFUDOS ASUS AFUDOS ASUS AFUDOS ASUS AFUDOS (Updates the BIOS in DOS mode using a bootable floppy disk.) 2. ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 (Updates the BIOS using a bootable floppy disk or the motherboard support CD when the BIOS file fails or gets corrupted.) 3. ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash (Updates the BIOS in DOS mode using a floppy disk or the motherboard support CD.) 4. ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update (Updates the BIOS in Windows ® environment.) Refer to the corresponding sections for details on these utilities. 4.1.1 4.1.1 4.1.1 4.1.1 4.1.1 Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk 1. Do either one of the following to create a bootable floppy disk. DOS environment a. Insert a 1.44MB floppy disk into the drive. b. At the DOS prompt, type format A:/S then press <Enter>. Windows ® XP environment a. Insert a 1.44 MB floppy disk to the floppy disk drive. b. Click Start Start Start Start Start from the Windows ® desktop, then select My My My My My Computer Computer Computer Computer Computer . c. Select the 3 1/2 Floppy Drive icon. d. Click File File File File File from the menu, then select Format Format Format Format Format . A Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Floppy Disk Floppy Disk Floppy Disk Floppy Disk Floppy Disk window appears. e. Windows Windows Windows Windows Windows ® ® ® ® ® XP users: XP users: XP users: XP users: XP users: Select Create an MS-DOS startup Create an MS-DOS startup Create an MS-DOS startup Create an MS-DOS startup Create an MS-DOS startup disk disk disk disk disk from the format options field, then click Start Start Start Start Start . Save a copy of the original motherboard BIOS file to a bootable floppy disk in case you need to restore the BIOS in the future. Copy the original motherboard BIOS using the ASUS Update or AFUDOS utilities.
4-2 4-2 4-2 4-2 4-2 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.1.2 4.1.2 4.1.2 4.1.2 4.1.2 AFUDOS utility AFUDOS utility AFUDOS utility AFUDOS utility AFUDOS utility The AFUDOS utility allows you to update the BIOS file in DOS environment using a bootable floppy disk with the updated BIOS file. This utility also allows you to copy the current BIOS file that you can use as backup when the BIOS fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. Copying the current BIOS Copying the current BIOS Copying the current BIOS Copying the current BIOS Copying the current BIOS To copy the current BIOS file using the AFUDOS utility: Windows ® 2000 environment To create a set of boot disks for Windows ® 2000: a. Insert a formatted, high density 1.44 MB floppy disk into the drive. b. Insert the Windows ® 2000 CD to the optical drive. c. Click Start Start Start Start Start , then select Run Run Run Run Run . d. In the Open Open Open Open Open field, type D:\bootdisk\makeboot a: assuming that D is your optical drive letter. e. Press <Enter>, then follow screen instructions to continue. 2. Copy the original or the latest motherboard BIOS file to the bootable floppy disk. Main filename Main filename Main filename Main filename Main filename Extension name Extension name Extension name Extension name Extension name 1. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable floppy disk you created earlier. 2. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /o[filename] where the [filename] is any user-assigned filename not more than eight alphanumeric characters for the main filename and three alphanumeric characters for the extension name. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom ⢠Make sure that the floppy disk is not write-protected and has at least 600 KB free space to save the file. ⢠The succeeding BIOS screens are for reference only. The actual BIOS screen displays may not be same as shown.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 The utility returns to the DOS prompt after copying the current BIOS file. 3. Press <Enter>. The utility copies the current BIOS file to the floppy disk. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom AMI Firmware Update Utility - Version 1.19(ASUS V2.07(03.11.24BB)) Copyright (C) 2002 American Megatrends, Inc. All rights reserved. Reading flash ..... done Write to file...... ok A:\> 2. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable floppy disk you created earlier. 3. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /i[filename] where [filename] is the latest or the original BIOS file on the bootable floppy disk. Updating the BIOS file Updating the BIOS file Updating the BIOS file Updating the BIOS file Updating the BIOS file To update the BIOS file using the AFUDOS utility: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) and download the latest BIOS file for the motherboard. Save the BIOS file to a bootable floppy disk. A:\>afudos /iP5AD2.rom Write the BIOS filename on a piece of paper. You need to type the exact BIOS filename at the DOS prompt.
4-4 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-4 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 5. The utility returns to the DOS prompt after the BIOS update process is completed. Reboot the system from the hard disk drive. A:\>afudos /iP5AD2.rom AMI Firmware Update Utility - Version 1.19(ASUS V2.07(03.11.24BB)) Copyright (C) 2002 American Megatrends, Inc. All rights reserved. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during flash BIOS Reading file ..... done Reading flash .... done Search bootblock version: 0% 100% Advance check .... Erasing flash .... done Writing flash .... 0x0008CC00 (9%) 4. The utility verifies the file and starts updating the BIOS. Do not shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure! A:\>afudos /iP5AD2.rom AMI Firmware Update Utility - Version 1.19(ASUS V2.07(03.11.24BB)) Copyright (C) 2002 American Megatrends, Inc. All rights reserved. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during flash BIOS Reading file ..... done Reading flash .... done Search bootblock version: 0% 100% Advance check .... Erasing flash .... done Writing flash .... done Verifying flash .. DONE Please restart your computer A:\>
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-5 4-5 4-5 4-5 4-5 4.1.3 4.1.3 4.1.3 4.1.3 4.1.3 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility The ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 is an auto recovery tool that allows you to restore the BIOS file when it fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. You can update a corrupted BIOS file using the motherboard support CD or the floppy disk that contains the updated BIOS file. Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk To recover the BIOS from a floppy disk: 1. Turn on the system. 2. Insert the floppy disk with the original or updated BIOS file to the floppy disk drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the floppy disk for the original or updated BIOS file. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... Floppy found! Reading file âP5AD2.ROMâ. Completed. Start flashing... When found, the utility reads the BIOS file and starts flashing the corrupted BIOS file. DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! ⢠Prepare the motherboard support CD or the floppy disk containing the updated motherboard BIOS before using this utility. ⢠Make sure that you rename the original or updated BIOS file in the floppy disk to P5AD2.ROM P5AD2.ROM P5AD2.ROM P5AD2.ROM P5AD2.ROM .
4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup The recovered BIOS may not be the latest BIOS version for this motherboard. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file. Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD To recover the BIOS from the support CD: 1. Remove any floppy disk from the floppy disk drive, then turn on the system. 2. Insert the support CD to the optical drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the floppy disk for the original or updated BIOS file. 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... Floppy not found! Checking for CD-ROM... CD-ROM found! Reading file âP5AD2.ROMâ. Completed. Start flashing... When no floppy disk is found, the utility automatically checks the optical drive for the original or updated BIOS file. The utility then updates the corrupted BIOS file. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy...
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-7 4-7 4-7 4-7 4-7 4.1.4 4.1.4 4.1.4 4.1.4 4.1.4 ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility The ASUS EZ Flash feature allows you to update the BIOS without having to go through the long process of booting from a floppy disk and using a DOS-based utility. The EZ Flash utility is built-in the BIOS chip so it is accessible by pressing <Alt> <F2> during the Power-On Self Tests (POST). To update the BIOS using EZ Flash: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file for the motherboard and rename the same to P5AD2.ROM P5AD2.ROM P5AD2.ROM P5AD2.ROM P5AD2.ROM . 2. Save the BIOS file to a floppy disk, then restart the system. 3. Press <Alt> <F2> during POST to display the following. EZFlash starting BIOS update Checking for floppy... 4. Insert the floppy disk that contains the BIOS file to the floppy disk drive. When the correct BIOS file is found, EZ Flash performs the BIOS update process and automatically reboots the system when done. EZFlash starting BIOS update Checking for floppy... Floppy found! Reading file âP5AD2.româ. Completed. Start erasing.......| Start programming...| Flashed successfully. Rebooting. ⢠Do not shutdown or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure! ⢠A âFloppy not found!â error message appears if there is no floppy disk in the drive. A âP5AD2.ROM not found!â error message appears if the correct BIOS file is not found in the floppy disk. Make sure that you rename the BIOS file to P5AD2.ROM.
4-8 4-8 4-8 4-8 4-8 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update To install ASUS Update: 1. Place the support CD in the optical drive. The Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers menu appears. 2. Click the Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities tab, then click Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX . See page 5-4 for the Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities screen menu. 3. The ASUS Update utility is copied to your system. 4.1.5 4.1.5 4.1.5 4.1.5 4.1.5 ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility The ASUS Update is a utility that allows you to manage, save, and update the motherboard BIOS in Windows ® environment. The ASUS Update utility allows you to: ⢠Save the current BIOS file ⢠Download the latest BIOS file from the Internet ⢠Update the BIOS from an updated BIOS file ⢠Update the BIOS directly from the Internet, and ⢠View the BIOS version information. This utility is available in the support CD that comes with the motherboard package. ASUS Update requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP). Quit all Windows ® applications before you update the BIOS using this utility.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-9 4-9 4-9 4-9 4-9 3. Select the ASUS FTP site nearest you to avoid network traffic, or click Auto Select Auto Select Auto Select Auto Select Auto Select . Click Next Next Next Next Next . Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet To update the BIOS through the Internet: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows ® desktop by clicking Start Start Start Start Start > Programs Programs Programs Programs Programs > ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate . T h e ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from Update BIOS from Update BIOS from Update BIOS from Update BIOS from the Internet the Internet the Internet the Internet the Internet option from the drop-down menu, then click Next Next Next Next Next .
4-10 4-10 4-10 4-10 4-10 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file To update the BIOS through a BIOS file: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows ® desktop by clicking Start Start Start Start Start > Programs Programs Programs Programs Programs > ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate . The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a file file file file file option from the drop-down menu, then click Next Next Next Next Next . 4. From the FTP site, select the BIOS version that you wish to download. Click Next. 5. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process. The ASUS Update utility is capable of updating itself through the Internet. Always update the utility to avail all its features. 3. Locate the BIOS file from the Open Open Open Open Open window, then click Save Save Save Save Save . 4. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-11 4-11 4-11 4-11 4-11 4.2 BIOS setup program This motherboard supports a programmable firmware chip that you can update using the provided utility described in section â 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS.â Use the BIOS Setup program when you are installing a motherboard, reconfiguring your system, or prompted to âRun Setupâ. This section explains how to configure your system using this utility. Even if you are not prompted to use the Setup program, you can change the configuration of your computer in the future. For example, you can enable the security password feature or change the power management settings. This requires you to reconfigure your system using the BIOS Setup program so that the computer can recognize these changes and record them in the CMOS RAM of the firmware hub. The firmware hub on the motherboard stores the Setup utility. When you start up the computer, the system provides you with the opportunity to run this program. Press <Del> during the Power-On-Self-Test (POST) to enter the Setup utility; otherwise, POST continues with its test routines. If you wish to enter Setup after POST, restart the system by pressing <Ctrl Alt Delete>, or by pressing the reset button on the system chassis. You can also restart by turning the system off and then back on. Do this last option only if the first two failed. The Setup program is designed to make it as easy to use as possible. Being a menu-driven program, it lets you scroll through the various sub-menus and make your selections from the available options using the navigation keys. ⢠The default BIOS settings for this motherboard apply for most conditions to ensure optimum performance. If the system becomes unstable after changing any BIOS settings, load the default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability. Select the Load Load Load Load Load Default Settings Default Settings Default Settings Default Settings Default Settings item under the Exit Menu. See section â4.7 Exit Menu.â ⢠The BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference purposes only, and may not exactly match what you see on your screen. ⢠Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file for this motherboard.
4-12 4-12 4-12 4-12 4-12 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.2.2 4.2.2 4.2.2 4.2.2 4.2.2 Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar The menu bar on top of the screen has the following main items: Main Main Main Main Main For changing the basic system configuration Advanced Advanced Advanced Advanced Advanced For changing the advanced system settings Power Power Power Power Power For changing the advanced power management (APM) configuration Boot Boot Boot Boot Boot For changing the system boot configuration Exit Exit Exit Exit Exit For selecting the exit options and loading default settings To select an item on the menu bar, press the right or left arrow key on the keyboard until the desired item is highlighted. 4.2.3 4.2.3 4.2.3 4.2.3 4.2.3 Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys At the bottom right corner of a menu screen are the navigation keys for that particular menu. Use the navigation keys to select items in the menu and change the settings. 4.2.1 4.2.1 4.2.1 4.2.1 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen Some of the navigation keys differ from one screen to another. System Time [11:10:19] System Date [Thu 03/27/2003] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] Primary IDE Master :[ST320413A] Primary IDE Slave :[ASUS CD-S340] Secondary IDE Master :[Not Detected] Secondary IDE Slave :[Not Detected] Third IDE Master :[Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master :[Not Detected] IDE Configuration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a field. Use [ ] or [-] to configure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys General help General help General help General help General help Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-13 4-13 4-13 4-13 4-13 4.2.4 4.2.4 4.2.4 4.2.4 4.2.4 Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items The highlighted item on the menu bar displays the specific items for that menu. For example, selecting Main Main Main Main Main shows the Main menu items. The other items (Advanced, Power, Boot, and Exit) on the menu bar have their respective menu items. 4.2.5 4.2.5 4.2.5 4.2.5 4.2.5 Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items A solid triangle before each item on any menu screen means that the iteam has a sub-menu. To display the sub-menu, select the item and press <Enter>. 4.2.6 4.2.6 4.2.6 4.2.6 4.2.6 Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields These fields show the values for the menu items. If an item is user- configurable, you can change the value of the field opposite the item. You cannot select an item that is not user-configurable. A configurable field is enclosed in brackets, and is highlighted when selected. To change the value of a field, select it then press <Enter> to display a list of options. Refer to â4.2.7 Pop-up window.â 4.2.7 4.2.7 4.2.7 4.2.7 4.2.7 Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Select a menu item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up window with the configuration options for that item. 4.2.8 4.2.8 4.2.8 4.2.8 4.2.8 Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar A scroll bar appears on the right side of a menu screen when there are items that do not fit on the screen. Press the Up/Down arrow keys or <Page Up> / <Page Down> keys to display the other items on the screen. 4.2.9 4.2.9 4.2.9 4.2.9 4.2.9 General help General help General help General help General help At the top right corner of the menu screen is a brief description of the selected item. System Time [11:10:19] System Date [Thu 03/27/2003] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] Primary IDE Master :[ST320413A] Primary IDE Slave :[ASUS CD-S340] Secondary IDE Master :[Not Detected] Secondary IDE Slave :[Not Detected] Third IDE Master :[Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master :[Not Detected] IDE Configuration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a field. Use [ ] or [-] to configure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Main menu items Main menu items Main menu items Main menu items Main menu items Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Advanced Chipset settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in the sections below may cause system to malfunction. Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Memory Acceleration Mode [Auto] DRAM Idle Timer [Auto] DRAm Refresh Rate [Auto] Graphic Adapter Priority [AGP/PCI] Graphics Aperture Size [ 64 MB] Spread Spectrum [Enabled] ICH Delayed Transaction [Enabled] MPS Revision [1.4] Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window
4-14 4-14 4-14 4-14 4-14 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.3 Main menu When you enter the BIOS Setup program, the Main Main Main Main Main menu screen appears, giving you an overview of the basic system information. 4.3.1 4.3.1 4.3.1 4.3.1 4.3.1 System Time [xx:xx:xxxx] System Time [xx:xx:xxxx] System Time [xx:xx:xxxx] System Time [xx:xx:xxxx] System Time [xx:xx:xxxx] Allows you to set the system time. 4.3.2 4.3.2 4.3.2 4.3.2 4.3.2 System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] Allows you to set the system date. 4.3.3 4.3.3 4.3.3 4.3.3 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Sets the type of floppy drive installed. Configuration options: [Disabled] [360K, 5.25 in.] [1.2M , 5.25 in.] [720K , 3.5 in.] [1.44M, 3.5 in.] [2.88M, 3.5 in.] 4.3.4 4.3.4 4.3.4 4.3.4 4.3.4 Language [English] Language [English] Language [English] Language [English] Language [English] Allows you to choose the BIOS language version from the options. Configuration options: [English] [Français] [Deutsch] [Japanese] [Chinese (GB)] [Chinese BIG5] Refer to section â4.2.1 BIOS menu screenâ for information on the menu screen items and how to navigate through them. Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a field. Use [ ] or [-] to configure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit System Time [11:51:19] System Date [Thu 05/07/2004] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] Primary IDE Master : [ST320413A] Primary IDE Slave : [ASUS CD-S520/A] Third IDE Master : [Not Detected] Third IDE Slave : [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master : [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Slave : [Not Detected] IDE Configuration System Information
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-15 4-15 4-15 4-15 4-15 4.3.5 4.3.5 4.3.5 4.3.5 4.3.5 Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave The BIOS automatically detects the connected IDE devices. There is a separate sub-menu for each IDE device. Select a device item, then press <Enter> to display the IDE device information. The BIOS automatically detects the values opposite the dimmed items (Device, Vendor, Size, LBA Mode, Block Mode, PIO Mode, Async DMA, Ultra DMA, and SMART monitoring). These values are not user-configurable. These items show N/A if no IDE device is installed in the system. Type [Auto] Type [Auto] Type [Auto] Type [Auto] Type [Auto] Selects the type of IDE drive. Setting to [Auto] allows automatic selection of the appropriate IDE device type. Select [CDROM] if you are specifically configuring a CD-ROM drive. Select [ARMD] (ATAPI Removable Media Device) if your device is either a ZIP, LS-120, or MO drive. Configuration options: [Not Installed] [Auto] [CDROM] [ARMD] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Enables or disables the LBA mode. Setting to [Auto] enables the LBA mode if the device supports this mode, and if the device was not previously formatted with LBA mode disabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Enables or disables data multi-sectors transfers. When set to [Auto], the data transfer from and to the device occurs multiple sectors at a time if the device supports multi-sector transfer feature. When set to [Disabled], the data transfer from and to the device occurs one sector at a time. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Select the type of device connected to the system. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Primary IDE Master Device : Hard Disk Vendor : ST320413A Size : 20.0GB LBA Mode : Supported Block Mode : 16 Sectors PIO Mode : Supported Async DMA : MultiWord DMA-2 Ultra DMA : Ultra DMA-5 SMART Monitoring: Supported Type [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Block(Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled]
4-16 4-16 4-16 4-16 4-16 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup PIO Mode [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] Selects the PIO mode. Configuration options: [Auto] [0] [1] [2] [3] [4] SMART Monitoring [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] Sets the Smart Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology. Configuration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] Enables or disables 32-bit data transfer. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.3.6 4.3.6 4.3.6 4.3.6 4.3.6 IDE Configuration IDE Configuration IDE Configuration IDE Configuration IDE Configuration The items in this menu allow you to set or change the configurations for the IDE devices installed in the system. Select an item then press <Enter> if you wish to configure the item. Configure SATA As [Standard IDE] Configure SATA As [Standard IDE] Configure SATA As [Standard IDE] Configure SATA As [Standard IDE] Configure SATA As [Standard IDE] Allows you to set the Serial ATA devices connected to the Serial ATA connectors as IDE, AHCI, or RAID sets. Configuration options: [Standard IDE] [AHCI] [RAID] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Allows selection of the IDE operation mode depending on the installed operating system (OS). Set to [Enhanced Mode] if you are using native OS including Windows ® 2000/XP. Configuration options: [Compatible Mode] [Enhanced Mode] Enhanced Mode Support On [S-ATA] Allows you to use native OS on Serial ATA and Parallel ATA ports. It is recommend that you do not change the default setting for better OS compatibility. In this setting, you may use legacy OS on the Parallel ATA ports only if you do not install any Serial ATA device. IDE Configuration Configure SATA As [Standard IDE] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Enhanced Mode Support On [S-ATA] IDE Detect Time Out (Sec) [35] When in AHCI/RAID mode SATA controller is forced to Native mode.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-17 4-17 4-17 4-17 4-17 The P-ATA S-ATA and P-ATA options are for advanced users only. If you set to any of these options and encountered problems, revert to the default setting S-ATA S-ATA S-ATA S-ATA S-ATA . Configuration options: [P-ATA S-ATA] [S-ATA] [P-ATA] The Onboard IDE Operate Mode Onboard IDE Operate Mode Onboard IDE Operate Mode Onboard IDE Operate Mode Onboard IDE Operate Mode and its sub-menu items appear only when the Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As item is set to [Standard IDE]. Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROOM [Enabled] Enables or disables the onboard Serial ATA boot ROM. This item appears only when the Configure SATA As item is set as RAID. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM appears only when the Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As item is set to [RAID]. ALPE and ASP [Disabled] ALPE and ASP [Disabled] ALPE and ASP [Disabled] ALPE and ASP [Disabled] ALPE and ASP [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Agressive Link Power Management (ALPE) and Aggressive Slumber/Partial (ASP) management features. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Stagger Spinup Support [Enabled] Enables or disables the stagger spinup support. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] AHCI Port 3 Interlock Switch [Disabled] Enables or disables the Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI) Port 3 interlock switch. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The ALPE and ASP ALPE and ASP ALPE and ASP ALPE and ASP ALPE and ASP and its sub-menu appear only when the Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As item is set to [AHCI]. IDE Detect Time Out [35] IDE Detect Time Out [35] IDE Detect Time Out [35] IDE Detect Time Out [35] IDE Detect Time Out [35] Selects the time out value for detecting ATA/ATAPI devices. Configuration options: [0] [5] [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [35]
4-18 4-18 4-18 4-18 4-18 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.3.7 4.3.7 4.3.7 4.3.7 4.3.7 System Information System Information System Information System Information System Information This menu gives you an overview of the general system specifications. The BIOS automatically detects the items in this menu. AMI BIOS AMI BIOS AMI BIOS AMI BIOS AMI BIOS Displays the auto-detected BIOS information Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor Displays the auto-detected CPU specification System Memory System Memory System Memory System Memory System Memory Displays the auto-detected system memory Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit AMIBIOS Version : 08.00.10 Build Date : 06/11/04 Processor Type : Genuine Intel(R) CPU 3.20GHz Speed : 2800 MHz Count : 1 System Memory Size : 1024MB
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-19 4-19 4-19 4-19 4-19 4.4 Advanced menu The Advanced menu items allow you to change the settings for the CPU and other system devices. JumperFree Configuration LAN Cable Status USB Configuration CPU Configuration Chipset Onboard Devices Configuration PCI PnP Speech Configuration 4.4.1 4.4.1 4.4.1 4.4.1 4.4.1 JumperFree Configuration JumperFree Configuration JumperFree Configuration JumperFree Configuration JumperFree Configuration AI Overclocking [Auto] AI Overclocking [Auto] AI Overclocking [Auto] AI Overclocking [Auto] AI Overclocking [Auto] Allows you to select the overclocking options to achieve the desired CPU internal frequency. Select either one of the preset overclocking options. Configuration options: [Manual] [Auto] [Standard] [Overclock Profile] [AI NOS]. Selecting a very high CPU frequency may cause the system to become unstable! If this happens, revert to the default setting. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Configure System Frequency/Voltage AI Overclocking [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Select the targe CPU frequency, and the relevant parameters will be auto-adjusted. Frequencies higher than CPU manufacturer recommends are not guaranteed to be stable. If the system becomes unstable, return to the default. Take caution when changing the settings of the Advanced menu items. Incorrect field values can cause the system to malfunction. Adjust system frequency/voltage.
4-20 4-20 4-20 4-20 4-20 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Performance Mode [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Allows you to select the system performance mode. Configuration options: [Auto] [Standard] [Turbo] The following item appears only when you set the AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking item to [Manual]. CPU Frequency [XXX] CPU Frequency [XXX] CPU Frequency [XXX] CPU Frequency [XXX] CPU Frequency [XXX] Displays the frequency sent by the clock generator to the system bus and PCI bus. The value of this item is auto-detected by the BIOS. Use the < > < > < > < > < > and <-> <-> <-> <-> < - > keys to adjust the CPU frequency. You can also type the desired CPU frequency using the numberic keypad. The values range from 100 to 400. Refer to the table below for the correct Front Side Bus and CPU External Frequency settings. FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus CPU External Frequency CPU External Frequency CPU External Frequency CPU External Frequency CPU External Frequency FSB 800 200 MHz FSB 533 133 MHz FSB 400 100 MHz DRAM Frequency [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] Allows you to set the DDR operating frequency. Configuration options: [Auto] [400MHz] [533MHz] [600MHz] Selecting a very high DRAM frequency may cause the system to become unstable! If this happens, revert to the default setting. PCI Express Frequency [Auto] PCI Express Frequency [Auto] PCI Express Frequency [Auto] PCI Express Frequency [Auto] PCI Express Frequency [Auto] Allows you to set the PCI Express frequency. This item is set to [Auto] by default. Configuration options: [Auto] [90]...[133] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] Allows you to synchronize the PCI frequency with the PCI Express or CPU frequency. Configuration options: [To CPU] [33.33MHz] [ Auto] Spread Spectrum [Auto] Spread Spectrum [Auto] Spread Spectrum [Auto] Spread Spectrum [Auto] Spread Spectrum [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable the clock generator spread spectrum. Configuration options: [ Disabled] [Enabled] [ Auto]
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-21 4-21 4-21 4-21 4-21 The following items also appear when the AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking item is set to [AI NOS]. Memory Voltage [Auto] Memory Voltage [Auto] Memory Voltage [Auto] Memory Voltage [Auto] Memory Voltage [Auto] Allows you to select the DDR2 reference voltage. Configuration options: [1.80V] [1.90V] [2.00V] [2.10V] [Auto] Refer to the DDR2 documentation before adjusting the memory voltage. Setting a very high memory voltage may damage the memory module(s)! Chipset Core Voltage [Auto] Chipset Core Voltage [Auto] Chipset Core Voltage [Auto] Chipset Core Voltage [Auto] Chipset Core Voltage [Auto] Allows you to select the chipset core voltage. Configuration options: [1.50V] [1.60V] [Auto] Refer to the CPU documentation before setting the chipset core voltage. Setting a high chipset core voltage may damage the chipset! CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] Allows you to select the CPU VCore voltage. Configuration options: [Auto] [1.7000V] [1.6875V] [1.6750V] [1.6625V] [1.6500V] [1.6375V] [1.6250V] [1.6125V] [1.6000V] [1.5875V] [1.5750V] [1.5625V] [1.5500V] [1.5375V] [1.5250V] [1.5125V] [1.5000V] [1.4875V] [1.4750V] [1.4625V] [1.4500V] [1.4375V] [1.4250V] [1.4125V] [1.4000V] [1.3875V] Setting a high Vcore voltage may damage the CPU! FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] Allows you to select the front side bus termination voltage. Configuration options: [1.20V] [1.40V] [Auto] The following item appears only when the AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking item is set to [Overclock Profile]. Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Allows you to overclock the CPU speed through the available preset values. Configuration options: [Overclock 5%] [FSB888/DDR2-667] [Overclock 10%] [FSB900/DDR2-600] [Overclock 15%] [FSB950/DDR2-633] [Overclock 20%] [FSB1000/DDR2-667] [Overclock 30%] [FSB1066/DDR2-533] [FSB1066/DDR2-710]
4-22 4-22 4-22 4-22 4-22 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4.2 4.4.2 4.4.2 4.4.2 4.4.2 LAN Cable Status LAN Cable Status LAN Cable Status LAN Cable Status LAN Cable Status This menu displays the status of the Local Area Network (LAN) cable connected to the LAN (RJ-45) port. The following item appears only when the AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking item is set to [AI NOS]. NOS Mode [Auto] NOS Mode [Auto] NOS Mode [Auto] NOS Mode [Auto] NOS Mode [Auto] Allows you to set the NOS mode for various CPU loading. Selecting [Auto] allows the NOS to automatically overclock the CPU speed based on the CPU loading. Configuration options: [Auto] [Standard] [Sensitive] [Heavy Load] The following item appears only when the NOS Mode NOS Mode NOS Mode NOS Mode NOS Mode item is set to [Standard], [Sensitive], or [Heavy]. Turbo NOS [Disabled] Turbo NOS [Disabled] Turbo NOS [Disabled] Turbo NOS [Disabled] Turbo NOS [Disabled] Allows you to disable or set the overclock percentage for the selected NOS Mode. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Overclock 3%] [Overclock 5%] [Overclock 7%] [Overclock 10%] [Overclock 15%] [Overclock 20%] Twin Turbo NOS [Disabled] Twin Turbo NOS [Disabled] Twin Turbo NOS [Disabled] Twin Turbo NOS [Disabled] Twin Turbo NOS [Disabled] Allows you to disable or set the overclock percentage for the selected Turbo NOS. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Overclock 3%] [Overclock 5%] [Overclock 7%] [Overclock 10%] [Overclock 15%] [Overclock 20%] [Overclock 30%] POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable LAN cable check during POST. When enabled, the menu reports the cable faults or shorts, and displays the point (length) where the fault or short is detected. Configuration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] LAN Cable Status Pair Status Length 1-2 Normal N/A 3-6 Normal N/A 4-5 Normal N/A 7-8 Normal N/A Check LAN cable during POST.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-23 4-23 4-23 4-23 4-23 4.4.3 4.4.3 4.4.3 4.4.3 4.4.3 USB Configuration USB Configuration USB Configuration USB Configuration USB Configuration The items in this menu allows you to change the USB-related features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the configuration options. USB Function [Enabled] USB Function [Enabled] USB Function [Enabled] USB Function [Enabled] USB Function [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the USB function. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for legacy USB devices. Setting to [Auto] allows the system to detect the presence of USB devices at startup. If detected, the USB controller legacy mode is enabled. If no USB device is detected, the legacy USB support is disabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the USB 2.0 controller. Configuration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] Allows you to set the USB 2.0 controller mode to HiSpeed (480 Mbps) or FullSpeed (12 Mbps). Configuration options: [FullSpeed] [HiSpeed] The Module Version Module Version Module Version Module Version Module Version and USB Devices Enabled USB Devices Enabled USB Devices Enabled USB Devices Enabled USB Devices Enabled items show the auto-detected values. If no USB device is detected, the item shows None None None None None . USB Configuration Module Version - 2.23.2-9.4 USB Devices Enabled: None USB Function [Enabled] Legacy USB Support [Auto] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] Enables USB host controllers.
4-24 4-24 4-24 4-24 4-24 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4.4 4.4.4 4.4.4 4.4.4 4.4.4 CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration The items in this menu show the CPU-related information that the BIOS automatically detects. Ratio CMOS Setting [ 8] Ratio CMOS Setting [ 8] Ratio CMOS Setting [ 8] Ratio CMOS Setting [ 8] Ratio CMOS Setting [ 8] Sets the ratio between the CPU core clock and the Front Side Bus frequency. The BIOS auto-detects the default value of this item. Use the < > < > < > < > < > or <-> <-> <-> <-> < - > keys to adjust the values. Configuration options: [ 8]...[28] VID CMOS Setting [ 45] VID CMOS Setting [ 45] VID CMOS Setting [ 45] VID CMOS Setting [ 45] VID CMOS Setting [ 45] Allows you to set the VID CMOS setting at which the processor is to run. The BIOS auto-detects the default value of this item. Use the < > < > < > < > < > or <-> <-> <-> <-> <-> keys to adjust the values. You can only adjust the Ratio CMOS Ratio CMOS Ratio CMOS Ratio CMOS Ratio CMOS and the VID CMOS VID CMOS VID CMOS VID CMOS VID CMOS settings if you installed an unlocked CPU. Refer to the CPU documentation for details. Microcode Updation [Enabled] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the microcode updation. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Setting this item to [Enabled] allows legacy operating systems to boot even without support for CPUs with extended CPUID functions. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] When set to [Auto], the BIOS automatically checks the CPUâs capability to enable the C1E support. In C1E mode, the CPU power consumption is lower when idle. Configuration options: [Auto] [Disabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Configure Advanced CPU settings Manufacturer: Intel Brand String: Genuine Intel(R) CPU 3.20GHz Frequency : 3200 MHz FSB Speed : 800 MHz Cache L1 : 16 KB Cache L2 : 1024 KB Cache L3 : 0 KB Ratio Status: Unlocked Ratio Actual Value : 14 Ratio CMOS Setting: [ 8] VID CMOS Setting: [ 45] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Max CPUID Value Limit: [Disabled] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] Hyper Threading Technology [Enabled] Sets the ratio between CPU Core Clock and the FSB Frequency. NOTE: If an invalid ratio is set in CMOS then actual and setpoint values may differ.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-25 4-25 4-25 4-25 4-25 Advanced Chipset Settings Advanced Chipset Settings Advanced Chipset Settings Advanced Chipset Settings Advanced Chipset Settings Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] When this item is enabled, the DRAM timing parameters are set according to the DRAM SPD (Serial Presence Detect). When disabled, you can manually set the DRAM timing parameters through the DRAM sub-items. The following sub-items appear when this item is Disabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] DRAM CAS# Latency [5 Clocks] Controls the latency between the SDRAM read command and the time the data actually becomes available. Configuration options: [5 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [3 Clocks] DRAM RAS# Precharge [4 Clocks] Controls the idle clocks after issuing a precharge command to the DDR SDRAM. Configuration options: [2 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [5 Clocks] DRAM RAS# to CAS# Delay [4 Clocks] Controls the latency between the DDR SDRAM active command and the read/write command. Configuration options: [2 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [5 Clocks] 4.4.5 4.4.5 4.4.5 4.4.5 4.4.5 Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset The Chipset menu allows you to change the advanced chipset settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Advanced Chipset Settings Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Hyper Path 2 [Auto] Booting Graphic Adapter Priori [PCI Express/PCI] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] Allows you to disable or set to auto the CPU Internal Thermal Control function. Configuration options: [Auto] [Disabled] Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the processor Hyper-Threading Technology. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Enable or disable DRAM timing.
4-26 4-26 4-26 4-26 4-26 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup DRAM RAS# Activate to Precharge Delay [15 Clocks] Configuration options: [4 Clocks] [5 Clocks] ~ [15 Clocks] DRAM Write Recovery Time [4 Clocks] Configuration options: [2 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [5 Clocks] Hyper Path 2 [Auto] Hyper Path 2 [Auto] Hyper Path 2 [Auto] Hyper Path 2 [Auto] Hyper Path 2 [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Hyper Path 2 feature. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] Booting Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Booting Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Booting Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Booting Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Booting Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Allows selection of the graphics controller to use as primary boot device. Configuration options: [PCI Express/PCI] [PCI/PCI Express] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] Sets the length of the PCI Express graphics card buffer. Configuration options: [Auto] [Long] [Short] Link Latency [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] Sets the PCI Express graphics card link latency. Configuration options: [Auto] [Slow] [Normal] PEG Link Mode [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] Sets the PCI Express graphics card link mode. Configuration options: [Auto] [Slow] [Normal] [Fast] [Faster] PEG Root Control [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] Allows you to enable, disable, or set to automatic the PCI Express graphics card root control. Configuration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] Slot Power [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] Sets the PCI Express graphics card slot power. Configuration options: [Auto] [Light] [Normal] [Heavy] [Heavier]
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-27 4-27 4-27 4-27 4-27 4.4.6 4.4.6 4.4.6 4.4.6 4.4.6 Onboard Devices Configuration Onboard Devices Configuration Onboard Devices Configuration Onboard Devices Configuration Onboard Devices Configuration Azalia Controller [Enabled] Azalia Controller [Enabled] Azalia Controller [Enabled] Azalia Controller [Enabled] Azalia Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the high-definition audio CODEC. Configuration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] Front Panel Support Type [AC97] Front Panel Support Type [AC97] Front Panel Support Type [AC97] Front Panel Support Type [AC97] Front Panel Support Type [AC97] Allows you to set the front panel audio connector (AAAF) mode to legacy ACâ97 or highâdefinition audio depending on the audio standard that the front panel audio module supports. Configuration options: [AC â97] [Azalia] OnBoard 1394 Controller [Enabled] OnBoard 1394 Controller [Enabled] OnBoard 1394 Controller [Enabled] OnBoard 1394 Controller [Enabled] OnBoard 1394 Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard IEEE 1394 controller. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard PCI Express Gigabit LAN controller. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The Gigabit LAN controller does not support S5 Wake-On-LAN function under DOS mode or Windows ® ME. Configure Win627EHF Super IO Chipset Azalia Controller [Enabled] Front Panel Support Type [AC97] Onboard 1394 Controller [Enabled] Onboard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] LAN Option ROM [Disabled] Onboard WIFI Controller [Enabled] ITE8212F Controller [IDE Mode] Detecting Device Time [Quick Mode] Silicon Image Controller [RAID Mode] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] Parallel Port IRQ [IRQ7] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Enable or disable Azalia Controller. LAN Option ROM [Disabled] This item allows you to enable or disable the option ROM in the onboard LAN controller. This item appears only when the Onboard Onboard Onboard Onboard Onboard PCIEX Gbe LAN PCIEX Gbe LAN PCIEX Gbe LAN PCIEX Gbe LAN PCIEX Gbe LAN items are set to Enabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-28 4-28 4-28 4-28 4-28 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup OnBoard WIFI Controller [Enabled] OnBoard WIFI Controller [Enabled] OnBoard WIFI Controller [Enabled] OnBoard WIFI Controller [Enabled] OnBoard WIFI Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard Wi-Fi controller. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] ITE8212F Controller [IDE Mode] ITE8212F Controller [IDE Mode] ITE8212F Controller [IDE Mode] ITE8212F Controller [IDE Mode] ITE8212F Controller [IDE Mode] Allows you to set the onboard ITE ® 8212F IDE RAID controller operating mode. Configuration options: [RAID Mode] [IDE Mode] [Disabled] Detecting Device Time [Quick Mode] Sets the time the ITE8212F IDE RAID controller detects devices connected to the IDE RAID connectors. This item appears only when the ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller i s set to IDE Mode. Configuration options: [Standard Mode] [Quick Mode] Silicon Image Controller [RAID Mode] Silicon Image Controller [RAID Mode] Silicon Image Controller [RAID Mode] Silicon Image Controller [RAID Mode] Silicon Image Controller [RAID Mode] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard Silicon Image SATA RAID controller. Configuration options: [RAID Mode] [SATA Mode] [Disabled] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Allows you to select the Serial Port1 base address. Configuration options: [Disabled] [3F8/IRQ4] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Address [378] Allows you to select the Parallel Port base addresses. Configuration options: [Disabled] [378] [278] [3BC] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Allows you to select the Parallel Port mode. Configuration options: [Normal] [Bi-directional] [EPP] [ECP] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] Appears only when the Parallel Port Mode is set to [ECP]. This item allows you to set the Parallel Port ECP DMA. Configuration options: [DMA0] [DMA1] [DMA3] Parallel Port IRQ [IRQ7] Configuration options: [IRQ5] [IRQ7] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Allows you to select the Game Port address or to disable the port. Configuration options: [Disabled] [200/300] [200/330] [208/300] [208/330]
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-29 4-29 4-29 4-29 4-29 4.4.7 4.4.7 4.4.7 4.4.7 4.4.7 PCI PnP PCI PnP PCI PnP PCI PnP PCI PnP The PCI PnP menu items allow you to change the advanced settings for PCI/PnP devices. The menu includes setting IRQ and DMA channel resources for either PCI/PnP or legacy ISA devices, and setting the memory size block for legacy ISA devices. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Advanced PCI/PnP Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. Plug And Play O/S [No] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Palette Snooping [Disabled] PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] IRQ-3 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-4 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-5 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-7 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-9 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-10 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-11 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-14 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-15 assigned to [PCI Device] Plug And Play O/S [No] Plug And Play O/S [No] Plug And Play O/S [No] Plug And Play O/S [No] Plug And Play O/S [No] When set to [No], BIOS configures all the devices in the system. When set to [Yes] and if you install a Plug and Play operating system, the operating system configures the Plug and Play devices not required for boot. Configuration options: [No] [Yes] PCI Latency Timer [64] PCI Latency Timer [64] PCI Latency Timer [64] PCI Latency Timer [64] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allows you to select the value in units of PCI clocks for the PCI device latency timer register. Configuration options: [32] [64] [96] [128] [160] [192] [224] [248] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] When set to [Yes], BIOS assigns an IRQ to PCI VGA card if the card requests for an IRQ. When set to [No], BIOS does not assign an IRQ to the PCI VGA card even if requested. Configuration options: [No] [Yes] Palette Snooping [Disabled] Palette Snooping [Disabled] Palette Snooping [Disabled] Palette Snooping [Disabled] Palette Snooping [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], the pallete snooping feature informs the PCI devices that an ISA graphics device is installed in the system so that the latter can function correctly. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Take caution when changing the settings of the PCI PnP menu items. Incorrect field values can cause the system to malfunction. NO: Lets the BIOS configue all the devices in the system. YES: Lets the operating system configure Plug and Play (PnP) devices not required for boot if your system has a Plug and Play operating system.
4-30 4-30 4-30 4-30 4-30 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] Allows BIOS to use PCI bus mastering when reading/writing to IDE devices. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] When set to [PCI Device], the specific IRQ is free for use of PCI/PnP devices. When set to [Reserved], the IRQ is reserved for legacy ISA devices. Configuration options: [PCI Device] [Reserved] 4.4.8 4.4.8 4.4.8 4.4.8 4.4.8 Speech Configuration Speech Configuration Speech Configuration Speech Configuration Speech Configuration Speech POST Reporter [Enabled] Speech POST Reporter [Enabled] Speech POST Reporter [Enabled] Speech POST Reporter [Enabled] Speech POST Reporter [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Speech POST Reporter⢠feature. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The following items appear only when Speech POST Reporter is set to Enabled. Report IDE Error [Disabled] Report IDE Error [Disabled] Report IDE Error [Disabled] Report IDE Error [Disabled] Report IDE Error [Disabled] Enables or disables the report feature in the event of an IDE error. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Report System Booting [Disabled] Report System Booting [Disabled] Report System Booting [Disabled] Report System Booting [Disabled] Report System Booting [Disabled] Enables or disables the report after booting the system. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Speech Option Speech POST Reporter [Enabled] Report IDE Error [Disabled] Report System Booting [Disabled]
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-31 4-31 4-31 4-31 4-31 4.5 Power menu The Power menu items allow you to change the settings for the ACPI and Advanced Power Management (APM) features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the configuration options. 4.5.1 4.5.1 4.5.1 4.5.1 4.5.1 Suspend Mode [Auto] Suspend Mode [Auto] Suspend Mode [Auto] Suspend Mode [Auto] Suspend Mode [Auto] Allows you to select the Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) state to be used for system suspend. Configuration options: [S1 (POS) Only] [S3 Only] [Auto] 4.5.2 4.5.2 4.5.2 4.5.2 4.5.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Determines whether to invoke VGA BIOS POST on S3/STR resume. Configuration options: [Yes] [No] 4.5.3 4.5.3 4.5.3 4.5.3 4.5.3 ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] Allows you to add more tables for Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) 2.0 specifications. Configuration options: [No] [Yes] 4.5.4 4.5.4 4.5.4 4.5.4 4.5.4 ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) support in the Application-Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC). When set to Enabled, the ACPI APIC table pointer is included in the RSDT pointer list. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Suspend Mode [Auto] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] APM Configuration Hardware Monitor Select the ACPI state used for System Suspend.
4-32 4-32 4-32 4-32 4-32 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.5.5 4.5.5 4.5.5 4.5.5 4.5.5 APM Configuration APM Configuration APM Configuration APM Configuration APM Configuration Power Button Mode [On/Off] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Allows the system to go into On/Off mode or suspend mode when the power button is pressed. Configuration options: [On/Off] [Suspend] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] When set to Power Off, the system goes into off state after an AC power loss. When set to Power On, the system goes on after an AC power loss. When set to Last State, the system goes into either off or on state, whatever the system state was before the AC power loss. Configuration options: [Power Off] [Power On] [Last State] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable RTC to generate a wake event. When this item is set to Enabled, the items RTC Alarm Date, RTC Alarm Hour, RTC Alarm Minute, and RTC Alarm Second appear with set values. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Allows either settings of [Enabled] or [Disabled] for powering up the computer when the external modem receives a call while the computer is in Soft-off mode. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The computer cannot receive or transmit data until the computer and applications are fully running. Thus, connection cannot be made on the first try. Turning an external modem off and then back on while the computer is off causes an initialization string that turns the system power on. Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to turn on the system through a PCI LAN or modem card. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] APM Configuration Power Button Mode [On/Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Keyboard Wakeup Password : Not Installed Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Go into On/Off or Suspend when Power button is pressed.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-33 4-33 4-33 4-33 4-33 Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Allows you to use specific keys on the keyboard to turn on the system. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Wakeup Password Wakeup Password Wakeup Password Wakeup Password Wakeup Password This item appears only when the Power On By PS/2 Keyboard Power On By PS/2 Keyboard Power On By PS/2 Keyboard Power On By PS/2 Keyboard Power On By PS/2 Keyboard i s s e t to [Enabled]. Select this item to set or change the keyboard wakeup password. Keyboard Wakeup Password Shows [Not Installed] [Not Installed] [Not Installed] [Not Installed] [Not Installed] i f the Wakeup Password Wakeup Password Wakeup Password Wakeup Password Wakeup Password i s disabled. After you have set a keyboard password, this item shows [Installed] [Installed] [Installed] [Installed] [Installed] . Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to use the PS/2 mouse to turn on the system. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-34 4-34 4-34 4-34 4-34 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.5.6 4.5.6 4.5.6 4.5.6 4.5.6 Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor CPU Temperature [51ºC/122.5ºF] MB Temperature [41ºC/105.5ºF] CPU Fan Speed [3813 RPM] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Chassis Fan Speed [N/A] Power Fan Speed [N/A] VCORE Voltage [ 1.320V] 3.3V Voltage [ 3.345V] 5V Voltage [ 5.094V] 12V Voltage [11.880V] CPU Temperature [xxxºC/xxxºF] CPU Temperature [xxxºC/xxxºF] CPU Temperature [xxxºC/xxxºF] CPU Temperature [xxxºC/xxxºF] CPU Temperature [xxxºC/xxxºF] MB Temperature [xxxºC/xxxºF] MB Temperature [xxxºC/xxxºF] MB Temperature [xxxºC/xxxºF] MB Temperature [xxxºC/xxxºF] MB Temperature [xxxºC/xxxºF] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the motherboard and CPU temperatures. Select [Disabled] if you do not wish to display the detected temperatures. CPU Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] CPU Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] CPU Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] CPU Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] CPU Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the CPU fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the motherboard, the field shows N/A. CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Q-Fan feature that smartly adjusts the fan speeds for more efficient system operation. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The CPU Q-Fan Mode CPU Q-Fan Mode CPU Q-Fan Mode CPU Q-Fan Mode CPU Q-Fan Mode , CPU Fan Ratio CPU Fan Ratio CPU Fan Ratio CPU Fan Ratio CPU Fan Ratio , CPU Target CPU Target CPU Target CPU Target CPU Target Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature , and Chassis Q-Fan Control Chassis Q-Fan Control Chassis Q-Fan Control Chassis Q-Fan Control C h a s s i s Q - F a n C o n t r o l items appear when you enable the CPU Q-Fan Control CPU Q-Fan Control CPU Q-Fan Control CPU Q-Fan Control CPU Q-Fan Control feature. CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] Allows you to select the type of CPU fan cable connected to the CPU fan connector. Set to [PWM] when using a 4-pin CPU fan cable. Set to [DC] when using a 3-pin CPU fan cable. Configuration options: [PWM] [DC] Some CPU fans with a 4-pin cable do not comply with Intel ® âs PWM fan specification. When using this type of CPU fan, you can not reduce the CPU fan speed even if you set the CPU Q-Fan Mode to [PWM].
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-35 4-35 4-35 4-35 4-35 CPU Fan Ratio [Auto] CPU Fan Ratio [Auto] CPU Fan Ratio [Auto] CPU Fan Ratio [Auto] CPU Fan Ratio [Auto] Allows you to select the appropriate CPU fan speed ratio for the system. The default [Auto] automatically selects the fan speed ratio when operating a low CPU temperature. Select a higher ratio if you installed additional devices and the system requires more ventilation. Configuration options: [Auto] [90%] [80%] [70%] [60%] CPU Target Temperature [xxxºC] CPU Target Temperature [xxxºC] CPU Target Temperature [xxxºC] CPU Target Temperature [xxxºC] CPU Target Temperature [xxxºC] Allows you to set the CPU temperature threshold when the CPU fan speed is increased to lower the CPU temperature. The configuration options for this item depend on the recommended Intel ® Fan Speed Control (FSC) temperature settings. The Intel ® FSC provides target temperature options at ±15º with 3º interval. Chassis Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the chassis fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the chassis, the specific field shows N/A. Chassis Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Chassis Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Chassis Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Chassis Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Chassis Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Q-Fan feature that smartly adjusts the chassis fan speeds for more efficient system operation. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Power Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Power Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Power Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Power Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the power fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the power fan connector, the specific field shows N/A. VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects the voltage output through the onboard voltage regulators.
4-36 4-36 4-36 4-36 4-36 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.6 Boot menu The Boot menu items allow you to change the system boot options. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub-screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit APM Configuration Boot Device Priority Boot Settings Configuration Security 4.6.1 4.6.1 4.6.1 4.6.1 4.6.1 Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] These items specify the boot device priority sequence from the available devices. The number of device items that appears on the screen depends on the number of devices installed in the system. Configuration options: [xxxxx Drive] [Disabled] Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub-screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device [1st FLOPPY DRIVE] 2nd Boot Device [PM-ST330620A] 3rd Boot Device [PS-ASUS CD-S360]
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-37 4-37 4-37 4-37 4-37 4.6.2 4.6.2 4.6.2 4.6.2 4.6.2 Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Quick Boot [Enabled] Quick Boot [Enabled] Quick Boot [Enabled] Quick Boot [Enabled] Quick Boot [Enabled] Enabling this item allows the BIOS to skip some power on self tests (POST) while booting to decrease the time needed to boot the system. When set to [Disabled], BIOS performs all the POST items. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the full screen logo display feature. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Set this item to [Enabled] to use the ASUS MyLogo2⢠feature. Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Sets the display mode for option ROM. Configuration options: [Force BIOS] [Keep Current] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Allows you to select the power-on state for the NumLock. Configuration options: [Off] [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for PS/2 mouse. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] Wait for âF1â If Error [Enabled] Wait for âF1â If Error [Enabled] Wait for âF1â If Error [Enabled] Wait for âF1â If Error [Enabled] Wait for âF1â If Error [Enabled] When set to Enabled, the system waits for the F1 key to be pressed when error occurs. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Hit âDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Hit âDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Hit âDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Hit âDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Hit âDELâ Message Display [Enabled] When set to Enabled, the system displays the message âPress DEL to run Setupâ during POST. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Boot Settings Configuration Quick Boot [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] AddOn ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Bootup Num-Lock [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Wait For âF1â If Error [Enabled] Hit âDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Allows BIOS to skip certain tests while booting. This will decrease the time needed to boot the system.
4-38 4-38 4-38 4-38 4-38 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this function allows the option ROMs to trap Interrupt 19. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.6.3 4.6.3 4.6.3 4.6.3 4.6.3 Security Security Security Security Security The Security menu items allow you to change the system security settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the configuration options. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Security Settings Supervisor Password : Not Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disabled password. Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Select this item to set or change the supervisor password. The Supervisor Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed . After you set a password, this item shows Installed Installed Installed Installed Installed . To set a Supervisor Password: 1. Select the Change Supervisor Password item and press <Enter>. 2. From the password box, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Confirm the password when prompted. The message âPassword Installedâ appears after you successfully set your password. To change the supervisor password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. To clear the supervisor password, select the Change Supervisor Password then press <Enter>. The message âPassword Uninstalledâ appears. If you forget your BIOS password, you can clear clear it by erasing the CMOS Real Time Clock (RTC) RAM. See section â2.6 Jumpersâ for information on how to erase the RTC RAM.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-39 4-39 4-39 4-39 4-39 After you have set a supervisor password, the other items appear to allow you to change other security settings. User Access Level [Full Access] User Access Level [Full Access] User Access Level [Full Access] User Access Level [Full Access] User Access Level [Full Access] This item allows you to select the access restriction to the Setup items. Configuration options: [No Access] [View Only] [Limited] [Full Access] No Access No Access No Access No Access No Access prevents user access to the Setup utility. View Only View Only View Only View Only View Only allows access but does not allow change to any field. Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited allows changes only to selected fields, such as Date and Time. Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access allows viewing and changing all the fields in the Setup utility. Change User Password Change User Password Change User Password Change User Password Change User Password Select this item to set or change the user password. The User Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed . After you set a password, this item shows Installed Installed Installed Installed Installed . To set a User Password: 1. Select the Change User Password item and press <Enter>. 2. On the password box that appears, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Confirm the password when prompted. The message âPassword Installedâ appears after you set your password successfully. To change the user password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Security Settings Supervisor Password : Not Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password User Access Level [Full Access] Change User Password Clear User Password Password Check [Setup] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled]
4-40 4-40 4-40 4-40 4-40 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Clear User Password Clear User Password Clear User Password Clear User Password Clear User Password Select this item to clear the user password. Password Check [Setup] Password Check [Setup] Password Check [Setup] Password Check [Setup] Password Check [Setup] When set to [Setup], BIOS checks for user password when accessing the Setup utility. When set to [Always], BIOS checks for user password both when accessing Setup and booting the system. Configuration options: [Setup] [Always] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the boot sector virus protection. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Select this option only if you do not want to save the changes that you made to the Setup program. If you made changes to fields other than System Date, System Time, and Password, the BIOS asks for a confirmation before exiting. Discard Changes Discard Changes Discard Changes Discard Changes Discard Changes Allows you to discard the selections you made and restore the previously saved values. After selecting this option, a confirmation appears. Select Yes Yes Yes Yes Y e s to discard any changes and load the previously saved values. Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Once you are finished making your selections, choose this option from the Exit menu to ensure the values you selected are saved to the CMOS RAM. An onboard backup battery sustains the CMOS RAM so it stays on even when the computer is turned off. When you select this option, a confirmation window appears. Select Yes Yes Yes Yes Y e s to save the changes and exit. If you attempt to exit the Setup program without saving your changes, the program prompts you with a message asking if you want to save your changes before exiting. Press <Enter> to save the changes while exiting. Exit system setup after saving the changes. F10 key can be used for this operation. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub-screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Exit Options Exit & Save Changes Exit & Discard Changes Discard Changes Load Setup Defaults Pressing <Esc> does not immediately exit this menu. Select one of the options from this menu or <F10> from the legend bar to exit. 4.7 Exit menu The Exit menu items allow you to load the optimal or failsafe default values for the BIOS items, and save or discard your changes to the BIOS items.
4-42 4-42 4-42 4-42 4-42 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Allows you to load the default values for each of the parameters on the Setup menus. When you select this option or if you press <F5>, a confirmation window appears. Select Yes Yes Yes Yes Y e s to load default values. Select Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes o r make other changes before saving the values to the non-volatile RAM.
5 Software support This chapter describes the contents of the support CD that comes with the motherboard package.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe Chapter summary 5 5.1 Installing an operating system ............................................. 5-1 5.2 Support CD information ........................................................ 5-1 5.3 Software information ........................................................... 5-8 5.4 RAID configurations ............................................................ 5-16 5.5 Creating a RAID driver disk ................................................. 5-38
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-1 5-1 5-1 5-1 5-1 5.1 Installing an operating system This motherboard supports Windows ® 2000/2003 Server/XP operating systems (OS). Always install the latest OS version and corresponding updates to maximize the features of your hardware. 5.2 Support CD information The support CD that came with the motherboard package contains the drivers, software applications, and utilities that you can install to avail all motherboard features. 5.2.1 5.2.1 5.2.1 5.2.1 5.2.1 Running the support CD Running the support CD Running the support CD Running the support CD Running the support CD Place the support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers D r i v e r s menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer. Click an icon to Click an icon to Click an icon to Click an icon to Click an icon to display support display support display support display support display support CD/motherboard CD/motherboard CD/motherboard CD/motherboard CD/motherboard information information information information information Click an item to install Click an item to install Click an item to install Click an item to install Click an item to install ⢠Motherboard settings and hardware options vary. Use the setup procedures presented in this chapter for reference only. Refer to your OS documentation for detailed information. ⢠Make sure that you install Windows ® 2000 Service Pack 4 or the Windows ® XP Service Pack1 or later versions before installing the drivers for better compatibility and system stability. If Autorun Autorun Autorun Autorun Autorun i s NOT enabled in your computer, browse the contents of the support CD to locate the file ASSETUP.EXE from the BIN folder. Double-click the ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE t o run the CD. The contents of the support CD are subject to change at any time without notice. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) for updates.
5-2 5-2 5-2 5-2 5-2 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.2.2 5.2.2 5.2.2 5.2.2 5.2.2 Drivers menu Drivers menu Drivers menu Drivers menu Drivers menu The drivers menu shows the available device drivers if the system detects installed devices. Install the necessary drivers to activate the devices. QFE Update QFE Update QFE Update QFE Update QFE Update Installs the Quick Fix Engineering (QFE) driver updates. Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Installs the Intel ® Chipset INF Update Program. This driver enables Plug-n-Play INF support for the Intel ® chipset components on the motherboard. When installed to the target system, this driver provides the method for configuring the chipset components. You can install this utility using three different modes: interactive, silent or unattended preload. Installing the driver in interactive mode requires user input during installation. User input is not required when installing the driver in silent or unattended preload modes. Refer to the online help or readme file that came with the utility for details. C-MEDIA CMI9880 Audio Driver and Application C-MEDIA CMI9880 Audio Driver and Application C-MEDIA CMI9880 Audio Driver and Application C-MEDIA CMI9880 Audio Driver and Application C-MEDIA CMI9880 Audio Driver and Application Installs the C-MEDIA ® CMI9880 audio driver and application. See page 5-11 for details. ASUS Wireless LAN adapter Driver and Utility ASUS Wireless LAN adapter Driver and Utility ASUS Wireless LAN adapter Driver and Utility ASUS Wireless LAN adapter Driver and Utility ASUS Wireless LAN adapter Driver and Utility Installs the driver, utilities, and setup wizard for the ASUS WiFi-g⢠wireless solution. Refer to the WiFi-g⢠documentation for details. The screen display and driver options vary under different operating system versions.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-3 5-3 5-3 5-3 5-3 Marvell Yukon Gigabit Ethernet Driver Marvell Yukon Gigabit Ethernet Driver Marvell Yukon Gigabit Ethernet Driver Marvell Yukon Gigabit Ethernet Driver Marvell Yukon Gigabit Ethernet Driver Installs the driver for the Marvell ® Yukon 88E8052 PCI Express Gigabit LAN. IT8212 Driver and Application IT8212 Driver and Application IT8212 Driver and Application IT8212 Driver and Application IT8212 Driver and Application Installs the driver for the IT8212 IDE RAID controller. Make ITE8212 Driver Disk Make ITE8212 Driver Disk Make ITE8212 Driver Disk Make ITE8212 Driver Disk Make ITE8212 Driver Disk Allows you to create a driver disk for the IT8212 IDE RAID setup. See page 5-38 for details. USB 2.0 Driver USB 2.0 Driver USB 2.0 Driver USB 2.0 Driver USB 2.0 Driver Installs the USB 2.0 driver. Silicon Image RAID5 Driver Silicon Image RAID5 Driver Silicon Image RAID5 Driver Silicon Image RAID5 Driver Silicon Image RAID5 Driver Installs the Silicon Image 3114R RAID5 driver. Make Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk Allows you to create a RAID 5 driver disk for the Silicon Image RAID 5 configuration. See page 5-38 for details. 5.2.3 5.2.3 5.2.3 5.2.3 5.2.3 Utilities menu Utilities menu Utilities menu Utilities menu Utilities menu The Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities menu displays the software applications and utilities that the motherboard supports. Click on an item to install. Marvell Yukon VCT Application Marvell Yukon VCT Application Marvell Yukon VCT Application Marvell Yukon VCT Application Marvell Yukon VCT Application The Virtual Cable Tester (VCT) is a cable diagnostic application that analyzes and reports LAN cable faults and shorts. See page 5-10 for details.
5-4 5-4 5-4 5-4 5-4 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support ASUS PC Probe ASUS PC Probe ASUS PC Probe ASUS PC Probe ASUS PC Probe This smart utility monitors the fan speed, CPU temperature, and system voltages, and alerts you of any detected problems. This utility helps you keep your computer in healthy operating condition. ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update The ASUS Update utility that allows you to update the motherboard BIOS in Windows ® environment. This utility requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP). See page 4-8 for details. AI Booster AI Booster AI Booster AI Booster AI Booster The ASUS AI Booster application allows you to overclock the CPU speed in Windows ® environment. Microsoft DirectX 9.0b Microsoft DirectX 9.0b Microsoft DirectX 9.0b Microsoft DirectX 9.0b Microsoft DirectX 9.0b The Microsoft DirectX ® 9.0b is a multimedia technology that enhances computer graphics and sounds. DirectX ® improves the multimedia features of your computer so you can enjoy watching TV and movies, capturing videos, or playing games in your computer. Anti-virus application Anti-virus application Anti-virus application Anti-virus application Anti-virus application The anti-virus application scans, identifies, and destroys computer worms and viruses attempting to damage your data. View the online help for detailed information. Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor This Voice Editor application allows you to record and customize wave files for the ASUS POST Reporter⢠utility. Use this program to change the default vocal POST messages. See section â3.2 Vocal POST Messagesâ for details. ADOBE Acrobat Reader ADOBE Acrobat Reader ADOBE Acrobat Reader ADOBE Acrobat Reader ADOBE Acrobat Reader The Adobe Acrobat ® Reader V5.0 is for opening, viewing, and printing documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver Bring life to your idle screen by installing the ASUS screen saver.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-5 5-5 5-5 5-5 5-5 5.2.5 5.2.5 5.2.5 5.2.5 5.2.5 Contact information Contact information Contact information Contact information Contact information Click the Contact Contact Contact Contact Contact tab to display the ASUS contact information. You can also find this information on the inside front cover of this user guide. 5.2.4 5.2.4 5.2.4 5.2.4 5.2.4 Manuals menu Manuals menu Manuals menu Manuals menu Manuals menu The Manuals Manuals Manuals Manuals Manuals menu contains the user manuals for third party components and applications. Most user manual files are in Portable Document Format (PDF). Install the Adobe Acrobat Reader application from the Utilities tab before opening a user manual file.
5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.2.6 5.2.6 5.2.6 5.2.6 5.2.6 Other information Other information Other information Other information Other information The icons on the top right corner of the screen provide additional information on the motherboard and the contents of the support CD. Click an icon to display the specified information. Motherboard Info Motherboard Info Motherboard Info Motherboard Info Motherboard Info Displays the general specifications of the motherboard. Browse this CD Browse this CD Browse this CD Browse this CD Browse this CD Displays the contents of the support CD in graphical format.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-7 5-7 5-7 5-7 5-7 Technical Support Form Technical Support Form Technical Support Form Technical Support Form Technical Support Form Displays the ASUS Technical Support Request Form that you have to fill out when requesting technical support. Filelist Filelist Filelist Filelist Filelist Displays the contents of the support CD in text format.
5-8 5-8 5-8 5-8 5-8 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.3 Software information Most of the applications in the support CD have wizards that will conveniently guide you through the installation. View the online help or readme file that came with the software application for more information. 5.3.1 5.3.1 5.3.1 5.3.1 5.3.1 ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠The ASUS MyLogo2⢠utility lets you customize the boot logo. The boot logo is the image that appears on screen during the Power-On-Self-Tests (POST). The ASUS MyLogo2⢠is automatically installed when you install the ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update utility from the support CD. See section â5.2.3 Utilities menuâ for details. To launch the ASUS MyLogo2â¢: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility. Refer to section â4.1.4 ASUS Update utilityâ for details. 2. Select Options Options Options Options Options from the drop down menu, then click Next Next Next Next Next . 3. Check the option Launch MyLogo to replace system boot Launch MyLogo to replace system boot Launch MyLogo to replace system boot Launch MyLogo to replace system boot Launch MyLogo to replace system boot logo before flashing BIOS logo before flashing BIOS logo before flashing BIOS logo before flashing BIOS logo before flashing BIOS , then click Next Next Next Next Next . 4. Select Update BIOS from a file Update BIOS from a file Update BIOS from a file Update BIOS from a file Update BIOS from a file from the drop down menu, then click Next Next Next Next Next . 5. When prompted, locate the new BIOS file, then click Next Next Next Next N e x t. The ASUS MyLogo2 window appears. 6. From the left window pane, select the folder that contains the image you intend to use as your boot logo. ⢠Before using the ASUS MyLogo2â¢, use the AFUDOS utility to make a copy of your original BIOS file, or obtain the latest BIOS version from the ASUS website. See section â4.1.2 AFUDOS utilityâ. ⢠Make sure that the BIOS item Full Screen Logo Full Screen Logo Full Screen Logo Full Screen Logo Full Screen Logo i s set to [Enabled] if you wish to use ASUS MyLogo2. See section â4.6.2 Boot Settings Configurationâ. ⢠You can create your own boot logo image in GIF, JPG, or BMP file formats.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-9 9. When the screen returns to the ASUS Update utility, flash the original BIOS to load the new boot logo. 10. After flashing the BIOS, restart the computer to display the new boot logo during POST. 8. Adjust the boot image to your desired size by selecting a value on the Ratio Ratio Ratio Ratio Ratio box. 7. When the logo images appear on the right window pane, select an image to enlarge by clicking on it.
5-10 5-10 5-10 5-10 5-10 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 3. Click the Run Run Run Run R u n button to perform a cable test. 5.3.2 5.3.2 5.3.2 5.3.2 5.3.2 AI NET2 AI NET2 AI NET2 AI NET2 AI NET2 The AI NET2 features the Marvell ® Virtual Cable Tester⢠(VCT). VCT is a cable diagnostic utility that reports LAN cable faults and shorts using the Time Domain Reflectometry (TDR) technology. The VCT detects and reports open and shorted cables, impedance mismatches, pair swaps, pair polarity problems, and pair skew problems of up to 64 ns at one meter accuracy. The VCT feature reduces networking and support costs through a highly manageable and controlled network system. This utility can be incorporated in the network systems sofware for ideal field support as well as development diagnostics. Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠To use the the Marvell ® Virtual Cable Tester⢠utility: 1. Launch the VCT utility from the Windows ® desktop by clicking Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester . 2. Click Virtual Cable Tester Virtual Cable Tester Virtual Cable Tester Virtual Cable Tester Virtual Cable Tester from the menu to display the screen below. ⢠The VCT only runs on systems with Windows ® XP or Windows ® 2000 operating systems. ⢠The VCT utility only tests Ethernet cables connected to Gigabit LAN port(s). ⢠The Run Run Run Run R u n button on the Virtual Cable Tester⢠main window is disabled if no problem is detected on the LAN cable(s) connected to the LAN port(s). ⢠If you want the system to check the status of the LAN cable before entering the OS, enable the item Post Check LAN Cable Post Check LAN Cable Post Check LAN Cable Post Check LAN Cable Post Check LAN Cable i n t h e BIOS Setup.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-11 5.3.3 5.3.3 5.3.3 5.3.3 5.3.3 C-Media 3D audio configuration C-Media 3D audio configuration C-Media 3D audio configuration C-Media 3D audio configuration C-Media 3D audio configuration The C-Media 3D Audio Configuration utility allows easy installation and set up of audio devices through a user-friendly interface. The utility is automatically installed when you install the C-Media CMI9880 audio driver and application from the motherboard support CD. Refer to section â5.2.2 Drivers menu.â Launching the C-Media 3D Audio Configuration utility Launching the C-Media 3D Audio Configuration utility Launching the C-Media 3D Audio Configuration utility Launching the C-Media 3D Audio Configuration utility Launching the C-Media 3D Audio Configuration utility Launch the C-Media 3D Audio Configuration utility by double clicking the C-Media icon on the Windows ® taskbar. Using the C-Media 3D Audio Configuration utility Using the C-Media 3D Audio Configuration utility Using the C-Media 3D Audio Configuration utility Using the C-Media 3D Audio Configuration utility Using the C-Media 3D Audio Configuration utility The C-Media 3D Audio Configuration interface has five tabs: Main Setting, Mixer, Effect, Device Setting, and Information. Click a tab to display the details. Main Setting The Main Setting Main Setting Main Setting Main Setting Main Setting tab allows you to check the audio system status, configure the audio ports, set the speaker and audio DSP modes, and test the speaker output. Audio System Status Audio System Status Audio System Status Audio System Status Audio System Status . This section displays the output mode status, the real-time audio playback spectrum, and the digital I/O status. The number of speakers configured in the system determines the output mode status. Audio Audio Audio Audio Audio System System System System System Status Status Status Status Status Smart Jack Smart Jack Smart Jack Smart Jack Smart Jack settings settings settings settings settings Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode Selection Selection Selection Selection Selection Speaker Speaker Speaker Speaker Speaker Tester and Tester and Tester and Tester and Tester and Audio DSP Audio DSP Audio DSP Audio DSP Audio DSP Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Tabs Tabs Tabs Tabs Tabs
5-12 5-12 5-12 5-12 5-12 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Smart Jack Setting Smart Jack Setting Smart Jack Setting Smart Jack Setting Smart Jack Setting . You can configure the function of the rear panel, front panel, and digital I/O audio ports from this section. Click the Smart Jack setting button that corresponds to the port that you wish to configure. Mode Selection Mode Selection Mode Selection Mode Selection Mode Selection . This section allows you to set the Speaker Tester or the Digital Signal Processing (DSP). Click the button to change the audio modes. Speaker Tester and Audio DSP Setting Speaker Tester and Audio DSP Setting Speaker Tester and Audio DSP Setting Speaker Tester and Audio DSP Setting Speaker Tester and Audio DSP Setting . You can configure your speaker setup and the audio DSP settings in this section. Click the Play Play Play Play Play o r the Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop button to listen to the speakers or click the Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume button to adjust the speakersâ volume. Mixer The Mixer Mixer Mixer Mixer Mixer tab allows you to adjust the audio input and the recording output volume of devices connected to the system rear panel and front panel audio ports.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-13 5-13 5-13 5-13 5-13 Effect The Effect Effect Effect Effect Effect tab allows you to control the environment emulation, set the environment size, and adjust the equalizer settings. Environment Environment Environment Environment Environment settings settings settings settings settings Environment Environment Environment Environment Environment size size size size size Equalizer Equalizer Equalizer Equalizer Equalizer settings settings settings settings settings Environment Environment Environment Environment Environment . This section contains various pre-programmed enviroment emulations. There are four featured materials that emulate the bathroom, concert hall, underwater, and music pub environments. Click the corresponding button to set an environment emulation. To set other environment emulations, click the More Option More Option More Option More Option More Option list box. Environment Size Environment Size Environment Size Environment Size Environment Size . This section allows you to select the size of your room for an appropriate audio output. There are three room size models provided for the environment size emulation. Click any of the environment size buttons to set. Equalizer Equalizer Equalizer Equalizer Equalizer . The Equalizer section allows you to adjust the amplifier frequency. Use the 10-band equalizer to individually control the different frequency bands of your speaker system, or click a music style preset to load a pre-defined equalizer setting. Click the User Defined User Defined User Defined User Defined User Defined button to save or load your customized equalizer settings.
5-14 5-14 5-14 5-14 5-14 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Information The Information Information Information Information Information tab displays your 3D audio engine, audio CODEC, audio driver, audio controller, and DirectX information. Device Setting The Device Setting Device Setting Device Setting Device Setting Device Setting tab allows you to enable the audio CODEC multi-streaming feature, select a sound playback, and sound recording devices.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-15 5-15 5-15 5-15 5-15 Using Dolby Using Dolby Using Dolby Using Dolby Using Dolby ® Digital Live Digital Live Digital Live Digital Live Digital Live ⢠The Dolby ® Digital Live⢠technology encodes your computerâs digital audio contents to real-time Dolby ® Digital streams. Using the CODEC and the Sony/Philips Digital Interface (S/PDIF) ports on the motherboard, you can send the encoded Dolby ® Digital streams to an AC-3 decoder for playback on a multi-channel speaker system. Refer to the following illustrations when converting sounds to Dolby ® Digital streams. Direct or non-encoded Direct or non-encoded Direct or non-encoded Direct or non-encoded Direct or non-encoded audio in your computer audio in your computer audio in your computer audio in your computer audio in your computer passes through the passes through the passes through the passes through the passes through the AC-3 encoder. AC-3 encoder. AC-3 encoder. AC-3 encoder. AC-3 encoder. 1 2 The AC-3 encoder The AC-3 encoder The AC-3 encoder The AC-3 encoder The AC-3 encoder converts the converts the converts the converts the converts the sound into Dolby sound into Dolby sound into Dolby sound into Dolby sound into Dolby ® ® ® ® ® Digital streams. Digital streams. Digital streams. Digital streams. Digital streams. CMI9880 CMI9880 CMI9880 CMI9880 CMI9880 CODEC CODEC CODEC CODEC CODEC 3 The audio CODEC The audio CODEC The audio CODEC The audio CODEC The audio CODEC processes the streams processes the streams processes the streams processes the streams processes the streams then passes it to an AC-3 then passes it to an AC-3 then passes it to an AC-3 then passes it to an AC-3 then passes it to an AC-3 decoder through the decoder through the decoder through the decoder through the decoder through the S/PDIF out port. S/PDIF out port. S/PDIF out port. S/PDIF out port. S/PDIF out port. 4 The AC-3 decoder The AC-3 decoder The AC-3 decoder The AC-3 decoder The AC-3 decoder processes the processes the processes the processes the processes the streams then plays streams then plays streams then plays streams then plays streams then plays them back on a them back on a them back on a them back on a them back on a multi-channel multi-channel multi-channel multi-channel multi-channel speaker system. speaker system. speaker system. speaker system. speaker system. To enable the Dolby ® Digital Liveâ¢: 1. Connect an AC-3 decoder to the coaxial/optical S/PDIF out port. 2. Connect the AC-3 decoder to the multi-channel speaker system. 3. Launch the C-Media 3D Audio Configuration utility by double clicking the C-Media icon on the Windows ® taskbar. 4. Click the Dolby Digital Live Dolby Digital Live Dolby Digital Live Dolby Digital Live Dolby Digital Live button. You can now convert your computerâs audio content to Dolby ® Digital streams.
5-16 5-16 5-16 5-16 5-16 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.4 RAID configurations The motherboard comes with the Silicon Image Sil3114, ITE 8212, and the Intel ® ICH6R Southbride RAID controllers that allow you to configure IDE and Serial ATA hard disk drives as RAID sets. The motherboard supports the following RAID configurations. RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 (Data striping) optimizes two identical hard disk drives to read and write data in parallel, interleaved stacks. Two hard disks perform the same work as a single drive but at a sustained data transfer rate, double that of a single disk alone, thus improving data access and storage. Use of two new identical hard disk drives is required for this setup. RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 (Data mirroring) copies and maintains an identical image of data from one drive to a second drive. If one drive fails, the disk array management software directs all applications to the surviving drive as it contains a complete copy of the data in the other drive. This RAID configuration provides data protection and increases fault tolerance to the entire system. Use two new drives or use an existing drive and a new drive for this setup. The new drive must be of the same size or larger than the existing drive. RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 i s data striping and data mirroring combined without parity (redundancy data) having to be calculated and written. With the RAID 0 1 configuration you get all the benefits of both RAID 0 and RAID 1 configurations. Use four new hard disk drives or use an existing drive and three new drives for this setup. RAID 5 RAID 5 RAID 5 RAID 5 RAID 5 stripes both data and parity information across three or more hard disk drives. Among the advantages of RAID 5 configuration include better HDD performance, fault tolerance, and higher storage capacity. The RAID 5 configuration is best suited for transaction processing, relational database applications, enterprise resource planning, and other business systems. Use a minimum of three identical hard disk drives for this setup. RAID 10 RAID 10 RAID 10 RAID 10 RAID 10 i s a striped configuration with RAID 1 segments whose segments are RAID 1 arrays. This configuration has the same fault tolerance as RAID 1, and has the same overhead for fault-tolerance as mirroring alone. RAID 10 achieves high input/output rates by striping RAID 1 segments. In some instances, a RAID 10 configuration can sustain multiple simultaneous drive failure. A minimum of four hard disk drives is required for this setup. JBOD JBOD JBOD JBOD JBOD (Spanning) stands for Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks and refers to hard disk drives that are not yet configured as a RAID set. This configuration stores the same data redundantly on multiple disks that appear as a single disk on the operating system. Spanning does not deliver any advantage over using separate disks independently and does not provide fault tolerance or other RAID performance benefits.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-17 5-17 5-17 5-17 5-17 5.4.1 5.4.1 5.4.1 5.4.1 5.4.1 Installing hard disks Installing hard disks Installing hard disks Installing hard disks Installing hard disks The motherboard supports Ultra DMA /133/100/66 and Serial ATA hard disk drives. For optimal performance, install identical drives of the same model and capacity when creating a disk array. Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks To install IDE hard disks for a RAID configuration: 1. Set the jumpers of each hard disk as Master/Master or Slave/Slave. 2. Install the hard disks into the drive bays. 3. Connect the HDD signal cables. 4. Connect a 4-pin power cable to the power connector on each drive. Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks To install the SATA hard disks for a RAID configuration: 1. Install the SATA hard disks into the drive bays. 2. Connect the SATA signal cables. 3. Connect a SATA power cable to the power connector on each drive. If you want to boot the system from a hard disk drive included in a created RAID set, copy first the RAID driver from the support CD to a floppy disk before you install an operating system to the selected hard disk drive. Refer to section â5.5 Creating a RAID driver diskâ for details. Refer to the RAID controllers user manual on the support CD for detailed information on RAID configurations. Intel Intel Intel Intel Intel ® Matrix Storage Matrix Storage Matrix Storage Matrix Storage Matrix Storage . The Intel ® Matrix Storage technology supported by the ICH6R chip allows you to create a RAID 0 and a RAID 1 set using only two identical hard disk drives. The Intel ® Matrix Storage technology creates two partitions on each hard disk drive to create a virtual RAID 0 and RAID 1 sets. This technology also allows you to change the hard disk drive partition size without losing any data.
5-18 5-18 5-18 5-18 5-18 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.4.2 5.4.2 5.4.2 5.4.2 5.4.2 Silicon Image RAID configurations Silicon Image RAID configurations Silicon Image RAID configurations Silicon Image RAID configurations Silicon Image RAID configurations The Silicon Image RAID controller supports RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10, JBOD, and RAID 5 configurations. Use the Silicon Image RAID utility to configure a disk array. Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items After installing the hard disk drives, make sure to set the necessary RAID items in the BIOS before setting your RAID configuration. To set the BIOS RAID items: 1. Boot the system and press <Del> during the Power-On Self-Test (POST) to enter the BIOS Setup Utility. 2. From the Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration menu item in the BIOS set the Silicon Image Controller Silicon Image Controller Silicon Image Controller Silicon Image Controller Silicon Image Controller item to RAID Mode. 3. Save your changes and Exit Setup. Launching the Silicon Image Array Management Software Launching the Silicon Image Array Management Software Launching the Silicon Image Array Management Software Launching the Silicon Image Array Management Software Launching the Silicon Image Array Management Software Launch the Silicon Image Array Management software from Windows ® XP by clicking the Start Start Start Start Start button and selecting All Programs > Silicon Image All Programs > Silicon Image All Programs > Silicon Image All Programs > Silicon Image All Programs > Silicon Image > Sam > Sam > Sam > Sam > Sam ⢠For details on the Silicon Image SATARaid⢠RAID configuration, refer to the âSil3114 Userâs Manualâ in the motherboard support CD. ⢠A RAID 5 configuration requires at least 1 GB of system memory and 3 GHz processor core speed for optimum performance. ⢠You can only set the SATALink⢠RAID 5 and JBOD configuration using the SATALink⢠SATA RAID Management Software. ⢠Make sure to install the Silicon Image SATA Link Sil 3114 driver and the Silicon Image RAID 5 Array Management Utility before using RAID 5 configuration.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-19 5-19 5-19 5-19 5-19 Entering the Silicon Image BIOS RAID Configuration Utility Entering the Silicon Image BIOS RAID Configuration Utility Entering the Silicon Image BIOS RAID Configuration Utility Entering the Silicon Image BIOS RAID Configuration Utility Entering the Silicon Image BIOS RAID Configuration Utility To enter the Silicon Image BIOS RAID configuration utility: 1. Boot up your computer. 2. During POST, press <Ctrl S> or <F4>. The RAID BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference only, and may not exactly match the items on your screen. On the upper right corner of the screen is the Help message box. The message describes the function of each menu item. At the bottom of the screen is the legend box. The keys on the legend box allow you to navigate through the setup menu options. The following lists the keys found in the legend box and their corresponding functions. â â â â â , , , , , â â â â â : Select/Move to the next item ESC ESC ESC ESC E S C : Previous Menu Enter Enter Enter Enter Enter : Select Ctrl-E Ctrl-E Ctrl-E Ctrl-E Ctrl-E : Exit Create RAID set Delete RAID set Rebuild Raid1 set Resolve Conflicts Low Level Format Logical Drive Info RAID Configuration Utility - Silicon Image Inc. Copyright (C) 2004 ââ ââ ââ ââ ââ :Select Menu ESC:Previous Menu Enter:Select Ctrl-E:Exit MAIN MENU PHYSICAL DRIVE 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB STXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB STXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB STXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB STXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB LOGICAL DRIVE HELP Press âEnterâ to create RAID set
5-20 5-20 5-20 5-20 5-20 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Creating a RAID 0 set (Striped) Creating a RAID 0 set (Striped) Creating a RAID 0 set (Striped) Creating a RAID 0 set (Striped) Creating a RAID 0 set (Striped) To create a RAID set: 1. From the Silicon Image configuration utility main menu, select Create Create Create Create Create RAID set RAID set RAID set RAID set RAID set then press <Enter> to display an option menu. 2. Select RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 then press <Enter> to display the following. 3. Select your desired method of configuration. Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration a. Select Auto Configuration the press <Enter>. b. The utility prompts a confirmation message, press <Y>. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration By default, Auto configuration sets the stripe size to 64K and sets the logical drives based on the physical drives installed. MAIN MENU Create RAID set Delete RAID set Rebuild Raid1 set Resolve Conflicts Low Level Format Logical Drive Info RAID0 RAID1 RAID10 SPARE DRIVE
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 b. Use the up or down arrow keys to select a chunk size appropriate to your drive usage then press <Enter>. The selection bar moves to the Physical Drive menu. TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: For server systems, use of a lower array block size is recommended. For multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing, a higher array block size is recommended for optimum performance. PHYSICAL DRIVE 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration a. Select Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration and press <Enter>. The following pop-up menu appears. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration chunk size 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K c. Using the up or down arrow keys, select a drive then press <Enter> to set the first drive of the RAID set. Repeat the same procedure to set the second, third, and fourth drive. The number of available drives depend on the installed and enabled physical drives in the system. d. The utility prompts a confirmation message, press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the configuration Main Menu.
5-22 5-22 5-22 5-22 5-22 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirrored) Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirrored) Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirrored) Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirrored) Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirrored) To create a RAID 1 set: 1. From the Silicon Image configuration utility main menu, select Create Create Create Create Create RAID set RAID set RAID set RAID set RAID set then press <Enter>. The following sub-menu appears. MAIN MENU Create RAID set Delete RAID set Rebuild Raid1 set Resolve Conflicts Low Level Format Logical Drive Info RAID0 RAID1 RAID10 SPARE DRIVE 2. Select RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 then press <Enter> to display the following. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration 3. Select your desired method of configuration. Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration a. Select Auto Configuration then press <Enter>. b. The utility prompts a confirmation message. Press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the configuration Main Menu. ⢠Auto-configuration creates a RAID 1 set without backup copy. ⢠When migrating a single hard disk drive to a RAID 1 set, use of the Manual configuration is recommended.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-23 5-23 5-23 5-23 5-23 PHYSICAL DRIVE 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB b. Using the up or down arrow keys, select the source drive and press <Enter>. c. Repeat step b to select the target drive . d. After selecting the source and target drives, the following pop-up menu appears. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration Create with data copy Create without data copy Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration a. Select Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration and press <Enter>. The selection bar moves to the Physical Drives menu. ⢠The Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy option allows you to copy the current data from the source drive to the mirror drive. The Create Create Create Create Create without data copy without data copy without data copy without data copy without data copy option disables the disk copy function of the Mirrored set. ⢠If you selected Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy , the RAID 1 set must be repartitioned and reformatted to guarantee the consistency of its contents. ⢠Select Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy i f you have important data in your source drive.
5-24 5-24 5-24 5-24 5-24 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support e. If you selected Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy , the following pop-up menu appears. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration online copy offline copy f. Use the up or down arrow keys to select desired copy method, then press <Enter>. g. The utility prompts a confirmation message. Press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the configuration Main Menu. Creating a RAID 10 set (Mirrored Striped) Creating a RAID 10 set (Mirrored Striped) Creating a RAID 10 set (Mirrored Striped) Creating a RAID 10 set (Mirrored Striped) Creating a RAID 10 set (Mirrored Striped) To create a RAID 10 set: 1. From the Silicon Image configuration utility main menu, select Create Create Create Create Create RAID set RAID set RAID set RAID set RAID set then press <Enter>. The following sub-menu appears. To create a RAID 10 set: MAIN MENU Create RAID set Delete RAID set Rebuild Raid1 set Resolve Conflicts Low Level Format Logical Drive Info RAID0 RAID1 RAID10 SPARE DRIVE The online copy online copy online copy online copy online copy option automatically copies the data to the target drives on the background while writing to the source drives. The offline offline offline offline offline copy copy copy copy copy option allows you to copy the contents of the source drive to the target drives now. A copy progress appears if you previously selected offline copy.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-25 5-25 5-25 5-25 5-25 2. Select RAID 10 RAID 10 RAID 10 RAID 10 RAID 10 then press <Enter> to display the following. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration chunk size 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K 3. Select your desired method of configuration. Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration a. Select Auto Configuration then press <Enter>. b. The utility prompts a confirmation message. Press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the configuration Main Menu. Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration a. Select Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration and press <Enter>. The following pop-up menu appears. TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: For server systems, use of a lower array block size is recommended. For multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing, a higher array block size is recommended for optimum performance. Auto-configuration creates a RAID 10 set without backup copy.
5-26 5-26 5-26 5-26 5-26 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support c. Using the up or down arrow keys, select a drive then press <Enter> to set the first drive of the RAID set. d. Repeat step c to set the second, third, and fourth drive. The number of available drives depend on the installed and enabled physical drives in the system. e. After setting the RAID drives, the following pop-up menu appears. PHYSICAL DRIVE 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration Create with data copy Create without data copy b. Use the up or down arrow keys to select a chunk size appropriate to your drive usage then press <Enter>. The selection bar moves to the Physical Drive menu. ⢠The Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy option allows you to copy the current data from the source drive to the mirror drive. The Create Create Create Create Create without data copy without data copy without data copy without data copy without data copy option disables the disk copy function of the Mirrored set. ⢠If you selected Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy , the RAID 1 set must be repartitioned and reformatted to guarantee the consistency of its contents. ⢠Select Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy i f you have important data in your source drive.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-27 5-27 5-27 5-27 5-27 f. If you selected Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy , the following pop-up menu appears. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration online copy offline copy Creating a RAID 5 or JBOD set Creating a RAID 5 or JBOD set Creating a RAID 5 or JBOD set Creating a RAID 5 or JBOD set Creating a RAID 5 or JBOD set Use the Silicon Image Array Management software to create a RAID 5 or JBOD configuration on Windows ® 2000/XP. g. Use the up or down arrow keys to select desired copy method, then press <Enter>. h. The utility prompts a confirmation message. Press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the configuration Main Menu. A copy progress appears if you previously selected offline copy. The online copy online copy online copy online copy online copy option automatically copies the data to the target drives on the background while writing to the source drives. The offline offline offline offline offline copy copy copy copy copy option allows you to copy the contents of the source drive to the target drives now.
5-28 5-28 5-28 5-28 5-28 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.4.3 5.4.3 5.4.3 5.4.3 5.4.3 Intel Intel Intel Intel Intel ® ® ® ® ® RAID configurations RAID configurations RAID configurations RAID configurations RAID configurations This motherboard supports RAID 0, RAID 1, and Intel ® Matrix Storage configurations for Serial ATA hard disks drives through the Intel ® ICH6R chipset. Use the Intel ® Application Accelerator RAID Option ROM utility to configure a disk array. Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items After installing the hard disk drives, make sure to set the necessary RAID items in the BIOS before setting your RAID configuration. To set the BIOS RAID items: 1. Boot the system and press <Del> during the Power-On Self-Test (POST) to enter the BIOS Setup Utility. 2. From the Main > IDE Configuration Main > IDE Configuration Main > IDE Configuration Main > IDE Configuration Main > IDE Configuration menu in the BIOS, the Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As item as RAID. 3. Set the OnBoard Serial-ATA BOOTROM OnBoard Serial-ATA BOOTROM OnBoard Serial-ATA BOOTROM OnBoard Serial-ATA BOOTROM OnBoard Serial-ATA BOOTROM item as Enabled. 4. Save your changes and exit Setup. Entering the Intel Entering the Intel Entering the Intel Entering the Intel Entering the Intel ® ® ® ® ® Application Accelerator RAID Option Application Accelerator RAID Option Application Accelerator RAID Option Application Accelerator RAID Option Application Accelerator RAID Option ROM utility ROM utility ROM utility ROM utility ROM utility To enter the Intel ® Application Accelerator RAID option ROM utility: 1. Boot up your computer. 2. During POST, press <Ctrl I> to display the main menu of the utility. [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] RAID Volumes: None defined. Non-RAID Disks: Port Drive Model Serial # Size Type/Status (Vol ID) 0 ST380013AS xxxxxxxx 74.5GB Non-RAID Disk 1 ST380013AS xxxxxxxx 74.5GB Non-RAID Disk Intel(R) Application Accelerator RAID Option ROM v4.0.0.6211 Copyright(C) 2003-04 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ MAIN MENU ] 1. Create RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 4. Exit [ ]-Select [ ]-Select [ESC] Exit [ESC] Exit [Enter]-Select Menu [Enter]-Select Menu The RAID BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference only, and may not exactly match the items on your screen.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-29 5-29 5-29 5-29 5-29 At the bottom of the screen are the navigation keys. These keys allow you to move through and select menu options. Creating a RAID Volume Creating a RAID Volume Creating a RAID Volume Creating a RAID Volume Creating a RAID Volume To create a RAID volume: 1. From the Intel Application Accelerator RAID Option ROM utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume then press <Enter>. The following screen appears. [ HELP ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length taht can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and can not contain special characters. Intel(R) Application Accelerator RAID Option ROM v4.0.0.6211 Copyright(C) 2003-04 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] Name: RAID_Volume1 RAID Level: RAID0(Stripe) Disks: Select Disk Strip Size: 128KB Capacity: 149.0GB [ ]-Change [ ]-Change [TAB]-Next [TAB]-Next [ESC] Previous Menu [ESC] Previous Menu [Enter]-Select [Enter]-Select 2. Key-in a unique name for your RAID volume then press <Enter>. 3. Use the up or down arrow keys to select your desired RAID Level then press <Enter>. a. If you selected RAID 0 (Stripe), use the up or down arrow keys to select the stripe size for your RAID 0 array then press <Enter>.The available values range from 8 KB to 128 KB. The default selection is 128 KB. The strip value should be chosen based on the planned drive usage. ⢠8 /16 KB - low disk usage ⢠64 KB - typical disk usage ⢠128 KB - performance disk usage [ ]-Change [ ]-Change [TAB]-Next [TAB]-Next [ESC] Previous Menu [ESC] Previous Menu [Enter]-Select [Enter]-Select
5-30 5-30 5-30 5-30 5-30 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: For server systems, use of a lower array block size is recommended. For multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing, a higher array block size is recommended for optimum performance. b. If you selected RAID (MIrrored), the Create Volume prompt appears. 4. On the Create Volume prompt, press <Enter> to create the array. The utility prompts a confirmation message, press <Y>. WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISK WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume (Y/N) 5. Select 4. Exit 4. Exit 4. Exit 4. Exit 4. Exit then press <Enter> to exit the RAID configuration utility. The utility prompts a confirmation message, press <Y>. Deleting a RAID Volume Deleting a RAID Volume Deleting a RAID Volume Deleting a RAID Volume Deleting a RAID Volume [ HELP ] Deleting a volume will destroy the volume data on the drive(s) and cause any member disks to become available as non-RAID disks. WARNING: EXISTING DATA WITHIN THIS VOLUME WILL BE LOST AND NON-RECOVERABLE Intel(R) Application Accelerator RAID Option ROM v4.0.0.6211 Copyright(C) 2003-04 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ DELETE ARRAY MENU ] [ ]-Select [ ]-Select [<ESC>]-Previous Menu [<ESC>]-Previous Menu [<DEL>]-Delete Volume [<DEL>]-Delete Volume Name Level Drives Capacity Status Bootable RAID_Volume1 RAID0(Stripe) 2 149.0GB Normal Yes To delete a RAID Volume: 1. Select the option 2. Delete RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume then press <Enter> to display the following. Take caution in using this option. All data on the RAID drives will be lost!
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-31 5-31 5-31 5-31 5-31 Resetting RAID Disks Drives Resetting RAID Disks Drives Resetting RAID Disks Drives Resetting RAID Disks Drives Resetting RAID Disks Drives Resetting RAID data will remove the internal RAID structures from the selected RAID disks. By removing these structures the drive will revert back to a Non-RAID disk. [ RESET RAID DATA ] WARNING: Resetting a disk causes all data on the disk to be lost. Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 STXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.0GB Member Disk 1 STXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.0GB Member Disk Select the disk that should be reset [ ]-Previous/Next [ ]-Previous/Next [Space]-Selects [Space]-Selects [Enter]-Selection Complete [Enter]-Selection Complete 2. Use the up or down arrow keys to highlight a RAID drive you wish to reset then press <Space>. 3. Repeat step 2 to select other RAID drives. 4. Press <Enter> to reset RAID drive. 5. The utility prompts a confirmation message, press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the configuration Main Menu. 2. Press <Del> to delete the RAID volume. The following confirmation message appears. ALL DATA IN THE VOLUME WILL BE LOST!! Are you sure you want to delete volume "RAID_Volume0"? (Y/N) [ VOLUME DELETE VERIFICATION ] 3. Press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the configuration Main Menu. Take caution when resetting a RAID to non-RAID. Resetting all RAID data will remove any internal RAID structure from all RAID disks! 1. Select the option 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID then press <Enter>.
5-32 5-32 5-32 5-32 5-32 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Auto Configuration...........[ 1 ] Define RAID..................[ 2 ] Delete RAID..................[ 3 ] Rebuild RAID.................[ 4 ] RAID Card Configuration......[ 5 ] IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [1]..[5] Select [ESC] Exit [MAIN MENU] 5.4.4 5.4.4 5.4.4 5.4.4 5.4.4 ITE ITE ITE ITE ITE ® ® ® ® ® 8212F RAID configurations 8212F RAID configurations 8212F RAID configurations 8212F RAID configurations 8212F RAID configurations The ITE ® 8212F IDE RAID controller supports RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1 and JBOD configurations. Use the IT8212 BIOS Setup Utility or the ATA RAID Manager application to configure a disk array. Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items After installing the hard disk drives, make sure to set the necessary RAID items in the BIOS before setting your RAID configuration. To set the BIOS RAID items: 1. Boot the system and press <Del> during the Power-On Self-Test (POST) to enter the BIOS Setup Utility. 2. From the Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration menu in the BIOS, set the ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller item to RAID Mode. 3. Save your changes and exit Setup. Entering the ITE Entering the ITE Entering the ITE Entering the ITE Entering the ITE ® ® ® ® ® 8212F Setup Utility 8212F Setup Utility 8212F Setup Utility 8212F Setup Utility 8212F Setup Utility To enter the ITE ® 8212F Setup Utility: 1. Boot up your computer. 2. The ITE8212F controller scans for IDE devices attached on the IDE RAID ports. When prompted, press <Ctrl F> or <Ctrl E> to display the main menu of the utility.
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-33 5-33 5-33 5-33 5-33 RAID Mode................................ Stripe Un-used Drive(s)......................... 4 Drive(s) in Array........................ 0 Array Capacity (size in MB).............. 8056 IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [ Auto Configuration Menu ] [ Array Configuration ] Setup Array Type as: RAID 0 [ â â â â â , â â â â â ,Space] Change Option [CTRL-Y] Save [ESC] Exit 3. At the bottom of the screen are the navigation keys. These keys allow you to move through and select from the menu options. Auto-configuring a RAID array Auto-configuring a RAID array Auto-configuring a RAID array Auto-configuring a RAID array Auto-configuring a RAID array This option allows you to select a supported RAID set for the utility to automatically configure. To auto-configure a RAID set: 1. From the IT8212 Setup Utility screen, press <1>. The following screen appears. 2. Use the left or right arrow keys or the space bar to select a RAID set. As you select an option, the screen displays the array configuration of the RAID based on the number of IDE devices installed. 3. Press <Ctrl Y> to save your RAID set. 4. Press <Esc> to exit. 4. Press the number of your selection or <Esc> to exit. [1]..[5] Select [ESC] Exit
5-34 5-34 5-34 5-34 5-34 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [ Define RAID Menu ] Array No Array Mode Drive No Size(MB) Status Array 0 ---- ---- ----- ----- Array 1 ---- ---- ----- ----- Array 2 ---- ---- ----- ----- Array 3 ---- ---- ----- ----- â â â â â : Capacity (GB) ⦠⦠⦠⦠⦠: Bootable Array [ â â â â â ] Up [ â â â â â ] Down [Space] Boot Array [Enter] Select [ESC] Exit Defining a RAID array Defining a RAID array Defining a RAID array Defining a RAID array Defining a RAID array This option allows you to define supported RAID arrays. To define a RAID array: 1. From the IT8212 Setup Utility screen, press <2>. The following screen appears. 2. Use the up or down arrow keys or the space bar to select a RAID array, then press <Enter>. The following sub-menu appears. IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [ Define RAID Sub-Menu ] â â â â â : Capacity (GB) [ â â â â â ] Up [ â â â â â ] Down [Space] Change Option [Ctrl-Y] Save [ESC] Exit Channel ID Drive Name Size(MB) Assignment Pri/D0 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Y Pri/D1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Y Sec/D0 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Y Sec/D1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Y [ Drive Assignments] Array No Array Mode Drive No Status Array 0 Stripe 4 Functional Block Size: 64KB
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-35 5-35 5-35 5-35 5-35 3. Use the up or down arrow keys to select editable fields. 4. Use the Space bar to change field values. 5. Press <Ctrl Y> to save RAID array. 6. Press <Esc> to exit. Deleting a RAID array Deleting a RAID array Deleting a RAID array Deleting a RAID array Deleting a RAID array This option allows you to delete an existing RAID array. To delete a RAID array: 1. From the IT8212 Setup Utility screen, press <3>. The following screen appears. IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [ Delete RAID Menu ] Array No Array Mode Drive No Size(MB) Status Array 0 Stripe 2 XXXXXX Functional Array 1 Mirror 2 XXXX Functional Array 2 ---- ---- ----- ----- Array 3 ---- ---- ----- ----- â â â â â : Capacity (GB) ⦠⦠⦠⦠⦠: Bootable Array [ â â â â â ] Up [ â â â â â ] Down [D] Delete [ESC] Exit 2. Use the up or down arrow keys to select a RAID array, then press <D> to delete. 3. Press <Esc> to exit.
5-36 5-36 5-36 5-36 5-36 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [ Rebuild RAID Menu ] Array No Array Mode Drive No Size(MB) Status Array 0 Stripe 4 XXXXXX Functional Array 1 Mirror 2 XXXX Functional Array 2 ---- ---- ----- ----- Array 3 ---- ---- ----- ----- â â â â â : Capacity (GB) ⦠⦠⦠⦠⦠: Bootable Array [ â â â â â ] Up [ â â â â â ] Down [Enter] Select [ESC] Exit Rebuilding a RAID array Rebuilding a RAID array Rebuilding a RAID array Rebuilding a RAID array Rebuilding a RAID array This option allows you to reconstruct an existing RAID array. This option applies only to RAID1 (Mirrored) or RAID 0 1(Striped Mirrored) sets. To rebuild a RAID array: 1. From the IT8212 Setup Utility screen, press <4>. The following screen appears. 2. Use the up or down arrow keys to select a RAID array, then press <Enter> to rebuild. The following screen appears. IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [ Source Drive ] [ Target Drive ] Channel ID Drive Name Size (MB) Pri/D1 XXXXXXXXXX XXXXX â â â â â : Capacity (GB) [ â â â â â ] Up [ â â â â â ] Down [Enter] Select [ESC] Exit [ Drive List] Channel ID Drive Name Size (MB) Sec/D1 XXXXXXXXXX XXXXX Channel ID Drive Name Size (MB) Pri/D1 XXXXXXXXXX XXXXX Sec/D1 XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX
ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe ASUS P5AD2 Deluxe 5-37 5-37 5-37 5-37 5-37 Channel 0 Interrupt: B I/P Port: 0000AC00 Channel 1 Interrupt: B I/P Port: 0000A800 IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [ RAID Card Configuration ] [ RAID Card Resource ] Auto-Rebuild: Enable â â â â â : Capacity (GB) Drive Mode: P = PIO, D = DMA, U = UDMA [ â â â â â , â â â â â ,Space] Change Option [ESC] Exit Channel Size Drive ID Drive Name (MB) Array No Mode Pri/D0 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Array 0 U5 Pri/D1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Array 0 U2 Sec/D0 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Array 0 U4 Sec/D1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Array 0 U6 [ Drive Status ] 3. Use the up or down arrow keys to select a drive, then press <Enter>. Follow succeeding screen instructions. 4. Press <Esc> to exit. Viewing your RAID configuration Viewing your RAID configuration Viewing your RAID configuration Viewing your RAID configuration Viewing your RAID configuration This option allows you to view your RAID configuration. You can also enable or disable the Auto-rebuild function in this section. To view your RAID configuration: 1. From the IT8212 Setup Utility screen, press <5>. The following screen appears. 2. Use the left or right keys or the space bar enable or disable the Auto-rebuild Auto-rebuild Auto-rebuild Auto-rebuild Auto-rebuild item. 3. Press <Esc> to exit.
5-38 5-38 5-38 5-38 5-38 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.5 Creating a RAID driver disk A floppy disk with the RAID driver is required when installing Windows ® 2000/XP operating system on a hard disk drive that is included in a RAID set. To create a RAID driver disk: 1. Place the motherboard support CD in the optical drive. 2. When the Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers menu appears, select the RAID driver disk you wish to create: ⢠Click Make ITE8212 Driver Disk Make ITE8212 Driver Disk Make ITE8212 Driver Disk Make ITE8212 Driver Disk Make ITE8212 Driver Disk t o create an ITE ® 8212F RAID driver disk. ⢠Click Make Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk t o create a Silicon Image SATARaid⢠RAID driver disk Or Or Or Or Or Browse the contents of the support CD to locate the driver disk utility: ⢠ITE8212 RAID Driver Disk ITE8212 RAID Driver Disk ITE8212 RAID Driver Disk ITE8212 RAID Driver Disk ITE8212 RAID Driver Disk : \Drivers\ITE8212\MakeDisk ⢠Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk Silicon Image RAID Driver Disk : \Drivers\Sil3114\RAID_Disk ⢠Intel Intel Intel Intel Intel ® RAID Driver Disk RAID Driver Disk RAID Driver Disk RAID Driver Disk RAID Driver Disk : \Drivers\Chipset\Intel\IAA\F6 Install Floppy\F6flpy32 3. Insert a formatted high-density floppy disk to the floppy disk drive. 4. Follow screen instructions to complete the process. 5. After creating a RAID driver disk, eject the floppy disk, then write-protect it to prevent computer virus infection. To install the RAID driver: 1. Install an operating system to the selected hard disk drive. During installation, the computer prompts you to press the F6 F6 F6 F6 F 6 key if you are installing a third-party SCSI or RAID driver. 2. Press <F6>, then insert the RAID driver disk to the floppy disk drive. 3. Follow screen instructions to install the RAID drivers. Refer to section â5.2.2 Drivers menuâ for details.